2 Copyright

Copyright
This documentation is protected by law. All rights, especially the right
of duplication, circulation, and translation, are reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in the form of copies,

microfilms or other processes, or transmitted into a language used for
machines, especially data processing machines, without the express
written consent of the publisher.

All copyrights reserved.

All other product names are trademarks of the corresponding

manufacturers. Errors in and changes to the contents as well as
program modifications reserved.

Created under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

© 1992 - 2009 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

MAGIX is a registered trademark of MAGIX AG.

This product uses MAGIX patent pending technology.

Copyright © MAGIX AG, 2001 - 2009. All rights reserved.

www.magix.com
 Preface 3

Preface
Congratulations! You have just purchased a lavishly equipped and
easy to use video studio which makes all thinkable video functions
available for: recording, editing, subtitling, dubbing, mixing,
transitioning, effects editing, optimizing, reverse transferring, and
burning CD-ROM, (S) Video CD, and DVD / Blu-ray DiscsTM.

The possibilities are endless: from quickly editing your holiday videos
to composing elaborate multimedia masterpieces. For example:

• DVD movie memories of vacations, parties, sports, or special family

events
• Video web pages
• CD or DVD movies and slideshows
• Web movies, email greetings, or streaming movies
• Enhanced presentations, instructional courses
• Ad spots or TV trailers
• Music videos, karaoke shows, animation, fun clips

The printed manual only contains the basic functions of both program
versions MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 and MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
Plus. Additional features of the Plus version are marked accordingly.

In addition to the printed manual, there is also more detailed

documentation which is copied to your hard drive during installation.
This electronic PDF manual describes all program functions and even
gives you an overview of everything interesting for the different disc
formats such as CDs, VCDs, SVCDs and DVDs.

This information will get you started on your way to making your first
movie masterpiece. The reference chapter later on and the index can
also be used to help quickly when you need it.

Enjoy!

The MAGIX team

www.magix.com
4 Preface

Table of Contents

Copyright 2

Preface 3

Support 11

Serial number 13

System requirements 14

MAGIX Online World 14

MAGIX Online Album 14
MAGIX Blog Service 15
MAGIX Website Maker 15
MAGIX Online Print Service 15
Catooh – the Online Content Library 15

Introduction 16
What is MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16? 16
What’s new in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16? 16
Features 19
Extra in the Plus version 24

Work areas 28
"Record" screen 28
"Edit" screen 29
Video monitor 30
Media Pool 33
Toolbars 38
Arranger 48
Adjusting the workspace 49
The "Burn" screen 50

Create new video project 51

Movie settings 51
New project disc settings or new movie 55
Load project 55
Save project 56
Save project as... 56

Video recording 56
Connect camera 56

www.magix.com
 Preface 5
Select the recording method 59
DV cameras 60
DV as MPEG 64
HDV camera 65
Batch recording 66
Logging 67
Record dialog analog video recording 68
Single frame 70
Record screen contents (Plus version) 73
Edit after recording 74
Audio 76
AVCHD recording (Plus version) 79
Import a non-copy-protected DVD 80

MAGIX Videorecorder 81
Hook up TVs, monitors or projectors 81
Buttons overview 82
VCR settings 83
Setup for DVB cards 85
Configure channels for analog reception 87
Channel list for analog programs 88
Channel list for DVB cards 91
TV program 93
Timer programming 94
Manual timer programming 96
Timeshift mode 97
Save recorded programs 98

Insert object into the project 99

Video monitor 99
Load files 100
Load parts of film files. 100
MPEG-4 import 101
Automatic scene detection 101

Working with objects 103

Select objects 103
Moving objects 103
Splitting objects 103
Edit menu 104
Duplicate objects 105
Object handles 105
Shrink or interlace videos 106
Extract sound from videos 106
Save objects separately 107

www.magix.com
6 Preface
Video mix 107
Magnetic objects 108
Transitions (fades) 109
Overview mode 113
Grid and snap 114
Searching for and removing ads (Plus version) 115

Markers 116
Playback marker 116
Set project marker 117
Area marker (in and out points) 117
Chapter markers 118
Scene markers 120
Ad markers 121

Trim Objects 122

General advice for operating both trim editors 122
Trimmer for individual objects 123
Cut trimmer 124

Multi-cam editing (Plus version) 126

Preparation 126
Source tracks and preview images 127
Multicam edit functions 128

Titles and effects 129

3D-Text (Plus-Version) 129
Apply fades 130
Apply effects to objects 130
Video effects in the Media Pool 130
Movement effects in the Media Pool 137
Additional effects 143
Image stabilization 146
Create panorama pictures 148
Borders 149
Title editor 150
Slideshow Maker 154
Master effects 157
TV picture 159
Audio Effects 160

Animate objects 178

Preparing animations 178
Place keyframe 179
Copy keyframe 179
Display keyframes of individual parameters 179

www.magix.com
 Preface 7
Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes 180
Soft movement 180
Delete keyframe 180
Editing an effects curve in the object 181
Effects curves - Additional functions 181

Add sound 182

Load and edit audio files 182
Import audio CD 183
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker 186
Tempo and beat recognition (Plus version) 188
Adding a sound track using MIDI songs 193
Synthesizer 194
Mixer 200
Audio effects 203
5.1 Surround 204
Scrubbing 210
Mix down of audio objects 211

Managing video projects 212

Backup copy 212
Load backup project... 214
Clean-up wizard 214

Options for using the final movie 215

Create playable disc 215
Export movie 215
Export audio/video 223

Burn discs 233

Preview and editing 234
Menu 236
Templates 236
Edit disc menu 238
Burn dialog for DVD player 248
Create PC show 252
Create webDVD 252

Batch conversion 253

Open batch conversion 253
Administration 254
Queued entries for batch conversion 254
Format settings for the selected conversion process 254
Shut down PC automatically after successful export 255
Start batch conversion 255

www.magix.com
8 Preface

Menus 256
File menu 256
Edit menu 263
Effects (FX) 271
Windows menu 277
Online menu 279
Tasks menu 279
Help menu 279

Context menu (right click) 284

Video objects 284
Image objects 290
Transitions 295
Audio objects 296
Text objects 301
MAGIX 3D Maker objects 304

Program settings 309

Play 309
Directory settings 312
Video/Audio 313
System 315
Display templates 316
Display options 317

Problems and solutions 319

File will not load 319
Choppy or uneven playback 319
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant 320
Activation problems 320

Online functions 322

Integrated browser 322
MAGIX News Center 324
Online 324
Embed Flash videos into your own web page 334

Keyboard shortcuts 336

Playback functions 336
Arranger view 336
Move view 336
Transport control in Media pool 337
Mouse modes 337
File menu 337
Edit menu 339

www.magix.com
 Preface 9
Effects menu 340
Window menu 341
Help 341
Edit keyboard shortcut 342

Activate additional functions 344

Free activation (MPEG-2, MPEG-4, Dolby Digital 2.0 & 5.1) 344

Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 346

Video Editing on the PC 346
MPEG Compression 346
General notes on AVI videos 347
Overview of the different disc types 348

MPEG-4 encoder settings 357

MPEG-4 357
AVC / H.264 363
AMR 371
AAC 371
Multiplexer 373

Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 375

General settings 375
Video settings 376
Advanced video settings 377
Audio settings 378

MPEG glossary 381

Motion estimation 381
Bit rate 381
Block 382
Chroma format 382
Field 383
Frame 383
GOP 383
I frames 384
Interlace 384
P frames and B frames 386
Prediction 386
Quantization scaling 388

If you still have questions... 389

Task assistant 389
Online lexicon 389
Program help 389

www.magix.com
10 Preface

Index 391

www.magix.com
 Support 11

Support
If you experience any problems with your software, please contact
our support team:

Support website: http://support.magix.net/contact/us

This website takes you to the MAGIX user service page; the following
free offers are also featured there:

• FAQs (frequently asked questions) and general tricks and tips. In

most cases, you’ll find the solution to your problem here. If not, use
the email support form.
• Email support form: Use the special form to inform our support staff
about your system. This information is used to solve your problems
quickly and competently. Simply fill it out and send it with a mouse
click!
• Support forum: You are not alone... Perhaps other users had a
similar problem and can help you solve yours. Our support staff are
also regular contributors.
• Download section: Updates, improvements, and patches are
likewise offered free of charge via download. Many problems you
may experience are already familiar to us, and they can often be
solved by downloading the latest patch. Besides patches, there are
also wizards for checking and optimizing your system.
• Links: The links list contains the contact addresses for all of the most
important hardware manufacturers.

Please note: To be able to use the support, you have to register your
product using the serial number provided. This number can be found
on the CD case of your installation CD or on the inside of the DVD
box.

You can also reach our support team by telephone:

UK: 0203 3183666 (Mon. - Fri., 09:00-16:00 GMT)

USA/Canada: 1-775-562-0527 (Mon.–Fri. 9 am to 5 pm EST)
Denmark: 699 18763 (Mon.- Fri. 10:00 - 17:00)
Finland (Suomi): 09 42419023 (Mon.- Fri. 11:00 - 18:00)
Norway: 210 35843 (Mon.- Fri. 10:00 - 17:00)
Sweden: 0852500713 (Mon.- Fri. 10:00 - 17:00)

www.magix.com
12 Support

You can request a free access code to the phone support hotline by
clicking on this link: http://support.magix.net/phone. There you'll also
get additional information and explanations about phone support.

Please have the following information at hand:

• Program version
• Configuration details (operating system, processor, memory, hard
drive, etc.), sound card configuration (type, driver)
• Information regarding other audio software installed

You can also contact our support team by mail:

UK/Scandinavia: MAGIX Development Support, P.O. Box 20 09 14,

01194 Dresden, Germany

US/Canada: MAGIX Customer Service, 1105 Terminal Way #302,

Reno, NV 89502, USA

Customer service & upgrades (US only)

Periodically, MAGIX offers users who purchased their software an
upgrade from a previous product to the current version. For details
about an upgrade, please call us using the following number:

Sales Department 1-305-722-5810

Monday to Friday 9am – 5pm (EST)

www.magix.com
 Serial number 13

Serial number
A serial number is included with each product, and although it is not
required for the installation of the software, it does enable access to
additional bonus services. Please store this number in a safe place.

What can a serial number do?

A serial number ensures that your copy of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
is clearly assigned to you and only you, and it makes improved and
more targeted customer service possible. Abuse of the software can
be prevented with a serial number, since it ensures that the optimum
price/performance ratio continues to be offered by MAGIX.

Where can the serial number be found?

The serial number can be found on the reverse side of your CD/DVD
case. If your product, for example, is packed in a DVD box, then
you'll find the serial number on the inside.

For versions that have been especially optimized for the Internet
(download versions), you'll receive your serial number for activating
the software directly after purchasing the product via email.

When will you need the serial number?

The serial number is required when you start or register MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16 for the first time.

Note: We explicitly recommend registering your product, since only

then are you entitled to get program updates and contact MAGIX
Support (see "Support"). Entering the serial number is also required
for activating codecs (view page 343).

www.magix.com
14 System requirements

System requirements
For Microsoft® Windows® XP / VistaTM

• Intel Pentium 4 or AMD Athlon 1 GHz and higher (for DV to MPEG-2

transcoding/screen capturing at least 2 GHz are recommended)
• 512 MB RAM
• 1 GB hard disk memory and a DVD drive for program installation
• Graphics card with a screen resolution of at least 1024x768
• Sound card (multi-channel sound card recommended for Surround
sound editing)

Minimum requirements for HD editing:

• Intel Pentium 4 with 3 GHz or dual core with at least 1.3 GHz
• 1 GB RAM (2 GB or more recommended)
• DirectX® 9.0c compatible graphics card, min. 128 MB VRAM, and
Pixelshader 2.0, ATI X300 or better, NVIDIA GeForce 6600 or better

Recommended minimum requirements for AVCHD editing

• Intel® Core™ 2 quad processor with 2.66 GHz
• 3 GB RAM
• ATI Radeon HD 3000 series or higher with 512 MB VRAM

MAGIX Online World

MAGIX Online World from MAGIX offers you a range of new services
for your photos, videos, and music that are accessible directly from
the "Online" menu in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16:

MAGIX Online Album

MAGIX Online Album is your personal multimedia album on the
Internet. If you want to present slideshows or videos online, then
MAGIX Online Album is the perfect service.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Online World 15

MAGIX Blog Service

With MAGIX Blog Service, YOU make the news! Share your thoughts,
experiences, and news with a worldwide audience in no time using
your own interactive online multimedia journal. Invite family, friends,
and acquaintances to join in and enter their comments! A free MAGIX
Online Album belongs to the MAGIX Blog Service so that you always
have full control over your contributions.

You can also read the FAQ (frequently asked questions) on the
Internet. http://rdir.magix.net/?page=GRF14Q24VIRN

MAGIX Website Maker

MAGIX Website Maker helps you create a personal Internet showcase
with a professional design in just a few mouse clicks – without prior
knowledge, including your own chosen domain and email address.
Publish slideshows and videos and accessorize your site with music
and various effects – anything from a simple business card to a
fireworks display of effects, professional or private – show your best
side!

More about this topic can be found under MAGIX Website Maker.
(view page 330)

MAGIX Online Print Service

MAGIX Online Print Service is perfect for getting your pictures
processed online or printed as photo gifts on mugs, t-shirts, or
calendars.

Catooh – the Online Content Library

If your project is missing pictures, videos, DVD menus, sounds, or
samples, then you should have a look at the huge selection available
at Catooh. There you'll be able to buy media in excellent quality for
low prices: DVD menus, Slideshow Maker styles, decorative
elements, 3D power effects, 3D transition series, MAGIX Soundpools,
songs, ringtones... Perfectly suited to all MAGIX photo, video, and
music projects.

www.magix.com
16 Introduction

Introduction

What is MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16?

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 is a complete movie studio for your PC.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 lets you easily transmit your recordings to
your computer and then, once you have improved and enriched
them, onto DVD and Blu-ray Disc TM. It's great for theater-quality
presentations on TV, screen, or monitor.

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 is a production studio for the PC for editing
videos, movies, photos, and audio from a wide range of sources.
Long movies can be automatically separated into different chapters or
scenes, or do the opposite by automatically incorporating short takes
into a single movie.

Add music, theater-quality transitions, text, and selected effects to

your own movies with a mouse click. The easy-to-use interface,
advanced technology and handy assistants guarantee perfect results
at lightning speed!

Once your movie is finished, you can use it again in a number of

ways: Transfer it back onto tape or to your camcorder, burn it onto
DVD or Blu-ray DiscTM and enjoy it on TV, or put it online for your
friends and family in your personal MAGIX Online Album.

What’s new in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16?

Improved file import
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16's support of video formats (view page 19)
has been improved, and new formats have been added.

• For DVD videos multiple audio tracks, the corresponding audio track
(view page 100) may be selected.
• OGG and MP3 are now read directly; conversion to the WAV format
is omitted. For importing of DVDs with multiple audio tracks (e.g.
multi-lingual videos), the corresponding audio track can be selected
via the context menu for the respective audio object.

www.magix.com
 Introduction 17
Creating backgrounds
The Media Pool (view page 36) features useful templates for various
applications. For example, there are professional backgrounds for
measurements, but there are also special templates with more
creative freedom and adjustable color schemes.

Performance test for your PC during AVCHD import

A performance test has been integrated into MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 for loading AVCHD videos. This tests whether your computer is
powerful enough to edit AVCHD material directly.

Revised MAGIX MovieShow Maker

MAGIX Slideshow Maker (view page 153) has been heavily revised.
Effects and fades can now be set and adjusted in detail. This
program is accessible via "Edit -> Wizards -> Slideshow Maker".

Secondary color correction

Secondary color correction (view page 132) allows the colors in an
area of an image to be edited independently from the rest of the
image. To do this, the image is separated into fore and background
segments. For each layer, a color range can be selected and edited
with the eyedropper tool. Color correction can be found in the Media
Pool under "Video effects -> Color correction".

Object zoom
Activate this mode and click on an object to zoom in for detailed
editing. This allows individual drum hits in a loop to be edited in a very
detailed way or cut. Select the object and then you will see a button
with four arrows pointing outwards on it in the lower right section of
the arranger. Click this button again to reset the view to the original
settings.

Verbesserte Audio-Vorhörmöglichkeit (Scrubbing)

Scrubbing (view page 210) originates from the time of tape machines
and provides quicker monitoring of passages of a film or piece of
music. This was technically implemented in these devices by keeping
the tape head on the tape itself, but the motor doesn't drive the tape
rolls in this case. Instead the tape is "manually" set to the desired
position. Scrubbing in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 is available beneath
the transport controls via a large wheel, which may be used to move
the playback marker.

www.magix.com
18 Introduction
Audio effects animation in the Media Pool
Audio effects can also be animated in the Media Pool in the same
way as video effects. Automation curves that were normally difficult to
draw can now be set and changes with just few keyframes. Because
these curves are object-related, the entire arrangement remains
clearly laid-out with even complex automations. The button for
animations is located in the Media Pool (like video effects).

Improved video upload

Video uploads to video portals and communities (view page 261) can
now even be done in HD quality, and in most cases, without
recalculation on the video portal or community website. Upload
functions are accessible via "File -> Internet".

Revised DVD menu design

The DVD menu design function has been generally revised. You can
access this option directly with the "Burn" button.

New title editor

Titles, text, opening and end credits are now written directly in the
preview monitor so that you can see immediately exactly where your
titles will be positioned. Click the "Title" button in the Media Pool,
select a template and place it onto the track via drag & drop. You
may now edit your titles in the preview window.

Additional innovations in the PLUS and Premium versions

Additional innovations in the PLUS and Premium versions versus the
classic version:

• Secondary color correction for impressive color effects

• Level display for audio file import
• Extended jump markers for improved project navigation
• Creation of colored surfaces/color scroll generator
• Upload videos to Vimeo
• Travel route animation
• MAGIX Music Editor with optimized user guidance
• Advanced support for Blu-ray and AVCHD discs
• More functions for DVD menu design
• Timeline zoom for individual objects
• Internal PC performance benchmarking for optimized presets

www.magix.com
 Introduction 19
Additional innovations in the Premium version
• proDAD Mercalli Expert: The ultimate solution for stabilizing video
clips retroactively
• proDAD Adorage HD SE: Video effects and transitions in HD quality
• XXL sound pack: Features over 500 sounds and complete songs

Features
Recording
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 provides the following recording options:

• DV cameras: Mini DV camcorders or DV video recorders

• HDV cameras: HDV1 and HDV2 camcorders
• Video: Analog TV, video input, VHS recorders, webcams
• Single frame: Single and series images from webcams, video
recorders, video cameras, or TV cards
• Audio: Microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players, turntables
• Screen (Plus version only): PC monitor.

Analog capture requires capture cards compatible with DirectShow.

DV capture can be performed through an OHCI-compatible IEEE
1394 host adapter (Firewire or iLink). A TV card can be used to
record programs from TV or from your video recorder.

Import/Export formats
Video files: Video for Windows and DV-AVI type 1/2 (*.avi), MPEG-1
and 2 (*.mpg,*.mp2,*.MPEG), QuickTime (*.mov), MAGIX Video
(*.mxv), Windows Media, VOB streams from DVD (unencrypted),
AVCHD (import only, only in the Plus version), MPEG-4 (*.mp4) (after
fee-based activation). Activation is free in the Plus version.

Note: To import and export AVC and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4
codec must first be activated (view page 343). A dialog will open if the
codec is required. Files with a horizontal resolution of more than 768
pixels can only be loaded in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus.

Audio files: The following formats are supported for soundtracks.

Wave, MP3 (Windows Media Player 10 is required for export), WMA,
OGG Vorbis, MIDI files, and audio CD tracks.

www.magix.com
20 Introduction
Graphics files (for slideshows or as a still behind a scrolling title):
Windows bitmaps (BMP), JPEG, GIF, Animated GIF, ZSoft Paintbrush
(PCX), PNG, Portable Pixmap (PPM), Portable Greymap (PGM),
Adobe Photoshop (PSD), Sun Rasterfile, Targa (TGA), Tagged Image
File Format (TIFF), Photo CD (PCD).

Text files in RTF format: You may conveniently enter text like closing
credits into any text editor and then save it in the universal text format
(.rtf). Loading such text into MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 creates a title
object.

Note:

AVI video files in DivX™ format can only be imported with the
corresponding codec installed! The DivX codec can be downloaded
from www.divx.com.

The QuickTime Library has to be installed to import QuickTime files

(*.mov).

Additional export formats: In addition to the above-mentioned audio

and video formats, the following formats can also be exported:
RealMedia™, BMP, Snapshot function (export any film motif as a
bitmap or JPEG file). In addition, MAGIX Online Album can be used to
create a Flash video. The video to be uploaded to the MAGIX Online
Album will be exported in Windows Media format, and from there it
can be exported as a Flash video.

You can read more information about importing and exporting files in
the "Media Pool" chapter.

AVCHD standard support

Files from AVCHD cameras can be either read directly or imported.
Newer computers are capable of decoding and playing this format in
realtime.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 does a performance check in order to make
sure that the computer has enough computing capacity. If the chck
indicates that the computer is insufficient, AVCHD material is
transformed into a MPEG-2 file, to allow older systems to edit it, too.

Note: To import AVCHD video, the camera drive must be installed

even if you are working with portable media (8 cm DVDs, SD memory

www.magix.com
 Introduction 21
card, etc.). Reason: AVCHD cameras use an improved UDF file
system which Windows can't handle without the driver.

AVCHD Lite
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 now also supports the AVCHD Lite
standard, which is used by digital cameras for recording video
(among other things).

Attention: For AVCHD support, Dolby Digital Stereo and the MPEG-4
codec must be activated. To convert AVCHD video to MPEG-2, the
MPEG-2 codec must be activated.

Burnable disc formats

• 1:1 copies of DVDs & (S)VCDs
• Double-layer DVDs
• VCDs (MPEG-1 on CD-R)
• S-VCDs (MPEG-2 on CD-R)
• DVD (MPEG-2 on DVD)
• miniDVDs (MPEG-2 on CD-R)
• Blu-ray Discs
• AVCHD disc to DVD and Blu-ray
• Project backups and backup copies

Automatic scene recognition

Long films are automatically divided into shorter scenes upon import
or even retroactively.

Timeline mode / Storyboard mode / Overview mode

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 provides three specialized views for
especially easy editing:

• All scenes from your film are listed sequentially in Storyboard mode.
Every scene is displayed with a preview picture in the storyboard.
• Timeline mode chronologically displays your photos with text and
sound elements over four tracks: The longer the representative
object remains in the track, the longer the corresponding photo will
be displayed during playback. In total you have four tracks to arrange
your scenes with titles, movie sequences, or music.
• Overview mode displays all scenes in multiple rows. The zoom
function makes sure that the number of scenes you want to view can
be viewed at the same time.

www.magix.com
22 Introduction
• The Plus version also features Multicam mode (view page 125),
which can be switched on in Timeline mode. This mode allows you
to edit together two camera perspectives comfortably.

Optimize Video/Audio
Every film and every video can be optimized for image quality, color
improvement (RGB, saturation), sharpness (sharp and soft filters),
brightness control (brightness, contrast) and pushed through an anti-
flicker filter (Deinterlace). The sound quality of every movie and every
video can also be optimized. The equalizer allows you to manipulate
the frequency spectrum – perfect for cleaning up muffled dialog. The
compressor is a dynamic volume control that can lend the overall
sound a deeper, richer quality. The stereo effects processor justifies
the position of the sound in the stereo panorama, while the DeNoiser
and DeHisser are professional noise reduction tools which perform
the function indicated by their names.

Effects
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 offers numerous effects and effects settings
options as described in detail in the chapter "Effects and titles". A
short overview:

• Every object (every video, every single scene, every photo, and every
audio recording) can be provided with its own individual effects
combination. Every effects combination can be saved separately so
that you can use it later on different objects. Right click the object
and choose the "Save video effects" option in the context menu.
• Video effects are selected and set up in the "Effects" folder in the
Media Pool. Most effects allow "keyframes" to control their behavior.
The current settings only become effective beginning with the first
selected keyframe. The next keyframe activates the settings present
at that keyframe. The area between two keyframes approximates the
corresponding effects settings ("tweening").
• Video effects can be controlled using effects curves. A curve is
shown in the video's object display which controls the application of
the effect; the higher the curve, the more intense the effect.
Keyframes are indicated by curve handles, and these can be
manipulated as desired. For every curve handle, Bezier handles can
be generated to create harmonic curves and effects automations.
• Effects presets are standardized effects configurations for the most
important cases. They can be used via drag & drop; just hold down
the mouse button and drag the selected effect from the Media Pool
to the desired object - finished.
• The effects mixer (”Slide FX”) combines or interweaves an
assortment of recordings to create a complex visual arrangement. To

www.magix.com
 Introduction 23
execute this effect, simply drag the transitions to the space between
two videos.

MAGIX MovieShow Maker

MAGIX Slideshow Maker turns drab photo collages into spectacular
multimedia shows. With just one click, your footage is professionally
optimized and enhanced with suitable music, authentic noises, smart
transitions, text templates that can be edited, animations, effects and
video clips. Just try it out!

MAGIX Soundtrack Maker

If you need a soundtrack, MAGIX Soundtrack Maker offers a massive
selection of suitable sounds for background music in different
variations, from "funky" to "easy listening" – simply add music to your
movie project. The result is real movie background music with
changing moods to perfectly match your images.

Multimedia editable DVD menus

The program includes many DVD menu templates (for chapter
selection, etc.) for projects intended for TV, and some are also in 16:9
widescreen format. They can be easily inserted during the burning
process to give the DVD a professional look.

Every menu template can be customized with your own photos,

thematic animations, 3D titles, sound, intro videos, etc. Write with
flowers if your video takes place on a meadow, or with clouds if
you’ve flown somewhere. A lovingly created menu always makes a
great impression. It's your video's calling card.

Time-saving VHS copying technique

Use your analog PC video card to quickly transfer old videos to high-
quality MPEG-2 format directly from your VHS recorder. The movie
and its interactive menu can be automatically burned directly to disc
after capture/transfer.

www.magix.com
24 Introduction
MAGIX Videorecorder
MAGIX Videorecorder's design is especially suited to viewing and
navigating videos, photos, audio, and TV by remote control. MAGIX
Videorecorder includes:

• TV/Video recorder for analog TV and DVB-T/S for easily recording

TV on your PC. You can easily select and record analog TV and DVB
programs with your PC-compatible remote control.
• Improved PC-remote control compatible MAGIX Online TV Guide
(EPG): With the DVB program guide, you can access all available
information related to the selected program, record it directly, or
earmark it for fully automatic recording. You can also open an
illustrated Internet program guide with plenty of detailed information.

MAGIX Videorecorder can be opened separately via the "Start" menu

or activated in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16's recording dialog, which
can be accessed via the red button below the preview monitor.

Task assistant + Video tooltips

The "Tasks" menu option provides all of the important functions as
well as tips & tricks for your movies. With the applicable tool tip you
receive valuable information. Just a simple click immediately opens
the desired function or a wizard video for the task.

Extra in the Plus version

Additional disc formats
• WMVHD (Windows Media High Definition Disc): WMVHD is a type
of disc optimized for movie playback on PCs. The movies are
converted into high-resolution Windows Media 9 format and a menu
is added, like with DVDs. Windows Media Player 9, or higher is
required for successful playback. Video encoding will be preset for
HDTV resolution (1280 x 720, also known as "720p")
• JPEG disc (for displaying photos on TV): With the "JPEG disc"
option, every photo in the disc project is individually exported and
burned to a CD or DVD in JPEG format. The disc can be played back
later using photo disc-compatible DVD players. If a project contains
several slideshows, a subfolder will be created for each one, and the
corresponding images will be placed into each one. On a JPEG disc
there are no menus, sounds, animated effects or transitions.
However, it does offer the best possible quality available for TV
playback.

www.magix.com
 Introduction 25
• AVCHD disc (view page 352): Burn a disc in the AVCHD format
here. This high-resolution format makes it possible to add 30
minutes of film to a DVD or 160 minutes of film to a Blu-ray Disc.
• MultiDisc: Conventional video DVD, high-resolution HD discs, and
complete backup projects are burned onto the disc.

Download media directly from the Internet

Videos, pictures, texts, and sounds which are freely available on the
Internet can be found and copied into the Media Pool at the click of a
button via the newly integrated web browser. Audio files can be
recorded using the analog input on the sound card, and video
recorded directly from the screen. The media files are then
immediately available for use in your own project. You can find this
function in the Media Pool under "Tasks -> Import -> Online media".

Support for AVCHD camcorders

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus also supports camcorders that use the
AVCHD format. AVCHD is currently used by video cameras that
record directly to DVDs, SD cards, memory sticks, or hard disk. Files
from AVCHD cameras can be either read directly or imported. During
import the files can be converted to MPEG-2 format. Import requires
approximately three times the playback time.

Hint:For AVCHD support Dolby® Digital Stereo import must be

activated. For AVCHD import, MPEG2 codec must be activated.
Read the hints for using AVCHD in the chapter "Import and export"
(view page 19) or the PDF tutorial "Working with AVCHD material"!

Synthesizer
The Ambient Synth is a well-developed tool for easily producing
realistic natural noises, from rain and thunderstorms to animal sounds
and traffic noise. The Drum&Bass machine includes throbbing bass
lines and powerful beats in one device, allowing you to create great
modern mood music, even if you don't have previous experience.

DV logging
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus also features a DV logging option. You
no longer need to save large DV-AVI and audio files, since MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16 saves the position of this material on the DV tape
and imports missing files automatically when reloading the DV tape.

www.magix.com
26 Introduction
Custom multi-channel Surround 5.1 sound
Create custom multi-channel Surround 5.1 sound for your videos.
With Dolby Digital® audio (5.1 Surround) you can burn your videos for
any DVD player (requires a fee-based Dolby Digital® codec
activation).

Customize keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts are very useful for working more quickly and
professionally. For this reason, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus offers
an editor for individual adjustment of keyboard shortcuts for almost all
important commands.

Create a disc project as an ISO image

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus now allows you to save your disc
project as an ISO image file as well. "ISO" image is the technical
term for the exact memory map of the content of a disc. An ISO
image file can work directly with all standard burning programs and
makes multiple burnings especially easily. Select the "Image" option
under "Burner" to do so.

MAGIX Xtreme Print Center

MAGIX Xtreme Print Center is a printing suite for CD, DVD, and VHS
label printing. You can conveniently print perfect stickers, covers,
inlays, and booklets for your projects.

MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer

MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer offers you high-quality image editing
software for any situation. The newly integrated Task Assistant
explains frequently used tasks in an easy-to-understand manner. The
program interface is now even more intuitive due to an entirely new
program interface look and improved user navigation. MAGIX Xtreme
Photo Designer can be accessed via the "Effects" button for each
scene or the context menu for image files.

MAGIX Music Editor

MAGIX Music Editor is a full WAV editor with all necessary cutting,
editing & effect functions as well as numerous import/export
functions. You can open audio objects from MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
with a mouse click in the MAGIX Music Editor. There you'll be able to
take advantage of lots of additional powerful tools, for example, a
function for freehand drawing of waveforms. This can be used to fix
the most stubborn distortions that cannot be eliminated completely
using the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 DeClicker.

www.magix.com
 Introduction 27
More extras
• TV ad killer (removes TV commercial blocks automatically)
• 99 stereo tracks for more flexible arranging
• Professional reference track (according to TV and movie standard)
• VirtualDub plug-in interface for external video effects or removing TV
channel logos
• BPM recognition for music videos with precise rhythmic editing
options
• Import/export of Bitmap and TIF series (e.g. from 3D applications)
• Legal backup copies of protected video DVDs via analog recording
from your DVD player
• Freely definable motion paths for dynamic camera movements and
zooms
• 3D design for perspective picture-in-picture alignment, 3D outros,
and more
• Transition export: Create individual transition effects from your
favorite scene
• Audio Mastering Suite 2.0 for professional sound on soundtracks
• Menu background design options
• Seamless integration of effect plug-in proDAD Vitascene

www.magix.com
28 Work areas

Work areas

"Record" screen

1 Menubar: The different menus give you access to MAGIX

Movie Edit Pro 16's different functions.
2 Toolbar: Here you will find a number of buttons for quick
access to important functions.
3 Screens: Here you will find the switches for the "Record",
"Edit", and "Burn CD" screens.
4 Preview monitor: In the preview monitor you can view your
recorded or imported video.
5 Transport control: The transport control resembles the
playback controls of a DVD player. You can use these
buttons to control the preview in the preview monitor.
6 Record functions: The "Record", "Import file", "Copy
CD/DVD" (PLUS version only), and "TV & Media Center"
buttons can be used to start the main functions of these
screens.
7 Filmbox: Movies and their preview images will be added to
the filmboxes during importing.

www.magix.com
 Work areas 29

"Edit" screen

1 Upper button bar: Here are the buttons for quick access to
important commands.
2 Menu bar: Most functions in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can be
accessed via the menu bar.
3 Program monitor: Video and image objects are displayed and
files from the Media Pool can be previewed here.
4 Templates: Here you can find the directories for fades,
transitions, titles, effects and movements. To preview a
template, simply click on it to see a preview. With "Catooh" you
will be directly connected to the Internet to open the Online
Media Library.
5 Media Pool: In the Media Pool you can load your photos and
other media files. Using the generic navigation icons you can
access any drive or folder on your PC.
6 Modes:
• Storyboard mode displays all scenes in the current video in a
panel so that they can be easily manipulated and arranged.
• Timeline mode is for more involved arrangement and effects
work.
• Overview mode displays all the objects on the first track and

www.magix.com
30 Work areas
enables quick sorting of the scenes.
• The right button activates Multicam mode in the Plus version.
7 Lower toolbar: Here you can select the Timeline or different
mouse modes for various editing functions.
8 Timeline with range markers: Defines the range that will be
played. In Timeline mode, this is done using time intervals.
9 Arranger : Drag & drop files from the Media Pool, then arrange
and edit files in detail here.
10 Scroll bars: The lower scroll bars can be dragged apart and
pushed together for zooming with the mouse. The right scroll
bar vertically zooms into the tracks. The right scroll bar zooms
vertically into the tracks. Click on the edge of the scroll bars
with the mouse button held down to change the visible window
in the arranger.

Video monitor
All selection processes are conducted on the video monitor. Here you
can view and edit material before importing. There is a preview
function for all of the files in the Media Pool.

• Use the playback button to start the preview of video or image

objects in Media Pool. For special objects like titles or fades a
preview is given.
• Audio files and synthesizer objects from the Media Pool can also be
listened to using the playback button.

Tip: Useful presets for the arranger and video monitor can be found in
the tab Display presets (view page 316) in the program settings.

Full screen view

The option "full screen" in the context menu maximizes the preview
monitor. Alternatively, a double click on the monitor or "A+Enter" also
maximizes the window. The fullscreen view is especially
recommended for working with two screens; one screen for the film
preview, and the other for the arranger.

You can also shift the monitor into full screen mode and access it via
the context menu (right mouse button). There, you can also hide and
display the basic transport controls.

With "Esc" you will go back to the normal view (or click on "smaller"
button to the right in the fullscreen mode).

www.magix.com
 Work areas 31
Show movie overview
The option "Film overview" in the "Window" menu enables an
overview of teh entire arranger. All objects in the arranger will be
displayed in the program monitor. The overview display is especially
recommended for work with long movies because the reduced
overview in the program monitor and the zoomed detailed view in the
arranger present a good combination.

The film overview can be used for moving around in the movie and for
editing certain parts:

• When you click on a certain object in the video monitor, the arranger
will zoom on that object.
• Using the mouse, you can draw a frame in the video monitor – and
the corresponding range will be zoomed in the arranger.
• When you move the playback marker in the video monitor, the
arranger playback marker will also move correspondingly.

Tip: If you use this option very often, you can use the keyboard
shortcut (Shift + A).

Transport control
The transport controls in the program monitor enable you to play
back video and photo material in the arranger or as a preview in the
Media Pool.

Transport control buttons

Range: Above the playback
functions, the range between the in
and out points can be changed by
clicking.
Playback marker: This marker indicates the location of
the image currently displayed on-screen.
Media Pool/arranger: This button allows you to switch
between using the arranger's transport control and the
selected files in the Media Pool (preview function).

www.magix.com
32 Work areas
Set in/out points: Defines the start and end of the
playback range.

To the start: This button sets the playback marker to

the start of the current area.

Jump to start of film: Sets the playback marker to the

start of the movie.

Play/Stop (pause): The playback button in the middle

starts playback. A second click ends playback.

Tip: In the menu "File -> Settings -> Program -> Playback", you can
set whether the playback marker will go back to the start position
(stop) after the second click or following the appropriate shortcut
(space bar), or if it should stay at the current position (pause
function).

Area playback: This button plays back the current range.

To the end: This button sets the playback marker to the

end of the current range.

Audio or video recording: Quickly jumps to the Recording

selection dialog.

Film overview

Jog wheel: Using this wheel, you can

move by single frames within the video
and position the playback marker exactly
at high magnifications.

www.magix.com
 Work areas 33
Shuttle control: The further the slider
control is moved to the side, the quicker
the arrangement is played in the
corresponding direction. This way a
certain position can be reached quickly.

Media Pool
The design and operation of the Media Pool is very similar to
Windows Explorer. It serves to control and load multimedia files of all
kinds: video files, audio files, fades, effects, and even entire projects.
At the same time, it is used as a window for editing different tasks.

Importing
Navigation buttons
The navigation buttons let you navigate through your computer’s
drives and folders.

Forwards/Back The "Back" button always returns

you to the folder where you were
previously.
Up The "Up" button brings you to the next
highest folder level.

Folder tree Here you can activate a folder tree to

navigate through your computer system.
Search To quickly find specific files, use the
search function. You can also specify file
type, data and certain folders that should
be searched.
Browse history The current folder's path is displayed in
list and path the top center. Use the arrow button to
details open the menu to find the folders you
previously visited.
Options All functions of the context menu (switch
views, rename, or delete files, etc.) can
also be accessed via the options button.

Display options Settings for how detailed the entries

should be listed can be made here.

www.magix.com
34 Work areas
Computer
The link button "Computer" displays the drives in the Media Pool. All
drives will be listed along with their drive letters and can be opened
with a double click.

User directory
The second button featuring the user's name opens their personal
folder in the Media Pool.

My media
The "My media" button lets you select "Projects", "My videos", "My
music", "My images", and "Recordings".

Projects
Switches to the folder where your projects and videos are usually
stored.

My videos
Displays all usable files found in "My documents\My videos."

My music
Displays the contents of the "My Documents\My Music" folder.
MAGIX Music Manager also suggests this folder for importing your
music collection into the database.

My pictures
Switches to the "My documents\My pictures" folder. This folder is
often used by digital cameras and scanners to store transferred
images by default. The included MAGIX Photo Manager program also
uses this folder (e.g. during image import).

Recordings
Recordings: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 stores all recordings here to
access all recordings as quickly as possible.

MAGIX tools
The "MAGIX tools" link selects links to "Downloads", "Database",
"Online Album", and "Internet Media".

www.magix.com
 Work areas 35
Downloads: Use this button to access the media files that you
downloaded with Catooh.

Database: Use this button to open the database view. Right clicking
opens the database search. The database first has to be created
using the supplied additional programs MAGIX Photo Manager or
MAGIX Music Manager.

Online album: This buttons opens MAGIX Online Album. This

provides a shortcut to uploading and deleting data. To do this, you
must first register on MAGIX Online Album.

There are many ways to upload data:

1. While holding "Ctrl" down, select the data to be uploaded in the

Media Pool, and select "Copy" in the context menu (opened by
right clicking). Switch to the MAGIX Online Album screen, open
the desired folder, and select "Paste" in the context menu.
1. In the Media Pool, click on "Online Album", and go to the desired
directory. Open the Windows Explorer, select the desired data
with "Ctrl" held down, and drag it into the Media Pool.
Both options will result in your desired data being uploaded to your
MAGIX Online Album.

Hint: This function requires an Internet connection. To gain access,

make sure you have your log in information (email address and
password) ready.

Internet media: This opens MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16's integrated
browser (view page 322). It offers you the possibility to collect media
from the Internet to use in the current project.

Fades
This provides a list of all fades sorted into categories. Clicking on a
category shows all of the fades contained therein.

To load a fade, click on it and drag it onto a scene which you would
like to blend into. Alternatively, you can select the scene into which
you would like to blend into before and double click on the fade in the
Media Pool later.

www.magix.com
36 Work areas

Tip: All fades will appear in the menu between two scenes, and they
can also be selected there.

Title
Title presets and the Title editor (view page 149) are located here.
They are sorted into various categories and can be loaded via a
double click or drag & drop. You will also find templates for 3D titles
here. The text of title objects can be changed in the program monitor
by double-clicking on it.

Effects
Access the effects presets via "Video effects", "Movement effects",
"Audio effects", and "Design elements".

Video effects
These are the various effects which can be applied to videos and
stills. The effects can be set after an object is selected in the
respective effects dialog which appears. For more information, see
the "Video effects in the Media Pool (view page 130)" chapter.

Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by
using zoom or camera movements. For more information, go to the
"Effects and titles" chapter in "Movement effects in Media Pool (view
page 137)".

Audio effects
In addition to many different audio effects presets (echo, reverb,
equalizer, compressor, etc.), you can also use the included
synthesizer. A synthesizer can be dragged onto the arranger like a
multimedia file. It will be displayed as a synth object. Use the
corresponding control console to edit the synth sounds and
melodies. The control console opens automatically when the
synthesizer is dragged onto the arrangement for the first time. A synth
object can be opened for further editing later by double clicking.

Design elements
Multi picture-in-picture: These are various effects presets for image
stacking.

Collages: These work similarly to normal picture-in-picture effects,

but more objects are used. Depending on the collage, arrange the

www.magix.com
 Work areas 37
selected objects one after the other and drag the collage onto the
first object.

Portrait effects: Select individual effects which are especially suited

to vertically formatted photos.

Image objects: These are various image objects like black bars,
thought bubbles for cartoons, etc.

Intros/Outros: These are beginning and end scenes for films with
various themes.

Visuals: Graphical displays of any played sounds which can be

combined with other video material.

Various file list view modes

In the file list, all of the supported multimedia files and subfolders of
the currently selected folder are displayed. Three different views (list,
detail, large symbols) can be set by right clicking on the Media Pool
context menu.

List: Only file names are

listed. This view mode
displays the most files
simultaneously.

Details: In the details

section the type, size,
and date of modification
are shown for every
media file beside its
name. The list can be
sorted by clicking on any
of these details.

www.magix.com
38 Work areas
Large icons can be quite useful
because they show a preview frame
for each movie and picture file. This
allows you to sort through the
material quicker. One disadvantage
is that it takes longer for the file list
to be displayed.

Preview function
This is a preview function for all files in the Media Pool which can be
started by dragging & dropping onto the video monitor or by pressing
the play button.

There are also previews for effects that illustrate their functionality.

The "Extras" button or the enhanced transport control function

provides a selection of sections from a longer video file in the Media
Pool. Please refer to the Inserting objects into the project chapter.

Toolbars
Upper button bar

The upper button bar can be found in the monitor to the top left. It
has the following functions:

New project
Creates a new MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 project. A dialog with
settings for a new disc project or a new film (view page 54)
opens to get started.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N

www.magix.com
 Work areas 39
Load project
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please
note that all media files associated with it must be accessible.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will search for all used sounds and
video files in the folders in which they were located when the
movie was saved.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O

Save project
The current movie is saved with the name displayed in the
project window. If you have not yet specified a name for your
project, a dialog will open wherein MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
asks you to do so.

Please note: In the project file (*.MVP), all information about the used
media files, cuts, effects, and titles are saved, but not the picture and
sound material itself. This is found in the recorded or imported media
files that remain unchanged during the entire MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 editing process. To save the full movie into a dedicated directory,
for instance to continue editing on a different PC, please use the
command "Copy movie and media into directory".

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + S

Program settings
Opens the program settings (view page 308).

Keyboard shortcut: Y

Context help
By choosing the context help entry from the "Help" menu, or
by clicking on the button in the top toolbar, the mouse cursor
will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Then, when you click on any button of the main screen, program help
describing the control element in question will open.

Shortcut key: Alt + F1

www.magix.com
40 Work areas
MAGIX News Center
MAGIX can supply you with all of the latest information about
your software. In the MAGIX News Center, you will find all of
the links to current online tutorials as well as tips & tricks on
individual topics or software application examples.

You will also be informed of the availability of brand new updates and
patches for your program as well as special offers, contests, and
surveys.

The news is split into three color-coded sections:

• Green for practical tips & tricks for your software

• Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates for your
product
• Red for special offers, contests, and surveys
• And if there are no new messages, then the button will be grey

All available information is shown as soon as you click on MAGIX

News Center. If you click on one of the news items you will be
forwarded to the corresponding website.

Lower toolbar

The following buttons are available in "Overview" and "Timeline"

modes:

Select a movie to edit

Using the dropdown menu, you can control various movies
within a project.

Undo
During project editing, you can undo the last changes you made. This
way it's no problem if you want to experiment with critical operations.
If you don't like the results, then you can always revert to the previous
state by using "Undo".

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Z

www.magix.com
 Work areas 41
Restore
The "Redo" function undoes the previous "Undo" function.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Y

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

Title editor
Opens the title editor (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Title editor" on page 149) for the selected photo,
video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T

Mute button
This button mutes the sound output.

Mixer
This option allows you to display or conceal the real-time
mixer. You will find further information, especially with regard
to the integration of effects plug-ins, in the chapter "Mixer".

Keyboard shortcut: M

Cut button
You can access the individual options using the dropdown menu.

Split
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback
marker is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are
created.

Keyboard shortcut: T

www.magix.com
42 Work areas

Remove start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback
marker is positioned and removes the material before the
playback marker.

Keyboard shortcut: K
Remove end
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback
marker is positioned and removes the material behind the
back marker.

Keyboard shortcut: U

Hint: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are

applied without a selection, all objects at the position of the playback
marker are cut.

Remove scene
This command allows you to completely remove selected
scenes. The scenes that follow will be automatically moved
to the end of the scene in front of the scene to be removed.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del

Split movie
Splits the movie at the playback marker position into two
sections within one project. These can be individually controlled
using the "Window" menu or the button "Select movie for
editing" (see above).

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + W

Paste modes
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 provides various options for how an object
selected in the Media Pool will be pasted into the project.

www.magix.com
 Work areas 43

Apply automatically
Pastes the file selected in the Media Pool into the arranger.
Video and image objects will always be placed behind the
last object into the first track; audio and text objects are
separated into different tracks.

Intelligent ripple
Inserts an object from the Media Pool at the position of the
playback marker and simultaneously moves the objects
following it.

• In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the

position of the playback marker.
• Videos and images are placed on the first track. If another object is
found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at
the end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start
exactly at the point of insertion).
• The objects lying further along on the track will be moved further
down.
• Objects on other linked tracks (all objects up to the first completely
empty track) will also be moved further down. This includes sound
tracks, fades, and titles, all of which will be moved together so that
nothing gets mixed up. All objects will be moved which start at the
same position as or behind the playback marker.

Note: The prerequisite for a good ripple effect is that the soundtrack,
most importantly, is cut at the position of the playback marker.
Otherwise, the elements located further down would move down
even more, while the soundtrack would stay at its old position,
causing picture and sound to separate from each other. If you would
like to create an intelligent ripple, make sure that the starting points of
all objects that are to be moved are positioned at or behind the
playback marker. If this is not the case, click on the screen to cut the
corresponding object at the playback marker position.

Single-track ripple
Inserts an object from the Media Pool at the position of the
playback marker and simultaneously moves the objects on
the track following it.

www.magix.com
44 Work areas
• The one-track ripple behaves similarly to the intelligent ripple, the
difference is that only the objects on the target track are moved.
Bordering tracks are unchanged.
• In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the
position of the playback marker.
• Videos and images are placed on the first track. If another object is
found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at
the end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start
exactly at the point of insertion).
• The objects lying further along on the track will be moved further
down.

Multitrack ripple
The object selected in the Media Pool will be inserted on the
target track at the position of the playback marker. All objects
found at the playback marker position will be split and moved
down the length of the inserted object. All objects on the
track located further on will also be moved.

• The multitrack ripple behaves similarly to the intelligent ripple, but the
difference is that all objects on all tracks following the playback
marker's position will be moved.
• In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the
position of the playback marker.
• Videos and images are placed on the first track. If another object is
found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at
the end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start
exactly at the point of insertion).
• If other objects are located at the playback marker position, these
will also be separated and moved further along the track.
• Objects lying further along on all tracks will be moved further down.

Replace
Replaces the selected object with an object selected in the
Media Pool.

Overwrite
Overwrites the object in the target track at the position of the
start marker with the object selected in the Media Pool.

Hint: In contrast to "Replace", no length adjustment takes place. With

"Replace", any downstream objects are moved, while "Overwrite"

www.magix.com
 Work areas 45
overwrites downstream objects as well (sometimes only partially),
depending on the length of the object being inserted in comparison to
the object being overwritten.

Additional buttons in Timeline mode

The following buttons are only available in "Timeline" mode:

Set chapter marker

Sets a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker.
This creates a chapter entry in the disc menu, in case you are
planning to burn the movie to CD/DVD.

You can rename your chapter markers by right clicking and selecting
"Rename". The name then appears in the chapter menu (view page
236).

Shortcut: Shift + Enter

Object grid
Use this button to switch the object grid on and off. When the
object grid is switched on, the objects snap into place beside
one another so that everything fits in seamlessly.

Form group
Orders all selected objects into groups. As soon as an object
from the group is selected, all other objects in the group will
be highlighted as well so that you can work on them
collectively.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + L

Ungroup objects
This turns all selected objects into free-standing objects again.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + M

www.magix.com
46 Work areas
Mouse modes
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 offers special mouse modes for
different kinds of editing. They can be selected using the
small arrow next to the button.
.

Intelligent mouse mode

In principle, this mouse mode behaves like the "Single object
mouse" mode.
However, all objects that border the object on the same or on
adjacent tracks are also moved, starting from the mouse position.
This means that all objects overlapping adjacent tracks (fades, fade
effects) and those directly connecting to the next one (hard cuts) are
pushed together up to the next empty space in the arrangement (the
technical term for this action is "Ripple until black").

This is useful for preventing destruction of fades you have already set
and want to move an object included therein. To move individual
object, switch to "Single object mouse" mode. You can also drag an
object vertically onto a free track, thereby breaking the connection
with the following objects. You will then be able to move it freely
without having to move other objects with it.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + 2

Mouse mode for individual objects

This is the preset mouse mode which performs most of the
work.

Select objects with a left click. You can move an object by dragging it
to the desired position.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + 1

Curve mouse mode

This mouse mode is used especially for drawing effects
curves.
The effects curve controls the intensity of the effect: The higher the
curve point, the more intense the respective effects parameter at this
location. The curves can be used for video and image objects on the
image tracks and also for audio objects on the audio tracks.

www.magix.com
 Work areas 47
More information about this can be found in the chapter "Animate
objects", section "Editing object effects curves".

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + 3

Stretch mouse mode

This special mode is for customizing the length of objects.

With timestretching, audio objects can be expanded or compressed

using the handles at the bottom. The duration of the audio material is
therefore lengthened without changing the pitch. Playback of the
video objects is accelerated/decelerated with the help of the handles
at the bottom.

Attention! If the object to be stretched or compressed is going to be

animated with an effects curve, then the option "Connect curve length
with object length (view page 182)" should be set for the effects
curve.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + 4

Preview audio mouse mode

This mode allows you to preview audio objects (as long as the
mouse button is held down).
In this mode, objects cannot be moved or changed.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + 8

www.magix.com
48 Work areas

Arranger

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 offers an editing interface for advanced

editing: audio dubbing, professional editing, plus precise transitions
and effects editing.

There are corresponding views for different

applications: "Scene overview", "Storyboard"
mode, and "Timeline" mode.

Tracks
The arranger offers tracks for multimedia material positioning and
editing. The number of tracks displayed can be specified in the file
menu under "Movie settings".

In principle, any object type may be placed on any of the tracks. You
can also combine video and bitmaps objects with MIDI and audio
objects on any of these tracks. The maximum length of a movie is
restricted to 6 hours.

At the beginning of each track is a track box

where you can mute a single audio track with the
Mute button or play them Solo.

Clicking the lock symbol protects all objects in a track against

unwanted editing. The track name can be changed by double clicking
the text above the buttons.

Zooming
The vertical zoom function sets the number of visible tracks in the
window. For a lot of tracks, enlarging the view (zooming) is sensible
for editing a single track or object.

www.magix.com
 Work areas 49
Use the horizontal zoom function to set up the visible section of the
arrangement on the timeline.

Enlarge objects: Vertical and horizontal zoom stages are

enlarged such that all of the selected objects are able to be
displayed at maximum size.
If the function is switched off, the zoom stage will be restored.

Adjusting the workspace

The program monitor, the arranger, and the Media Pool can be shut
off completely or freely repositioned. Personal settings are
automatically saved when MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 is closed and
remain when the program is reopened.

Program settings -> Display presets provide a collection of useful

configurations for display on the monitor. On systems with only a
single connected monitor, only the first two are practical. The presets
are explained on the right side of the dialog. All window properties of
the arranger, video monitor, etc. can be changed after the application
of a preset.

For larger arrangements, the program monitor can be used to show

an overview of the arranger ("Window -> Movie overview (view page
278)").

Note: If you've lost your overview, then you can use "Window ->
Reset window arrangement" or the keyboard shortcut "F9" to reset
the basic settings.

www.magix.com
50 Work areas

The "Burn" screen

1 Preview menu: This is a preview of the selection menu. Read

more in the "Menu (view page 256)" chapter
2 Switch views: Here you can switch between the Preview and
Edit views.
3 Remote control: Check how your disc reacts when you press a
button on your remote control.
4 Output: Choose between burning a project, a show optimized
for PC, or a web show.
5 Play preview: Here you can play back the menu preview, which
you can test with the remote control.
6 Template category: Switch between different templates for
designing your menus.
7 Menu templates: Switch between different templates for
designing your menus.
8 Apply templates: Here you can select whether a template
should be assigned to the page, menu or all disc menus.

Functionality
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the
button indicated.

www.magix.com
 Create new video project 51
You can burn your movies (including a selection menu) onto CD,
DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or upload them to MAGIX Online Album.

All movies loaded into the project are taken into account. If you want
to take out some of the movies that are loaded, then you will have to
switch back to the "Edit" screen and delete some of them from the
project. To do so, switch to the corresponding movie, open the "File"
menu and select "Manage movies -> Remove movie (view page 257)"

Note: At a screen resolution of 1280 x 1024, the program display

changes. This makes the program more manageable and easier to
use. The work steps remain the same despite the different display.

For more information about the "Burn" screen, please read the
chapter "Burning discs (view page 233)". It is assumed that you are
working in the "Advanced mode".

Create new video project

Movie settings

www.magix.com
52 Create new video project
Settings
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current movie.

Path: This is where you determine the folder on your hard drive in
which your movie is saved.

Play movie back in loop mode: The movie is then played over and
over again; that is, once the movie reaches the end marker, it is
started again from the beginning.

Automatically save: The movie is automatically saved in regular

intervals. You can set the interval in the system settings (Y key).

Number of tracks: Here you can change the track number.

Audio sample rate: The preset sample rate is 48 kHz. This sample
rate is used for all recordings and is also a prerequisite for DVDs.
With this setting, optimum sound quality is guaranteed. Audio
material at different sample rates (e.g. CD Audio with 44 kHz) is
automatically adapted when loaded (resampling). Only change this
value if you want to use sound material with a different sample rate or
if your sound card does not support this sample rate.

Video resolution: This is where you set the standard settings for the
picture format and frame rate for PAL or NTSC TV pictures or for your
own format. Please note that MPEG encoding requires a width/height
ratio divisible by 8.

Use as presets for new projects: Use the same settings from the
dialog as standard settings for new projects.

www.magix.com
 Create new video project 53
Movie information
This option opens an information window:

Name: Enter the name of the current movie.

Path: The path for the folder on your hard drive where your movie is
saved.

Created on: Displays the time the movie was created.

Last changed: Displays the time of the last save.

Number of objects used: Displays the number of all objects in the

movie.

Number of objects used: All files used in the movie are listed here.

Keyboard shortcut: E

www.magix.com
54 Create new video project
Project settings
In this dialog,
you can view
and change the
settings for the
current film.

Automatically select preview image

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 uses an automatically selected preview
image.

Use image file

Clicking the folder button opens a dialog to load image files. In this
dialog, you can navigate to the directory where the image file is found
and select it by double clicking.

Use preview image from movie

Use the controller to select a frame from the corresponding directory.

www.magix.com
 Create new video project 55

New project disc settings or new movie

When you start MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 the following dialog will
open:

Decide in this dialog if

you want to "Load an
existing movie" for
further editing and
burning to disc, or if
you want to "Create a
new movie". Under
"Options" you can
"Create a new movies
folder". All data that
belongs to the movie
will be saved in this
folder.

We're still at the very beginning, so let's stick with keeping an

overview of everything. Click "OK" to end the dialog and continue.

Load project
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please
note that all media files associated with it must be accessible.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will search for all used sounds and
video files in the folders in which they were located when the
movie was saved.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O

www.magix.com
56 Video recording

Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the
project window. If you have not yet specified a name for your
project, a dialog will open asking you to do so.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + S

Save project as...

A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video
for saving.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + O

Video recording

Connect camera
Connect AVCHD camera (Plus version)
AVCHD cameras are available in basically three types:

• Cameras with removable storage: The camera includes a slot for a

memory card. Your computer should feature a card reader for the
associated medium so that you can simply insert the card from the
camera and import the desired material. Different camera models
can be connected via USB.
• Cameras which burn DVDs directly (usually 80 mm diameter instead
of the regular 120 mm): The DVD can simply be taken out of the
camera and inserted into the computer. For so-called "Slot in DVD"
drives, look beforehand in the operational manual whether or not 80
mm DVDs (also called 3" DVDs or MiniDVDs) are acceptable.

Note: These variants require a special UDF driver (normally included

with the camera) be installed before the DVDs or removable storage
can be imported into Windows.

• Cameras with built-in hard drives: The camera is present as a drive

as soon as the USB cable is connected to the PC. This additional

www.magix.com
 Video recording 57
drive is then visible in the Media Pool. A separate UDF driver doesn't
usually need to be installed.

Note: The variants listed here and their procedures are explained
according to our experience. We also recommend reading the
camera's manual for more detailed instructions and contacting the
manufacturer in case of problems.

Connect a DV or HDV camera

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supports continuous editing of DV (digital
video) files. You will require a DV recorder or DV camera with an
IEEE-1394 interface (also known as FireWire or iLink) as well as an
OHCI-standard IEEE-1394 host adapter for your PC. You must also
have Microsoft’s DirectX8.a (or higher) installed.

• Connect the digital output of the switched-off camera with the

computer's DV interface (also called FireWire or iLink).
• Insert a DV cassette or the storage device into the camera.
• Switch your camera’s operating mode to "Video recorder" or
"Playback".

The camera is now ready to transfer the video to the computer.

Note: You may also use a HDV camera in DV mode to, for example,
transfer recordings in the old DV format. We have noted problems
with this mode in many cameras, and therefore recommend that the
Record mode of the camera is also switched to DV, switching the
camera off and then on again.

Connect analogue video source

Connect the video out of your camcorder, or DVD/VHS recorder to
the video in (TV, video, or video graphics card) of your computer, and
the audio out to the line in of your sound card.

Due to the variety of device configurations, it is difficult to say which

cable will function best with your setup. If you’re not sure, check the
manual of your VCR or your TV, video, or graphics cards.

Example:

Europe: Many VCRs and DVD players have a SCART, 3 RCA (2 for
stereo sound, 1 for video), or S-Video/optical audio line out. In such

www.magix.com
58 Video recording
case, you will need a SCART to RCA adapter, a cable with 3 RCA
jacks, or an S-Video cable.

North America: Many VCRs and DVD players have a 3 RCA (2 for
stereo sound, 1 for video), or S-Video/optical audio line out. In such
case, you will need a cable with 3 RCA jacks, or an S-Video cable.

SCART/Cinch SCART/Cinch Stereo RCA/mini

adapter adapter with 3 RCA phone jack adapter
jacks

Most sound card inputs are 3.5 mini stereo jacks. To connect the
VCR audio out to the sound card audio in you will need a stereo
RCA/ mini phono plug adapter.

You will most likely have to buy a cable with 3 RCA plugs and a
stereo cinch/mini jack adapter from your local supplier.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 59

Select the recording method

First you should find out the correct recording method for your
camera. The following options are basically available:

• Analog transfer: Transformation of the analog signal into a digital

data current, whereby the actual video file is then created using the
settings (Super 8, Hi8, (S)VHS, video recorder, and other analog
sources).
• Digital transfer (DV camera, HDV camera)
• Copy the finished video files from a storage medium or directly from
the connected camera to the local hard drive for AVCHD cameras,
DVDs (without copy protection), DVD cameras with built-in hard drive
or removable storage. Next, import the copied file into the project.

To start recording, click on the "Record" button under the

source monitor.

The following selections are possible:

• DV cameras: For mini DV

cameras and DV video
recorders
• HDV camera: For HDV1
and HDV2 cameras
• Video: For analog video
cameras TV, analog TV,
VHS recorders (video
input), webcams

• Single frame: For single and series images from analog cameras,
analog TV, or VHS recorders, webcams, etc.
• Audio: For microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players,
turntables, etc.
• Screenshots: Records directly from the computer monitor.

www.magix.com
60 Video recording

DV cameras
DV devices
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supports continuous editing of DV (digital
video) files. You will require a DV camcorder or DV recorder with an
IEEE 1394 interface (also known as FireWire or iLink) as well as an
OHCI conforming IEEE 1394 host adapter for your PC.

To record digitally, the digital output of the Mini DV camcorder or DV

video recorder must be connected to the DV interface of the PC, but
remain switched off. You must also have Microsoft's "DirectX8.a" (or
higher) installed. Now switch your camcorder to "video recorder" or
"playback" (according to your particular device) and open the DV
capturing dialog.

Capturing DV recorders or cameras

To start recording, click the "Record" button under the source
monitor.

• Select "DV camera" from the recording dialog. Uncompressed DV

capture requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video. If you would
instead like to record using the more space-saving MPEG format,
then you should first activate the "Record DV as MPEG" option.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 61
• This opens the actual recording dialog. Check to see if a DV camera
driver has been selected.
• Name your recording. It's worth choosing a logical name which will
allow you to find it easily again on the hard drive.
• You can access the appropriate place on the camcorder tape by
using the remote control buttons: shuttle forwards, backwards, and
start/stop playback. To start recording, click on the "Record" button.
Keep an eye on the remaining hard-drive space.
• Cease capturing with the "Stop" button and exit the record dialog.
You can see the recording in the film-strip in the lower third of the
screen.

Tip: In the DV recording dialog, you can set clips from the DV video
which will then be recorded one after the other (batch capturing).
Read more on this in the chapter "Batch processing" (view page 65)

"DV capturing" dialog

Note: Keep an eye on the available hard drive space before each
recording. DV capture requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video!

Select DV device driver: The device driver for your DV device should
be listed here. If "Audio recording" is deactivated, then only video

www.magix.com
62 Video recording
without sound is recorded. "Audio preview" activates the audio output
of the recording.

Note: The audio preview is deactivated at first, since DV cameras

usually include built-in speakers.

Save video file as/save in following folder: Enter the name of the
movie to be recorded. You can also select the folder where you wish
to store your video file. The default recording directory is set by
default, but you can change the Path settings (view page 312)
settings under menu item "File -> Program settings -> Path settings".

Edit after recording: This provides access to the automatic editing

options.

Start device automatically: Starts the DV recorder or DV camera

automatically when the "Record" button is pressed. This does not
function with all digital cards/video devices.

Movie preview: On the preview monitor you can see a preview of

your movie.

Original size: This option allows you to preview the video in the
original size. To return to the dialog use the "Esc" key.

Automatic capturing: Here the start and end points can be set for the
capturing. This allows you to search the entire video for all captures
to be used and list them for planned batch capture. This is then
processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button).
That way you don't need to record each scene individually. You
simply determine recording time points, and the computer takes care
of the rest. To set the start and end points precisely, click "Enter
start/end point (view page 63)"

Recording list: Use this button to view the available list of already
recorded videos and scheduled recordings. All entries from the list
can be selected and deleted.

Record: Starts the recording process. Also contains the list of

scheduled recordings. These are processed step-by-step (batch
capturing).

Stop: Stops the recording process.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 63
Snapshot! With the Snapshot! button, you can create a frozen image
directly from the preview monitor. Start the camcorder and watch the
preview window. When the image you want appears, click
"Snapshot". Or you can navigate using the remote control to the
position you want, and stop there in Pause mode. Stopped playback
on the DV camera will not deliver an image! The images are saved in
the record directory as graphics files in the set resolution.

Remote control: Digital camcorders can be controlled remotely. This

does not function with all digital cards/video devices. If your hardware
does not support the remote control function the buttons will not be
usable.

The transport buttons required for this are in the DV or HDV recording
dialog.

Tape name: Enter a name for your tape here. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 requires this name for the DV logging feature.

Recording information: Displays various information about your

recordings.

www.magix.com
64 Video recording
Enter start/end point:

Enter the exact start and end

point or the recording length for a
scene.

Both values can be entered as

ATN (absolute track number) or as
a timecode in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames.

DV as MPEG
The "Recording selection" dialog option allows you to transfer DV
recordings directly into the space-saving MPEG format on the hard
disk.

The "Enhance" button presents the MPEG encoder

settings options.

You can also burn your DV material directly to disc

without taking any intermediate steps.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 65

HDV camera
Use this option to open the "HDV camcorder recording" dialog. To do
this, you have to connect an HDV 1 or HDV 2 camcorder.

The options in this dialog can also be found above in DV recording.

www.magix.com
66 Video recording

Batch recording
Set the start and end points for the capture here. This allows you to
search the entire video for all captures to be used and then list them
for planned batch capture. This is then processed in sequence when
the recording starts (via the red button). That way, you don't need to
record each scene individually. You simply determine recording time
points, and the computer takes care of the rest. To set the start and
end points precisely, click "Enter start/end point (view page 63)".

Recording list: Use this button to view the available list of already
recorded videos and scheduled recordings. All entries from the list
can be selected and deleted.

The basis for batch recording is the

recording list in the DV recording, DV to
MPEG recording, or HDV recording's
recording dialog. All recordings listed there
are "logged". Recordings for which the
corresponding video material is no longer
on the hard disk will appear as "planned
recordings". Click the red record button to
move all video files back to the hard disk.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 67

Logging
Logging means that MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 also saves the original
position and additional information (metadata, e.g. scene, take,
rating, comments, etc.) about DV video and audio files.

If does not find the corresponding DV and WAV files during the
loading of a video, it will ask that the corresponding DV tape is
inserted into the connected camcorder again for automatic scene
import.

You no longer have to save DV AVI and audio files (which can be very
large). If at a later time you would like to work on a film again, but do
not have the space to keep the material for it on your hard disk, then
you can simply delete the bulky DV AVI and audio files.

The basis for the log is the recording list in the DV recording, DV to
MPEG recording, or HDV recording's recording dialog. All recordings
listed there are "logged". Recordings for which the corresponding
video material is no longer on the hard disk will appear as "planned
recordings". Click the record button to move all video files back to the
hard disk.

www.magix.com
68 Video recording

Record dialog analog video recording

Video/Audio driver: Here you can set up the video card or sound
card for recording. In practically every case, the driver software
supplied with the hardware must be installed.

Hint: Under "video driver", you will find a "screen capture" entry in the
Plus version. Read more about how it functions in the chapter Screen
(Plus version) (view page 73).

Input/Tuner settings: If your video capture card supports multiple

sources, i.e. your card also has a TV tuner or multiple inputs (SVHS,
composite, etc.), then you can select the proper recording source
and the TV channel to be recorded here.

Save video file as / Save in following folder: Enter the name of the
movie to be recorded here. You can also select the folder where you
wish to store your video file. The standard record folder is set as
default. The location of this folder can be changed in Path settings
(view page 312) by going to "File -> Program settings -> Path
settings".

Edit after recording: Use this to access the automatic editing

options.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 69
Recording quality: You can select from a variety of predefined quality
levels from the list box. They are listed according to picture quality.
Using Configuration you can fine tune the quality for the selected
preset.

Presets displayed with "MPEG" record directly in MPEG format.

Tip: Use the presets marked MPEG if you want to burn your
recordings straight away, since smart encoding can omit laborious
encoding after recording.

Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog (view page 69).

Capture control: Here you'll find the "Red" record and "Stop"
buttons. These start and stop recording.

Timer recordings active/time limit: Specify a recording start time and

length here to transform your PC into a fully functioning VCR.

Snapshot!: Use the "Snapshot" button to create a still image directly

from the preview monitor. The images are saved in the record
directory as graphics files in the set resolution.

Recording information: This shows statistical information such as the

recording time, available space on the hard drive, the recorded
frames, and the “dropped” frames. Dropped frames are frames that
have been left out because the computer processor is too slow for
the selected image format and cannot accept all incoming frames.

Preview: Some graphics adapters allow you to reduce the system

lead by deactivating the video preview. If you hear an "echo",
deactivate the audio preview.

Advanced configurations in the video capturing dialog

Here you can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.

These dialog boxes, so-called “property sheets,” come with the video
card drivers. These driver-specific performance properties may
deviate depending on the cards. We also have a very limited influence
on the behavior of these drivers. If you encounter any difficulties,
please contact the video card manufacturer for the latest driver
updates.

Input: Sets the crossbar of the video card.

www.magix.com
70 Video recording
The crossbar determines which video and audio input signal will be
recorded. The crossbars are connected in series to the video
recording chip itself. In the output field, the video output (for the
crossbars) is the input for the recording chip (video or audio decoder-
in) of the video card. In the “Input” field, select the signal source that
will be used by the video card to capture for this input. Many video
cards have separate crossbars for audio and video. If you have a
problem, try out the different configurations until the right sound
matches the right image.

Composite-in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)

S-video = S-video input (mini-din jack)
SVHS-in = SVHS input (special cable)
Tuner-in = TV signal of the integrated tuner

Imagesetting

Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it

flickers, the video standard may be set incorrectly. In mainland
Europe, PAL_B is used.

VideoProcAmp: Fine-adjustment of colors, brightness, contrast etc.

We recommend against changing any of the manufacturer’s settings.

Format: Please do not change anything here. The capturing format is

set in the "Recording quality" option in the video recording dialog.

Station selection

This option is only available if a TV tuner is integrated into your video

card.

Single frame
The single-frame recording function lets you record snapshots directly
from the connected video source. This requires either a video clip
compatible with DirectShow, a TV card, or a USB device such as a
webcam.

The time control function allows you to automatically take snapshots.

Here are just a few examples of where it might be used:

• for creating photo stories from videos

• for animated films (stop-motion animation)
• for video surveillance

www.magix.com
 Video recording 71
• or for time-lapse photography

The recorded images are added to the current arrangement.

Video source: Sets the video card to be used to take pictures.

How would you like to name the recorded JPEG file?: Enter the title
of snapshots you are about to record. They are saved under this
name and numbered consecutively. You can also select the file path
for storage.

Resolution: The resolution of the recording is defined here. It

corresponds to the resolution options offered on the camera. The
slider lets you set the image quality. Using higher resolutions results in
larger file sizes for each recording; moving the slider in the opposite
direction sets the image quality back to the preset value.

Advanced…: Opens the video driver settings dialog.

Camera noise during recording: You can make the program play a
clicking sound each time a snapshot is taken.

Recording: The red "Record" button triggers a snapshot or

alternatively a series of recordings when using the time control
function.

www.magix.com
72 Video recording
Time control
Photo length in frames: Specifies how long the photos appear in the
slideshow.

Interval: When this function is activated, a series of images is made

once the recording has started. Snapshots are automatically saved
and numbered consecutively at a preset time interval.

For example, if you specify a two-second interval between shots and

that each shot be added at a length of 5 frames to the slideshow,
then the end result is a time-lapse recording at 10x normal speed.

Enhanced single-frame recording dialog settings

You can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.

These dialog boxes, so-called "property sheets", come with the video
card drivers. The driver-specific features may slightly vary from driver
to driver. The MAGIX team has little direct influence on the
performance of the various drivers. If you encounter any difficulties,
then please contact the video card manufacturer for the latest driver
updates.

Input: Sets the crossbar switch of the video card. This lets you define
what video and audio signal is used in the recording. The crossbars
are connected in series to the video recording chip itself.

Output: In the "Output" field, the video output (for the crossbars) is
the input for the recording chip (video or audio decoder in) of the
video card. In the "Input" field, you select the signal source to be
used for this input by the video card during recording.

Composite in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)

S-VHS in = S-VHS input (special cable)

Tuner in = the TV signal of the built-in tuner

Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it

flickers, then the video standard may be set incorrectly. PAL_B is
used in Germany and most European countries (France: SECAM;
US/CAN: NTSC).

VideoProcAmp: For fine tuning of colors, brightness, contrast, etc.

We recommend against changing any of the manufacturer's settings.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 73
Format: Do not change anything here! The capture format settings
can be changed under "Resolution" in the "Recording" dialog box.

Record screen contents (Plus version)

Use this function to record everything that moves on your monitor.
This process is called "screen capturing".

• Under "Recording quality", you will find various presets for different
applications. You can either record the entire monitor ("fullscreen"), a
frame of variable size (e.g. to film the Windows Media Player display),
or a different video player. Click on "Configuration" to make custom
size adjustments.

Hint: Because many video players work with overlay, it is

recommended to open each player before starting the capture! This
way switching into "Overlay" mode can be prevented.

• Click the "Record" button in the recording dialog. A small dialog with
a red record button, a black stop button as well as a frame with
dashed bordering appears. Activate the option "Record mouse
pointer" to record the movements of the mouse pointer.

www.magix.com
74 Video recording
• Now select the screen area you wish to record, i.e. the screen of the
video player in which the video is playing. Drag the frame over the
area you wish to record and adjust its size as required by dragging
the edges and corners.

• The actual recording process can be started by pressing the red

"Record" button. The recording starts; the record symbol appears in
the task bar (tray).
• Once the video you wanted to record has come to an end, click on
the "Record/Stop" button to stop the recording. Recording ends and
the recording dialog is visible once again.

Edit after recording

The "Edit after recording"
dialog can be opened from all
recording dialogs.

All editing steps from

recording to automatic
burning can be carried out
without further user
involvement.

www.magix.com
 Video recording 75
In the "Edit after recording" dialog you can:

• Automatically search for and remove ads. For more on this please
read the "Automatically search for and remove ads (view page 115)"
section in the PDF manual.
• Split up the material into scenes. Please read the "Automatic scene
recognition (view page 101)" section for more on this in the PDF
manual.
• Set automatic chapter markers. Please read the "Set chapter
markers automatically (view page 269)" section in the "Edit menu"
chapter in the PDF manual.

Burn disc immediately: You can use this option to record and burn in
a single step. Simply select the format you would like to burn, insert a
suitable blank disc into the drive, and then press record.

Note: Make sure that the selected recording quality corresponds with
the disc type (e.g. the preset "MPEG DVD" for DVDs)!

If you use your own settings for MPEG encoding (e.g. half image
resolution for long-play DVDs), then make sure that the settings for
recording and later for burning are the same so that no new recording
is necessary (Smart encoding).

After recording, the program automatically switches to the "Burn"

screen, the burn window opens, and the disc is burned. The last set
layout is used for the menu layout for the DVD.

Tip: This function is particularly suitable for burning lengthy disc

projects directly to disc, since you can start recording in the evening
and have the finished DVD by morning.

Export for mobile device: The recorded movie is immediately

converted into the format of the selected mobile device and
transferred onto the device. The list field contains the device which
has been selected in the "Export video/audio (view page 223)" dialog.

Settings: Opens the export settings (view page 215) for the selected
target device.

www.magix.com
76 Video recording

Hint: If you enter a file name and memory path in the export dialog,
then the path is used but the file name is ignored. For EPG-controlled
TV recordings the name of the program is used instead.

Audio
Songs, noises, or instruments can be easily recorded in MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16 using the audio recording function. A hooked-up
microphone or various audio devices (especially a stereo system) can
be used as recording sources.

Connecting the source for recording

First of all, the source of the audio material must be connected to the
sound card input. Again, there are several possibilities which primarily
depend on the type of equipment you have.

If you want to record material from a stereo system, then you can use
the line-out or AUX out jacks on the back of your amplifier or tape
deck. This involves connecting them to the sound card input (usually
red).

If your amplifier has no separate output (other than for the speakers),
then you can use the connection intended for headphones for your
recordings. In most cases, you will need a cable with two mini-stereo
jacks. This type of connection has the advantage of being able to set
the headphone input signal level with a separate volume. As
headphone connections generally are not the best, it is advised that
you use the line outputs if possible.

When recording cassettes from a tape deck, you can connect the
tape deck's line out directly to the sound card input.

When recording from vinyl records, you should not connect the
record player's output directly with the sound card because the
phono signal needs to be pre-amplified. A more suitable method
would be to use the headphone connection or an external pre-amp.

If you are recording from a microphone, then please connect the

microphone to the microphone jack on your sound card (usually red).

www.magix.com
 Video recording 77
Adjusting the signal level
Adjusting the signal level to the sound card is also recommend to get
the best sound quality during digital recording.

Once a recording source is connected to the sound card, the

"Record" button opens the recording dialog and starts the recording
source.

You can now adjust the recording level with the help of the LED
display in the recording dialog. For this, you must first check off
"Show levels".

If the adjustment is set too high, distortion occurs and the incoming
signal must be reduced. If you have connected the source through
either an amplifier or tape deck output to the sound card, you can
only reduce the signal level in your sound card’s software mixer
interface. You can access the mixer directly from within the recording
dialog via the “Recording level” button.

If you reduce input sensitivity by using the input fader, the resolution
at which the analog signal is digitized is also reduced. Try to set these
automatic controllers to the loudest sound level possible!

The maximum setting for an optimal level is the loudest part of the
material. The loudest part should be adjusted to be the maximum.
The actual recording begins when you press the "Record" button. At
the end of the the recording you will be asked if you want to use the
recording. Upon confirmation, the newly-recorded material will be
placed in the next free track at the position of the start maker in the
arrangement.

www.magix.com
78 Video recording
"Audio record" dialog

Audio driver: Selects the sound card for the recording.

Save audio file as/ save in the following folder: Here you can select
the title of the audio file you wish to record. You can also select the
folder where you wish to store the file.

Recording quality: Sets the sound quality of the recording. In the

preset menu you can choose between medium wave radio ("AM
tuner"), UKW ("FM Radio"), DAT (Digital Audio Tape) and CD quality.

Peakmeter (Monitor): Using the peakmeter, you can monitor the level
of the incoming signal. Please read more on this in the chapter
"Adjusting levels" (view page 76)

www.magix.com
 Video recording 79
Recording: This button starts the actual recording.

Stop: Click this button to stop recording

Normalize after recording: With this option activated, your material's

volume is raised to a proper level after recording is completed. In
order to achieve good results, you should try to record the source as
loud as possible without overmodulating it. To do so, refer to the
peak meter reader in the recording dialog.

Playback while recording: This option is particularly important for

spoken commentary, etc. If activated, the selected movie (or selected
scene if recorded in the "Edit" screen) is played while recording. This
acts as orientation for the movie.

Advanced: Use this button to open a window where you can select
from special features:

Advanced options
• "Mono" creates a mono recording and requires half of the hard drive
space required for stereo.
• "Real-time sample rate adjustment" automatically matches the
sample rate of a new file to be recorded with the sample rate of the
selected movie sound track.
• "Ducking" (reducing the sound volume): To add narration or other
sound material to a video that already has sound volume levels set,
activate the option "Automatic reduction of sound volume of
remaining audio tracks". This automatically reduces the volume of
audio objects in the arranger during the recording session
("ducking"). A volume curve controls the whole process, produces
the fading in and out of effects automatically and guarantees
consistent overall volume.

AVCHD recording (Plus version)

This recording is actually not really a recording as such, but rather
"only" the transfer of the already created video file and its import into
the existing project.

AVCHD requires a special UDF driver (normally included with the

camera) be installed before the DVDs or removable storage can be
imported into Windows. This isn't necessary for AVCHD cameras with
built-in hard drives. The camera is present as a drive as soon as the

www.magix.com
80 Video recording
USB cable is connected to the PC. This additional drive is then visible
in the Media Pool, and the corresponding M2TS files can be simply
dragged from the list.

Files with the M2TS extension can easily be dragged down from the
Media Pool (above right). You will be asked during the first import if
you want to convert the movie into the MPEG-2 format. This question
should absolutely be answered with "Yes", since only then will you be
able to edit your movies in real time. We also recommend you
activate the check box "Don't ask me again". The advantage is that
you won't have to answer this query every single time you import
individual files.

Switch on hardware acceleration, too (press "P -> Display options ->
Playback in arranger -> Video mode -> Direct3D hardware
acceleration"). This lets you playback multiple tracks simultaneously
with a modern graphics card (better than ATI Radeon 1300). Another
advantage of converting to MPEG-2 is the option of using "smart
encoding". The sound will be re-encoded to guarantee synchronicity
of image and audio. It is currently not possible to maintain 5.1 sound;
this is automatically converted to MPEG stereo.

Note: Since AVCHD contains AVC (also called H.264), it is necessary

to activate (view page 343) the MPEG-4 encoder. MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16 offers this option as soon as the codec is required. The Dolby
Digital Stereo decoder will also be required, since AVCHD files include
Dolby Digital sound.
Attention: For AVCHD support, Dolby Digital Stereo and the MPEG-4
codec must be activated. To convert AVCHD video to MPEG-2, the
MPEG-2 codec must be activated.

Import a non-copy-protected DVD

In case the record screen is open, switch into the Edit screen. This
can be done using a double click on the desired movie.
Click in the Media Pool under "Import" on "Computer" and select by
double clicking the DVD drive where the DVD to be imported is
located.
Now you can load the listed VOB files into the project as described in
the "Add objects into the project" ("Insert object into the project")
chapter. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 recognizes which files belong
together, so that you only have to load one file.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 81

MAGIX Videorecorder
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 provides you with a PC-based TV and video
recorder. A functional TV card/TV tuner box or DVB-T/S card is
required to use MAGIX Videorecorder.

Hook up TVs, monitors or projectors

With MAGIX Videorecorder and other suitable TV cards/TV tuner
boxes you can transform your PC into a TV. You can have your TV
program displayed on devices connected to your computer like PC
monitors, video projectors or TV devices. Simply connect up the
desired output device to the VGA output (TV symbol) of your graphics
card.

Tip: When connecting video projectors to notebooks "No signal" may

be displayed. In this case, switch to the VGA output of the laptop
using the key combination Fn+Screen key.

www.magix.com
82 MAGIX Videorecorder

Buttons overview

1 Reset to start view

2 Recording
3 Timeshift mode
4 Instant record
5 Favorites + Channel list
6 Switch back to previous channel
7 Switch to next channel
8 Mute: Turns off sound
9 Turn down sound
10 Turn up sound
11 Hide/Show info area
12 Setup: Open settings dialog
13 Timer: Program timer control
14 Program: Electronic program guide (EPG)
DVB TV guide or (MAGIX Online TV Guide).
15 Open recordings folder
If you have opened the MAGIX Videorecorder directly, you
can easily edit the program that you have just recorded
using the main program.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 83

VCR settings

The button opens the settings dialog for the VCR.

www.magix.com
84 MAGIX Videorecorder
Video driver: Configure the driver of your TV card here. You can also
select DVB-S and DVB-T cards. In this case the dialog is replaced
with a simpler version (see below) ("Setup for DVB cards").

Audio driver: Configure the audio driver of the sound card or the
sound device you would like to use for recording and playing TV
sound.

The peak meter indicates an existing audio signal. It is optimally

calibrated if the loudest parts just reach 0 dB.

Level: Here you can open a level fader to customize the controls.

Automatic mixer control: Adjusts audio playback to the record

status, i.e. you will hear the input signal while you are watching live
TV. The wave output is muted. The line input is also automatically
selected as the recording source. Deactivate this option only if you
want to use a different sound card input. With the Mixer button you
can select the input manually.

Save in the following folder: Select the folder to which you wish to
save your video file. The standard recording folder (TV recordings) is
set as the default folder.

Edit after recording: This option opens the "Edit after recording"
dialog. Read more on this in the chapter "Recording interface".

Select record format: Choose from different recording formats

according to your needs, or define your own via "Configuration".

Advanced opens the special settings options of the TV card (More

Informationen can be found in the section "Advanced configurations
in the video capturing dialog" on page 69). Please also observe the
general information on TV formats.

Optimize image for PC: This option activates a special deinterlacing

function for optimizing TV playback on your PC's screen. It is not
supported by every graphics/TV card combination and in any case
requires a DirectX-compatible graphics card driver.

Cable/Antenna: Specify whether you are receiving the TV signal via

cable or an antenna.

No picture while recording: To reduce the CPU load you can

suppress output of the TV picture while recording.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 85
Remote Control
Here you will find a selection of remote controls from various
manufacturers for controlling the MAGIX Videorecorder. If you find
that you own none of the remote controls, simply try out various
settings.

Hint: Some remote controls require that their reception software is

running, otherwise they will not be recognized by MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16.

Setup for DVB cards

No picture while recording: This option serves to free up processing

power on your computer: Pictures will not be displayed while
recording.

www.magix.com
86 MAGIX Videorecorder
Call up EPG information in the background: EPG information is open
in the background while you watch TV. Once you open the timer
dialog for programming a recording, the information will be made
available to you immediately.

Synchronize time: The system clock is synchronized with the DVB

time.

Analyze commercials while recording: Commercials are recognized

while recording. The programs are edited directly after recording (see
dialog: Edit after recording).

Prefer Dolby® Digital Audio: If the channel offers Dolby® Digital

sound in addition to the normal stereo sound, Dolby® will be chosen
automatically.

To edit Dolby® Digital Audio in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 a Dolby®

Digital codec has to be activated.

Play Dolby® Digital in surround mode: If you own a Dolby® Digital

Surround sound stereo, you can playback all programs with 5.1
Surround sound on your system by choosing this option. First, make
sure that the channel you've selected broadcasts in 5.1 format. To be
able to receive the corresponding programs in 5.1 Surround, you
must either select the "Prefer Dolby® Digital Audio" option, or select
an Dolby® Digital audio channel for the network in the advanced
mode.

Edit after recording: This option opens the "Edit after recording"
dialog. Read more on this in the chapter "Recording interface".

Remote Control
Here you will find a selection of remote controls from various
manufacturers for controlling the MAGIX Videorecorder. If you find
that you own none of the remote controls, simply try out various
settings.

Hint: Some remote controls require that their reception software is

running, otherwise they will not be recognized by MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 87

Configure channels for analog reception

For digital TV reception (DVB-T/S) MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 is already
equipped with a pre-configured channel list.

With analog TV reception (antenna or cable), however, you will have

to set up the TV channels you can/wish to receive before using the
TV or the VCR for the first time. This is done much in a similar way to
using a "real" TV by using the in-built channel search function.

• In the start view of the MAGIX Videorecorder click on

the "TV" button switch it on.
• On the transport control below click on the television
symbol to open the favorites and the channel list.

• The empty favorites list

will now open.
• At the top of the list click
on the "Channel list"
button. You will now be
shown the list of set
channels. The favorites
list is empty, but that's
what is about to change.
Click on "Advanced" to
access the channel list
options.

www.magix.com
88 MAGIX Videorecorder

• In the options field to the right you can start the channel search
function and configure the channel list.

Tip: The option "Switch on fine-tuning during autosearch" increases

the likelihood of finding TV channels accurately. Reception will
improve, but it will take longer for the channel search function to
complete.

Channel list for analog programs

You can access the channel list by clicking on the
corresponding symbol in the transport control and
then on the "Channel list" button. Open the "Channel
list" dialog options by clicking on the "Advanced"
button.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 89

Channel list: The programmed channels are displayed in the channel

list to the left.

Add/Remove channels: Use these options to add/remove channels

from the list.

Start channel search function: After opening the dialog for the first
time, the first thing you should do is activate the station search
function. Here, according to the selected reception option (cable or
antenna), the frequency range will be searched for channels that it
can receive.

Switch on fine-tuning during autosearch: This option increases the

likelihood of finding TV channels. Reception will improve, but it will
take longer for the channel search function to complete. Found
channels will be numbered in the channel list.

Move channel: Use the arrows to move the position of a channel up

and down in a list.

www.magix.com
90 MAGIX Videorecorder
Channel name: The corresponding channel name can be added to
each channel entry. This has to be done manually, because channel
networks are not numbered uniformly. Select the channel from the list
and enter the appropriate name on the right.

Video frequency: If the image of sound reception is poor, the

frequency can be fine tuned using the "+" and "-" buttons to improve
it.

Note: It's important that the channels are given the correct names as
the Electronic Program Guide programs the VCR using these names.

Import/Export: You can save the current MAGIX channel list using the
Export button. Using the Import button, it is possible to import a
channel list. This way you can, for example, use the channel list that
you have created in an earlier program version or in a different MAGIX
program with a TV function.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 91

Channel list for DVB cards

If you select a DVB card as your TV tuner, a few details are changed
in the station configuration. Furthermore, DVB includes its own EPG
(Electronic Programming Guide).

Stations are grouped together in so-called "Bouquets". The station

list shows only these channel bunches, and individual stations can be
displayed with a double click. They don't have to be renamed. At the
top of the list is a favorites packet, which allows you to sort your
favorite stations with the "Favorites" button.

Use "Advanced" to access the settings for the station search

function and for the individual channels. With DVB-S the satellite can
be selected, and with DVB-T you can select the region. Using
frequency lists, you can quickly find stations. With "Individual
frequencies", you can make a specific station search through
particular frequencies. It will find available channels and sort them into
new or available "bunches".

www.magix.com
92 MAGIX Videorecorder
Multi LNB configuration: Opens the hardware configuration for DVB-
S cards. If the VCR opens correctly but you still don't receive a
picture, you can make additional settings here. If you have several
LNBs connected to your satellite system, you can also configure them
here.

List channels automatically: All channels are automatically listed

alphabetically (irrespective of the bunch they belong to). The channels
are automatically marked with icons indicating whether they are
normal, encrypted ("crypt") or radio channels ("audio").

Search for channels: Entering the first letter will help you find your
channel faster.

Edit channels: Here you can sort a channel into the favorites packet
and specify whether or not EPG data should be requested or not.
Since some stations have multiple sound tracks, you can select them
with "audio channel". This concerns especially channels with Dolby®
Digital 5.1 Surround Sound.

Import/Export: You can save the current MAGIX channel list using the
Export button. Using the Import button, it is possible to import a
channel list. This way you can, for example, use the channel list that
you have created in an earlier program version or in a different MAGIX
program with a TV function.

In case you use a DVB-T card, you can visit

http://www.linuxtv.org/vdrwiki/index.php/Main_Page http://www.vdr-
wiki.de/wiki/index.php/DVB-T_channels.conf for more information.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 93

TV program
The "Program" button in TV mode of the MAGIX Videorecorder opens
the TV program view.

This provides the option to get informed without any paper about TV
programs: The free DVB-TV Guide offers a 14-day overview of the TV
schedule. DVB reception via a DVB stick or a DVB card is required for
this to work. The program overview can be selected via the "TV
program" button.

The DVB TV replaces your conventional TV guide and provides more

comfort than your standard guide:

• You can search for specific programs, for example, if you can't quite
remember which channel shows your favorite program.
• Shows can be programmed directly as recordings without having to
tediously program your video recorder, saving you time.
• You can set the order of the channel list yourself, without having to
stick to the order of your standard TV guides.

Note: If you can't receive a TV program via DVB, then you can use
MAGIX Online TV Guide. You can test this service for free for 60 days,
and then the service becomes fee-based.

Additional information about the selected program

The "Additional information" dialog can be opened by double-clicking
on a program. Here you will find detailed information on the selected
program. This may also include an age recommendation if provided.

www.magix.com
94 MAGIX Videorecorder
Recording: The selected program is added to the timer of the VCR if
you click on the "Record" button.

This symbol appears in programs that are broadcast in

16:9 (widescreen) format.

Additional icons present while using MAGIX Online TV Guide

Capture options
In this dialog you can specify actions that should be executed after
the last programmed recording: shut down the computer and update
the EPG files.

Recording time adjustment: If the EPG data differs from the actual
starting and finishing times of the shows, you can set the buffer times
here to start the recording earlier or finish it later.

Timer programming
The timer programming for time-controlled VCR
recordings can be opened via the "Timer" button.

Note: If you use one of the two integrated EPGs (the DVB TV Guide
or the MAGIX Online TV Guide, the data of the EPG is used to make
timer programming easier. If you choose not to use either of the
EPGs, you can also choose to execute the timer programming
manually (view page 96).

If recordings have been programmed and you exit MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16, a small tray symbol makes sure that just before the recording
starts, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 starts again and the VCR turns on.

Note! The automatic updates from Windows XP (with SP2) &

Windows Vista may force the computer to reboot, so that the
programmed recording will be interrupted or not started at all. For this
reason, it is recommended that you deactivate automatic updates for
Windows.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 95
To the left of the
dialog, the program
of the current show
is displayed. On the
right-hand side of the
dialog you can see all
of the pre-
programmed
recordings.

Recordings: First of all, select the program you wish to record from
the list on the left. Then click on the "Record" button to move the
show into the recording list on the right.

More information: Here you can check up on additional information

relating to a show.

Edit: This button (or by double clicking entries in the recording list)
opens the "Program recording" dialog.

Remove: This button removes the selected shows from the recording
list.

Manual programming: You can also insert, edit, or remove

recordings manually. This is especially necessary if you use neither
the DVB TV Guide nor MAGIX Online TV Guide.

www.magix.com
96 MAGIX Videorecorder

Manual timer programming

Recording start/end: Here you can specify when the recording

should start and end as well as the date. Clicking on the date opens
up a calendar.

Channel: Here you can specify which channel is to be recorded.

Repeat: Here you can define a series of recordings to record daily or

weekly shows.

Recording/Folder name: You can also give the recording a

descriptive title and change the recording folder.

www.magix.com
 MAGIX Videorecorder 97
Correct time at end of recording (min): If the recording time was
programmed via the EPG, you can add additional time to extend the
record time.

Timeshift recording: Recording starts in Timeshift mode, i.e. you can

already watch the program while it is being recorded.

Timeshift mode
In Timeshift mode for analog TV cards the program can
be recorded and played back at the same time. This way,
a TV show can be watched with a time delay if so
wished.

As soon as you switch to Timeshift mode, the show is "stopped". Of

course, it remains running in the background and is still being
recorded. A transport console opens. Use this to move back and
forth through the program. This way you can, for example:

Stop the program to take a telephone call. To do so,

simply activate Timeshift mode. Once you're finished
with your call and you wish to resume viewing, click on
the playback button.
Fast forward the ads. Start the video recorder in
Timeshift mode when the program starts. Then do
something else for roughly the amount of time ads will
show throughout the duration of the program. When
you decide that you want to watch the program, press
the play button. If an ad-block comes, simply use the
"Jump ahead 30 seconds" button to skip the ads.
Replay: Here you can rewind. Start Timeshift mode and
playback at the exact same time. Now move the
position slider to the far right. Playback is now in the
"present". If something exciting happens, you can use
the "Jump back 30 seconds" button to get an action
replay, just like if you are watching a football match.

www.magix.com
98 MAGIX Videorecorder

Save recorded programs

Use the video recorder button "Open recording folder" to access the
folder with the recorded programs.

A standard dialog for file selection now opens.

You can sort the programs according to channel, name and record
time, delete programs or view advanced EPG information for the
program. DVB radio recordings are not played by the video recorder,
but you can press a button to listen to the recordings using MAGIX
Music Manager.

www.magix.com
 Insert object into the project 99

Insert object into the project

Video monitor
All selection processes are conducted on the video monitor. Here you
can view and edit material before importing. There is a preview
function for all of the files in the Media Pool.

• Use the playback button to start the preview of video or image

objects in Media Pool. For special objects like titles or fades a
preview is given.
• Audio files and synthesizer objects from the Media Pool can also be
listened to using the playback button.

Tip: Useful presets for the arranger and video monitor can be found in
the tab Display presets (view page 316) in the program settings.

Full screen view

The option "full screen" in the context menu maximizes the preview
monitor. Alternatively, a double click on the monitor or "A+Enter" also
maximizes the window. The fullscreen view is especially
recommended for working with two screens; one screen for the film
preview, and the other for the arranger.

You can also shift the monitor into full screen mode and access it via
the context menu (right mouse button). There, you can also hide and
display the basic transport controls.

With "Esc" you will go back to the normal view (or click on "smaller"
button to the right in the fullscreen mode).

Show movie overview

The option "Film overview" in the "Window" menu enables an
overview of teh entire arranger. All objects in the arranger will be
displayed in the program monitor. The overview display is especially
recommended for work with long movies because the reduced
overview in the program monitor and the zoomed detailed view in the
arranger present a good combination.

The film overview can be used for moving around in the movie and for
editing certain parts:

www.magix.com
100 Insert object into the project
• When you click on a certain object in the video monitor, the arranger
will zoom on that object.
• Using the mouse, you can draw a frame in the video monitor – and
the corresponding range will be zoomed in the arranger.
• When you move the playback marker in the video monitor, the
arranger playback marker will also move correspondingly.

Tip: If you use this option very often, you can use the keyboard
shortcut (Shift + A).

Load files
Media files can be loaded into the Arranger from the Media Pool in
several different ways:

• The fastest way: Drag the desired file with the mouse button held
down from the Media Pool into the desired track. If there are objects
at this position, the file is inserted at the desired time position at the
next empty track below.
• Load several files: If you would like to load several files, hold down
the "Ctrl" key while clicking on the entries you would like to use. If
you would like to load a sequence of files, hold the "Shift" key and
first click on the first entry, then on the last. All entries lying in
between are marked. Every file can be moved from the Media Pool
to the Arranger using drag & drop.

DVD files (VOB) with multiple audio tracks

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 also loads VOB files that contain multiple
audio tracks. After the VOB file loads, simply click the audio object
created and select the desired audio track.

Note: To view and select audio objects in the arrangement, Timeline

mode must be active.

Load parts of film files.

For longer videos, it is recommended to define the areas which
should be loaded into the project before import. For this, and in and
out point is set, defining the area. This is done in the following way:

www.magix.com
 Insert object into the project 101
• Please select a file from the Media Pool by double clicking on it. Play
it back using the play buttons to indicate the section which you want
to use in the project.
• Either move the area markers directly with held down
mouse button or set them using the buttons or the
shortcut I and O. The shortcuts are especially useful for
exact positioning using the shuttle and the jog wheel.
• Left-click on the monitor and drag it down with the held-down
mouse. An object will appear on the track and in the project folder
simultaneously, corresponding to the selected area.

MPEG-4 import
MPEG -4 files can be loaded from the Media Pool just like other files
using drag & drop. Videos that have a higher horizontal resolution
than 768 pixels can only be imported by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
Plus.

Note: To import and export AVC and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4
codec must first be activated (view page 343). A dialog will open if the
codec is required. Files with a horizontal resolution of more than 768
pixels can only be loaded in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus.

Automatic scene detection

www.magix.com
102 Insert object into the project
Automatic scene recognition can be opened via the "Effects" menu.
The scene recognition function analyzes the film for scene transitions
and scans for drastic changes in the brightness and color distribution
within the picture.

Automatically created timestamps from digital video devices (the

points in time at which the device was turned on and off) are also
marked as scenes.

1. First, select "Start" from the "Search scene change" box. The
search for possible scene transitions will begins. If you have a
large amount of material, then this may take a while, but the image
analysis has to be done just once for each recording. The results
are saved together with the video file.
If the scene recognition is performed again with the same source
material, then the scene transitions found are immediately
displayed. If you are still not happy with the resulting scene
partitioning simply repeat and correct where necessary.
2. All found scene transitions in the list can be checked in the dialog.
Every scene marker can be selected or deleted. Select a scene
transition from the list of found scene transitions and use the
preview images to check whether the found transition is really a
scene change or not.
Tip: This option is helpful, for example, if a camera flash was captured
in the source footage. The flash from the camera would cause a
sudden brightness modification even though there was no actual
scene change.

The preview always displays the end of the previous scene and the
beginning of the new scene. If the images do not differ except for the
brightness, then the scene may have been falsely recognized. In this
case select "Delete scene marker".

Via the zoom +/- buttons you can enlarge the part of the arranger
where the selected scene begins or previous scene ended.

You can use the "Sensitivity" controller to change the sensitivity of

the scene recognition to detect different scene changes, depending
on the settings.

"Action on OK" lets you specify whether the movie should be cut at
the selected scene transition or at all scene transitions and whether
the found scenes should be saved as takes.

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 103

Working with objects

Select objects
To edit or delete objects using the menus, you must first select them.
To do so, simply click on the object you wish to select. Objects will
change color to show that they have been selected.

When the "Shift" key is pressed, multiple objects are selected. You
can open up a rectangle positioning the mouse over the object, then
holding down the mouse button and marking all objects within the
rectangle (”elastic band selection”) by left clicking and dragging.

Any object can be combined with others to make up a group to avoid

objects being unintentionally moved out of relation to each other.
Once they are combined, clicking on one object of a group will select
the entire group. To group or ungroup objects, use the buttons in the
tool bar or the corresponding commands in the "Edit" menu.

Moving objects
Any object selection can be moved (dragged) along the horizontal
timeline or vertically into different tracks by clicking and holding the
left mouse button on the selected objects. After releasing the mouse
button the objects appear at the new location.

If the "Shift" key is pressed while moving the object selection, then
the object's horizontal time position will be maintained. The object
selection can only be moved vertically (up and down to different
tracks).

Splitting objects
All objects can be split. Each object section then becomes is then
split into individual objects.

• First of all, select the object to be split.

• Position the playback marker at the position where the
movie is to be cut.
• Click on the "Cut" button or select the "Cut" option in the

www.magix.com
104 Working with objects
"Edit" menu.

In order to rejoin these split objects at a later stage, simply highlight

the individual parts and select the command "Create group" to group
the selected objects together.

Edit menu
With a click on the small arrow beside the cut button, you
can access the cut menu. There you will find further relevant
commands.

Split
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.

Keyboard shortcut: T

Remove start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned and removes the material before the playback marker.

Keyboard shortcut: K

Remove object end

This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned and removes the material behind the back marker.

Keyboard shortcut: U

Remove scene
If you want to cut a scene out of a movie retroactively, this option
automatically moves all objects, titles, and transitions on all tracks
forwards so that no gaps result.

Objects on other tracks which project into the area of the selected
scene will not be moved automatically; they will remain at the current
position.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 105
Split movie
This command splits a movie at the point where the playback marker
is positioned, making two separate movies. The part before the
playback marker will remain in the arranger. The remaining part will be
erased from the current arranger and turned into a new movie, which
can be found in the "Window" menu.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + T

Duplicate objects
It is easy to copy objects to create larger arrangements from small
audio or video loops quickly. Speed up this process by clicking on the
object to be copied with the mouse while holding down the "Ctrl" key.
This generates a copy which you can immediately drag to the desired
position.

Object handles
All objects can be re-sized with the “object handles” on the lower
edge. Move the mouse over one of the lower corners of the object
until the mouse pointer becomes a double arrow. You can now
stretch the object as much as you like.

5 "handles": Length, fade, brightness (volume)

An object can be faded in or out using the handles to the left and
right upper corners of the object. Crossfades between different
objects can be created by overlapped positioning of objects that are
fading in and out. The length of the crossfade can be adjusted with
the handles.

Using the brightness/volume handle located centrally at the top of the

object, adjusts the volume of audio or MIDI objects, or the brightness
of video and image objects. Even if several objects are playing
simultaneously, the volume or brightness of individual objects can still
be altered.

www.magix.com
106 Working with objects

Shrink or interlace videos

Videos can be made smaller, e.g. to show a foreground video in a
cut-out of a background video. To do this, both videos have to be
placed above each other in the arranger.

• Place one video above the other in the tracks.

• Position the foreground video on the track beneath the background
video.
Note: Make sure that the mixing effect "Stamp" is active under "Video
effects -> Chroma key".

• Select the foreground video, and in the Media pool under "Effects ->
Movement effects", select the entry "Position/Size" or "Crop/Zoom".
• You can change the image area/size by holding down the mouse
button and dragging the edges of the video in the program monitor.
This is also useful for placing the selected video at the desired
position in the program monitor.

For more detailed information, see the section entitled "Movement

effects in Media Pool" in the chapter "Effects and titles (view page
129)". Nearly all preset effects may be automated or animated. To
animate effects or produce movements, please read the "Animating
objects (view page 178)" chapter.

Extract sound from videos

Video with sound material appears in the arranger on two tracks as
two objects (an audio object and a video object). The two objects
automatically form a group.

To edit the video and audio material separately from one another, the
objects can be separated with the Ungroup (view page 266) function
in the "Edit" menu or button in the arranger. Now you can replace the
audio or the video track, or process each file separately.
Rejoin/regroup the tracks with the ”Export arrangement” function.

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 107

Save objects separately

You can easily save the object from the Arranger as separate files.
Objects contain a reference to any multimedia file or a special objects
(video, sound, visual, etc.) with all additional properties that an object
can have like in and out point, fade and effects including effect curves
that can be used in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

In MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 you can use Takes for various
applications.

• You can divide your videos into takes while loading into the Arranger.
To do this, first press the "Media/Film" button. The transport
functions of the transport control no longer apply to the objects in
the Arranger but rather to the video file selected in the Media Pool.
• The Extras button lets you set in and out points for scenes. The
selected scene can subsequently be saved to the Takes directory.
• All scenes found by the automatic scene recognition function can be
stored in the Takes directory. This creates the basis for a quick
assembly of found scenes.
• This takes directory may be used in both direction: either as a source
of takes to be dragged into the Arranger or a destination directory for
new scenes. Use the Takes directory to build complex storyboards:
The individual scenes that make up the video are cut first, before
being arranged on the tracks.
• Since Takes also contain corresponding effects, one can store
different variations of the same movie with different effects (for
example, video cleaning) in the Takes directory. The Takes directory
uses very little memory in contrast to rendering out the actual video
files!

Video mix
This term refers to mixing various videos while simultaneously playing
them. The video objects to be mixed must be placed one below the
other in the arranger so they overlap in time. Add a special video mix
effect to the lower video, which determines the parts that will be
transparent for the upper video. This way, you look from the bottom
to the top through the arranger.

To make a dancer dance in front of a landscape using the "blue box"

effect, the landscape must be placed on, for example, track 1 and the

www.magix.com
108 Working with objects
dancer on track 2 and the "blue box" effect be activated for the
dancer.

Tip: For further details on video effects and adjustments, see the
chapter "Video effects (view page 130)".

Magnetic objects
You can attach a video, picture, or text object to moving picture
content of another video. The "Image object" automatically completes
the movement of a picture element from the film. For example, you
could use this method to insert a hat that stays on someone's head
throughout, even if the person hops through the picture. Let's roll:

• Place an image object (e.g. a photo of a hat) on a track below a

video with a corresponding image element (e.g. a walking person).
The picture element should have enough contrast in it (bright-dark
difference) and should have a consistent size.
• In the Media Pool under "Effects -> Movement effects ->
Position/Position", you can match the zoom of the image object to
the video and then position it precisely (i.e. add the hat to the
person).
• Right click on the image object and select the "Attach to image
position in the video".
• In the "Attach to image position in the video" dialog, click on
"Change size and position".
• Select an image section in the preview monitor using the mouse
which you would like the image object to follow. This section should
have as high a level of contrast as possible.
• Calculation of the object movement starts automatically.

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 109

Transitions (fades)
When importing video files into the arranger, individual objects usually
follow directly after one another. This is called a "hard cut". However,
you can make scenes blend or “transition” into each other.

This means that for the duration of a transition, two objects are
shown at once and can be mixed "faded" together in different ways.
You will find numerous blends in the Media Pool’s transition directory.

Simple crossfade

A simple transition can be created in the arranger by dragging one

object over another. A crossfade will be automatically created. During
this standard transition, the brightness of both objects is increased,
i.e. the first clip fades out while the second clip fades in. The duration
of the crossfade is displayed in the arranger by white crossing lines.
You can adjust the length of the crossfade by dragging the upper
handle (See "Object handles") of the second object to the left or to
the right.

To select a different fade click on the transition symbol

displayed when an object is selected.

The fade menu opens. The transition icon will change, depending on
your selection.

Fades from the Media Pool

To open the fade directory, click the "Fade" button; double clicking
enables a preview of the fade in the preview monitor.

Simply drag the desired fade preset onto the border between the two
objects. Only when the mouse pointer with the transition preset is
placed over a scene change will it turn into an object symbol. The
object at the back will be shifted to the front to accommodate the
transition.

www.magix.com
110 Working with objects
The length of a transition is decided by you, so if a transition is
shortened, it means that the resulting effect is speeded up.

Some transitions can be adjusted even more exactly. To do so, click

the corresponding fade symbol in the timeline or in the storyboard
and select "Settings". An object's fade symbol in the Media Pool can
represent an entire group of different effects.

The alpha fades (in the directory: iris, objects, random, etc.) are
actually pre-produced black and white videos combined with the
alpha keying effect.

Note: Use transitions economically! Most professional movies or TV

shows use hard cuts as the rule and transitions less frequently.
Videos appear unprofessional and too ornate if fade effects are added
to every change of scene.

Custom fades via alpha keying (Plus version)

Alpha keying extends the range of transition effects used in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16 to produce black & white movie transitions or
selected color fade-ins and fade-outs. You can create such a video
from any video material (also color) by exporting it as a transition (File
-> Export movie -> Export as transition).

The loaded movie is then exported as a black and white video in mxv
format and stored in the fade directory. Afterwards, it will be available
on the Media Pool and in the fade menu.

3D transitions
General options
3D power effects offer exciting and varied opportunities for creating
transitions between two videos. You will find the 3D effects in the
Media Pool’s transitions directory.

To display the 3D fades as smoothly as possible, the program uses

the accelerator features of your graphics adaptor. 3D functions can
be used with both software standards: Direct3D and OpenGL. These
standards are variably supported by the respective graphics card
drivers. For this reason, you can switch between different fade
settings for each standard.

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 111
Settings
In the transition settings you can adjust the look and reaction of the
3D transitions. To do so, click the corresponding fade symbol in the
timeline or in the storyboard and select "Settings".

The following options are then available to you:

Anti-aliasing: An undesirable step effect is usually created at the

borders of 3D objects. Anti-aliasing reduces this effect, but also
requires more computer power. This setting applies globally for all 3D
fades. Switching anti-aliasing for a 3D transitions therefore ensures
that this setting is applied to all other 3D transitions

Mirror X/Y: This option lets you influence the movement curve of the
3D objects within the transitions. The "X axis mirror" option mirrors
the movement of the object horizontally. The option "Y axis mirror"
mirrors the movement of the object vertically (along the Y axis).

Rendering: Determine which software standard (see above) you

would like to use to render the 3D objects, i.e. OpenGL or Direct3D.
Both modes use the hardware functions of the graphics card to
render the 3D transition. Nevertheless, they can produce different
results, both in performance as well as in the final look of the
transitions.

To use Direct3D, you have to have DirectX9.0a installed. OpenGL

requires an OpenGL1.1 driver.

This setting applies globally to all 3D transitions. Switching between

the render modes of a 3D transition therefore ensures that all other
3D transitions also use this setting.

Hardware acceleration deactivation: Hardware-accelerated

rendering on the graphics card increases the performance multiple
times over; however, it may lead to problems on some systems. If
errors should occur in connection with the 3D transitions, you can
deactivate hardware acceleration for calculating 3D transitions.

To do this, select the “Program settings” item from the file menu and
deactivate the options “Hardware acceleration for 3D effects”. To
apply these changes, you will need to restart the program.

www.magix.com
112 Working with objects
Troubleshooting

Problem: The 3D transition display in the video monitor is sluggish

and jittery.

Solution: The performance of the 3D power effects is dependent on

your graphics adapter's CPU power. To achieve a smoother display
you can deactivate anti-aliasing in the 3D transitions settings dialog,
or you can choose a lower resolution for your screen. Furthermore,
you should ensure that you have the latest driver for your graphics
card installed. During export or burning to disc, transitions will be
displayed fluidly in any case.

Problem: The screen remains black or displays errors during 3D

transitions.

Solution: The 3D transitions use hardware-accelerated rendering on

your graphics card to calculate the image. This can lead to
compatibility problems on certain systems. Please ensure that you
have the latest driver for your graphics card installed. In certain
circumstances, this may also fix the switchover between the render
modes (in the settings dialog of the transitions) or solve the problem
by deactivating anti-aliasing.

If there are still problems, however, you can deactivate hardware

acceleration completely. Refer to “Deactivating hardware
acceleration” for more info.

Problem: A warning that there is insufficient graphics card memory

for rendering the transition is displayed when exporting or burning a
slideshow containing 3D transitions.

Solution: The video memory on your graphics card is insufficient to

render the 3D effect at the desired resolution. Select a lower
resolution (e.g. 720 x 576) in the export dialog. If the problem
persists, deactivate the hardware acceleration as described in the
section “Deactivating hardware acceleration”.

Problem: Only a crossfade is displayed when previewing a 3D

transition. A warning is displayed that insufficient graphics card
memory is available

Solution: The video memory of your graphics card is insufficient to

render the 3D effect at the desired resolution. Right click the video
monitor and then select a lower resolution in “Resolution presets”. If

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 113
the problem persists, try deactivating hardware acceleration as
described above.

Problem: Only a crossfade is displayed when previewing a 3D

transition. A warning is displayed that the 3D transition may not be
displayed correctly.

Solution: Deactivate hardware acceleration; see "Deactivating

hardware acceleration".

3D series
The 3D series are a further development of 3D transitions (view page
110), whereby the transitions are thematically sorted. For instance,
you can make photos pop up and disappear on a notice board or
make it look as if the photos were hanging on the walls of a gallery.

There are several options to load 3D series for photos or scene

transitions:

• Click the "Fades -> 3D -> 3D series" button in the Media Pool. Select
the desired 3D series and drag it onto the first scene or image
transition where the 3D transition should start.
• In the transitions menu between two scenes choose the
option "3D series". Click on the desired 3D series to select it.

You can select how many of the subsequent fades should be

replaced by the 3D series in the dialog.

Overview mode

The "Scene overview" mode is a special view that improves

manageability and categorization of scenes. All scenes are listed one
after the other (in multiple lines, like in a text program) and can be
copied, cut, moved, deleted and inserted.

www.magix.com
114 Working with objects
In the "Overview" mode, there are no start, play, or end markers. The
scene being played back has a frame around it.

Zoom fader

This slider specifies how large the photos will appear in the
storyboard. The smaller the scenes, the more of them you'll be able
to fit on screen.

Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene

overview to fullscreen.

Grid and snap

The time of the arrangement is displayed by the horizontal course of
the tracks. To structure this course, a timeline with a grid has been
positioned at the top above the first track.

A grid is also displayed in the arranger area. The raster ensures that
the objects always "snap" to certain points so that they can be
positioned precisely according to the beat. Two consecutive objects
will seamlessly snap together even if they are on different tracks. This
avoids undesired gaps or overlaps.

www.magix.com
 Working with objects 115

Searching for and removing ads (Plus version)

The "Ad killer" feature can be used to automatically locate and

remove commercials in recorded TV programs.

How it works: First, characteristics typical of commercials are

located, and then the entire section including the ads is edited and
removed. This is particularly effective in movies broadcast in 16:9
widescreen format since there are two visible black borders at the top
and bottom. The borders disappear when ads are shown, so the ad
killer detects this when they disappear and edits the movie at these
positions. Using the button "Get black value" you can click on the
black bars in the monitor and thus set the color shade in order to
improve detection. A further characteristic typical for commercials is
raising (maximizing) the volume.

Specify in this dialog whether you want to cut the ad block

immediately or highlight it first. You also have various search and
display options.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + C

www.magix.com
116 Markers

Markers
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 also allows you to set various types of
markers within your project.

The Lock button lets you lock all markers

(jump markers, chapter markers) against
accidental moving or deleting.

Playback marker
The playback marker indicates the point from which the
material – either the arrangement or a selected file from the
Media Pool – will be played back. There is a playback
marker below each preview monitor and an additional one
above the timeline in the arranger.
The playback marker is displayed as a red triangle below the
monitors. In the arranger it is displayed as a red triangle.

In order to move the playback marker, simply double click on the

desired area below the monitor. Alternatively, you can click on the
playback marker and move it by dragging it with the mouse. While
being moved, the current image will appear on the monitor, letting
you see exactly where in the material you are located.

The playback marker in the video monitor can also be moved by

clicking on the lower section of the time scale in the arranger. The
playback marker will also be moved on the program monitor, as both
markers are coupled to each other.

The exact position of the playback marker can be seen in the time
display at the top left, below the corresponding monitor. There, you
can change the displayed values (Hour:Minute:Second:Frame) per
mouse click to reach a certain point in time. Simply enter the desired
value and the playback marker will jump to the corresponding
position.

Tip: In the "Playback" tab under "File -> Settings -> Program", you
can set whether repeatedly pressing the space bar resets the
playback marker to the current position or moves it to the original
position.

www.magix.com
 Markers 117

Set project marker

The menu provides the option of placing a project marker (view page
268) at the current playback location. These provide a way to mark
certain segments or events of interest in the project, etc.

After selecting the menu, a dialog for entering the name of the marker
to be created will open. The first 10 project markers may be selected
using the number keys 1-0 (0 accesses the 10th marker). This allows
you to jump to a particular position of a longer video immediately,
without scrolling and searching.

Project markers can be deleted or renamed at any time via the

context menu. They do not have any direct on the results of your
work, but they can be very helpful.

Area marker (in and out points)

Area markers are the start markers (in-points) and end markers (out-
points). The serve to mark a certain area, which will be played back
by pressing the "area playback" button at the bottom of the
corresponding monitor.

To the left, you see a start marker, and to the right, an end marker.

The area markers in the arrangement serve to indicate the paste

position of new video or sound material.

Hint: The value between both markers shows the length of the
selected area following the pattern of
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.

Ranges in the video monitor

There are various options for changing the playback area and the
in/out points.

www.magix.com
118 Markers
• Set the playback marker at the desired position and press "Set range
start" or "Set range end" underneath the monitor to set the in and
out points.
• Click on one of the markers below the monitor and move it to the
desired position by dragging it.
• Click one of the markers in the upper-most bar in the arranger and
drag it.
• Right clicking on the bar moves the out point to the position of the
mouse cursor. The area grows or shrinks in size correspondingly.
Left clicking moves the in point, whereby the area size stays
constant (out point is moved as well).
• You can adjust the position of the entire range by clicking the blue
bar between the markers and moving it by dragging while holding
down "Crtl".

Keyboard shortcut:
Set the start of the range (in point) at the position of the playback
marker: "I"
Set the end of the range (out point) at the position of the playback
marker: "O"

Chapter markers
The chapter marker defines the start of the new chapter.
Chapters improve navigation when burning your project
to CD or DVD (view page 233).
The following options can be accessed via the "Edit" menu or by right
clicking on a playback marker.

Marker > Set chapter marker

Sets a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker.
This creates a chapter entry in the disc menu, in case you are
planning to burn the movie to CD/DVD.

You can rename your chapter markers by right clicking and selecting
"Rename". The name then appears in the chapter menu (view page
236).

Shortcut: Shift + Enter

www.magix.com
 Markers 119
Marker > Automatic chapter markers
Automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement based on
certain rules. These chapter markers determine the chapters in your
DVD menu. This function is useful if you want to burn your recording
onto disc right away.

There are a few options for automatic chapter generation:

At the beginning of the movie: The movie contains only one chapter

At the object starts in a track...: Every object in a track creates a

chapter. Track 1 is preset.

At the position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance as

faded-in subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.

Provide interval (in minutes)/provide quantity: If the chapters are

separated without any particular method and are just needed for
quicker navigation, you can also insert chapter markers in pre-defined
intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter markers.

Titling the chapter markers: To title the chapter markers, you can use
a user-defined name with consecutive numbers or the object name or
text from the text objects.

Optionally, you can delete existing chapter markers and confine the
automatic chapter marker function to the area between the start and
end markers.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + Enter

Marker > Delete (all) chapter markers

Deletes one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries from
the disc menu. Read more in "Burn screen".

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Enter / Alt + Ctrl + Enter

www.magix.com
120 Markers

Scene markers
Scene markers separate a complete video into scenes. You can load
any video into MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 and have it divided into
scenes.

Simply drag the desired video into the arranger. Then, right click on
the video and select "Scene recognition". The following dialog
appears:

After clicking "Start search", an overview of the detected scenes will

be displayed underneath the scene control.

Delete scene markers: Here you can delete individual markers by

selecting them from a list.

Delete all markers: Deletes all project markers.

Action on OK: You have three possibilities: Either MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16 splits your video into individual scenes ("Cut at all markers"),
your select a scene and cut only at this position ("Cut at selected
marker") or you can save the scenes as "Takes (view page 106)".

After deciding in favor of one of these options, red

scene markers will appear on the timeline in the
arranger. The scenes can then be split according to the
selected option and edited.

www.magix.com
 Markers 121

Note: An important difference between a scene and a chapter marker

is that a scene marker can be set only within a continuous video,
while a chapter marker can include several videos consecutive
videos.

Additional information about scene recognition is provided in chapter

"Insert objects into the project (view page 101)".

Shortcut for scene recognition: Shift + Z

Ad markers
Ad markers indicate detected ad pauses. For more on
this, please read the "Search for and remove ads"
chapter (view page 115).

www.magix.com
122 Trim Objects

Trim Objects
Trimming provides exact placement of object borders or transitions.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 has two different trimmers, and these can
be opened using the context menu for a video or image object.

General advice for operating both trim editors

Play functions: The trim window contains its own play functions that
allow the object to be played individually or in relation to the
arrangement.

• The right play button plays the arrangement normally. Note: Replays
can sometimes appear shaky because the processor may be
overworked, and some frames may be left out.
• The middle play button plays the arrangement "frame-by-frame",
which means no frames are left out, but that the replay may be
slower.
• The left play button renders material before playing. This method
ensures a smoother playback.

The start marker in the timeline is reset when the rewind and fast-
forward functions are activated, allowing for complete control of
transitions between two videos.

Increments: A click on the +/- buttons in both trim editors places the
handle or the material within an object exactly into a frame. With the
"Ctrl" key you can increase the frame rate ( 5 frames/sec per mouse
click).

www.magix.com
 Trim Objects 123

Trimmer for individual objects

A schematic display of the selected object and its handles can be
found in the center of the trimming window.

Fade in/out (4, 5): These buttons adjust the upper fade handles of an
object.

Object content (3): Here you can move the video material to be
played without changing the object length.

Position (2): Moves the object on the track.

First frame/End fade-in (7): Toggles the left monitor between the first
frame of the object and the end of the transition.

Start fade-out/Last Frame (8): Toggles the right monitor between the
start of the transition and the last frame of the object.

Left/right arrow buttons (1, 6): Here you can adjust the lower object
handles.

Next object/cut (9, 10): The buttons below and to the right skip to the
next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make
it easy to move and trim objects in the arrangement without having to
leave the trimmer.

Keyboard shortcut: Q

www.magix.com
124 Trim Objects

Cut trimmer

A schematic display of the selected transition and its handles can be

found at the center of the trimming window.

Left arrow buttons (1): These buttons move the last frame of the first
object while adjusting the second. The length of the transition
remains. The display indicates the relative change in comparison with
the starting situation when the trimmer was opened.

Position (2): Moves the second object. The length of the transition is
changed. This corresponds with shifting an object in the arranger.

Object content (3): Moves the movie under the second object. The
length of the object and the object itself are not changed.

Crossfade (4): Changes the transition’s length between both objects.

The objects remain of equal length. The length can be numerically
entered.

Middle arrow buttons (5): Shifts the existing transition. Both objects
remain in their positions, but the transition’s center point moves.

Transition (6): Displays the type of transition. A mouse click opens a

popup window from which you can select a transition.

Right arrow buttons (7): Move the first frame of the second object.
The first object and the transition remains. Only the length of the
second object changes.

Start fade-out/Last frame (8): Switches the left monitor between the
start of the transition and the last frame of the object.

www.magix.com
 Trim Objects 125
First frame/End fade-in (9): Switches the right monitor between the
first frame of the following object and the end of the transition.

Next cut (10)/Next object (11): The buttons below and to the right
skip to the next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These
buttons make it easy to move and trim cuts in the arrangement
without having to leave the trimmer.

Keyboard shortcut: N

www.magix.com
126 Multi-cam editing (Plus version)

Multi-cam editing (Plus version)

Multi-cam editing enables easy cutting of various recordings of the
same scene from different camera perspectives. The preview monitor
shows the image material from two sources next to each other, from
which the "program" can be cut in real time using your mouse – just
like in a real studio.

Preparation
Multicam editing is a special arranger mode. The top two tracks serve
as target tracks for copying sound and video from two different
source tracks. The two top tracks must be empty when switching into
the multicam mode, otherwise existing objects will be moved to a
different track.

Next, load various video recordings of the same scene one under the
other starting on track 3 in the arranger.

It is important that the individual sources are synchronized to each

other exactly. It is best to find a noticeable movement, or an "o"
sound, if audio was recorded.

To localize the sound in the audio track exactly, you may have to
create a wave display of the track. Right click on the sound track and
choose "Create wave form display".

You can use a clapperboard during filming, since this offers both
sound and motion; an actor's clapping in front of running camera
before the start of the scene is also helpful. Set a grid point at this
position in the object ("Alt + Shift + P"). You can now move the
source objects over each other, so that the grid points are aligned.

It is also important that you make all effect settings for the output
material (e.g. video or audio cleaning) before the multicam edit on the
objects on the source track and on the master audio track (view page
129). These effects will be transferred to the objects in the target
track with the edit. Otherwise, you will have to apply the effects from
every single object to the target track.

You can activate "Multicam" mode with this button or with the
"Multicam" command in the "Edit" menu.

www.magix.com
 Multi-cam editing (Plus version) 127

Source tracks and preview images

The assignment of tracks as source tracks for the multicam cut takes
place automatically. When the multicam mode is activated, the
source tracks will be assigned to all tracks containing video objects
starting from track 3.

You can also conduct or change the assignment manually. To do so,

right click on the trackbox of the corresponding track to active or
deactivate a track as a source track. In this way, you can use more
than two tracks for multicam editing, but no more than two
simultaneously. The source tracks are marked using color.

A preview appears in the program monitor for every assigned track,

and the source track's color corresponds to the preview images so
that you can quickly assign each preview image.

If the objects created using multicam cut are located on the target
track, a preview image of the corresponding source track highlighted
with a yellow frame will be shown for length of playback.

www.magix.com
128 Multi-cam editing (Plus version)

Multicam edit functions

You can edit various sources in the the target track during playback
in real time or during stopped playback.

Real-time multicam editing

You can edit various sources together during playback in real time.

1. Start playback.
2. Click on the desired source in the preview monitor.
3. The corresponding video added into the target track starting from
this time point.
4. To switch the source, click on another source, and a new object
from another source will be created from this point. You can
repeat this process as often as you like.

For precise editing in the target track, use the usual edit functions or
the Trimmer. Keep in mind that as long as you are in multicam mode,
only the object borders are moved, and not the objects themselves.
Otherwise, gaps or image jumps could result while you use the
multicam edit function again later.

Replacing an object's source

Replacing an object's video material in the target track with another
source:

1. Select the object for which the source is to be replaced in the

target track.
2. Click the source you want to replace the video material in the
source monitor object.
3. The video material will be replaced by the material selected in the
new source. The project length is not changed.

Insert cut
Insert material from one of the sources between any position on the
target track and the next object.

1. Place the playback marker on the desired position.

2. Click on the desired source in the preview monitor.
3. The material from this source will be added to the target track, the
new object will end at the next object, and the section lying below
an existing object will be overwritten.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 129
Overwrite range
You can overwrite a selected area of the target track with one of the
source videos.

1. At the upper edge of the arranger, select an area to edit by

determining the in point by clicking and the out point by right
clicking. Or use the corresponding buttons in the transport control.
2. Click the desired source in the program monitor.
3. The target track will be overwritten with the video material from the
selected source in the selected area.

Master audio track

Normally, videos in the source track are edited together with their
audio tracks. Since the original sound can differentiate from camera
to camera due to different camera positions, you will probably prefer
using either the soundtrack from only one camera for all settings, or
to replace the soundtrack completely (for music videos, for example,
you will use the studio version of the original track).

Right click on the track box of one of the source audio tracks or a
different audio track and select "Multicam: Master audio track" from
the context menu to assign a master audio track for multicam editing.
The master audio track will be appear in a dark color.

Now, during every multicam cut, material from the master audio track
will be inserted on track 2, independent of the source track used.

Titles and effects

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 offers a large palette of video effects. The
video effects that are used the most can be found directly in the
Media Pool, while others can be found in the object context menu or
in the "Effects" menu.

3D-Text (Plus-Version)
3D text can be created directly from the title editor. Click the title
editor and then press the "X3D title" button. The title object will now
be turned into a MAGIX 3D object. If you have also installed MAGIX
3D Maker, the program will open for you to work on the text.

www.magix.com
130 Titles and effects
Presets are also located in the Media Pool under "Titles -> 3D". You
can enter or process text here.

For more information about MAGIX 3D Maker, try the help file. You
can open it by pressing "F1" from within the program.

Apply fades
Fades can be selected in the Media Pool under "fades" and moved
into the space between two objects using drag & drop. In addition,
they are available directly in the fades menu between two objects (see
figure).

Find out more on this topic under “Transitions” (view page 109).

Apply effects to objects

All title and effects for objects are accessible via the Media Pool.
There are various methods for applying effects:

• Titles, static effects and audio effect presets are loaded into the
corresponding object using drag & drop.
• Effects that can be animated (in Media Pool under "Effects -> Video
effects/movement effects") will be applied directly to the objects
selected earlier as soon as changes are made in the Media Pool.

Video effects in the Media Pool

Video effects in the Media Pool can always be opened independently
from the selection of an object.

The program monitor displays the starting image of the video. The
playback marker enables you to jump to a specific position in the
video in order to check the results of the effects by starting and
stopping playback.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 131
Brightness & Contrast
Brightness/Contrast: Use the sliders to increase or reduce the
brightness and the contrast of the picture.

Selective brightness (gamma): “Gamma” determines the mean

grayscale that can be calculated from the various color ranges.
"Selective brightness" is the most important function for enhancing
images. In the preset list select various adjustment curves and edit
the dark, middle, or brightest points in the picture.

Using the fader you can also set the power of the
brightness/darkness adjustments.

Auto exposure: With this button you can automatically optimize the
exposure and contrast with a click.

Color
White balance
All light is not the same. Depending on whether it is sunlight or
artificial light, this will have an effect on color variation. The human
brain is able to compensate for this variation: A white sheet of paper
will still look white under candlelight, although it is in fact much more
yellow than by daylight.

In order to imitate this filtering done by the brain, a camera must also
analyze and correct the light. White balance does the same thing to a
picture that the brain does by setting the camera to the so-called
"color temperature" of the surroundings.

If you do not possess a camera which performs this function

automatically, you can apply the white balance function in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16.

An incorrect white balance can lead to an unnatural blue or red hue.

Directions: To use the white balance, click on the button to the right
of the label "White balance" and then select a point which represents
white or a neutral gray to the "outside world". The color temperature
is then corrected automatically.

Tip: Cool color effects can be achieved by setting a different color as

the white benchmark. There is definitely room for experimentation!

www.magix.com
132 Titles and effects
Red-eye-removal
This photo function removes unnatural redeye that the results from
using a flash. Click on the eye symbol and then select the red pupils
in the preview monitor using the mouse.

Hint: For photo optimization, we recommend you use MAGIX Photo

Manager. The program is installed automatically and can be used for
quick previewing and easy management of pictures from your
database. It has a tool for correcting redeye and setting auto color
and white balance to control discoloration in pictures.

Saturation
You can increase or reduce the color portions of images with the
“saturation” fader. A newly developed algorithm is applied which
makes color changes related to other parameters (for example
contrast settings) in order to achieve the most natural coloration
possible. With just a little bit of experimentation, you can achieve
astounding results – anything from turning summer snapshots into
autumnal scenes to funky pop art!

Hue
Select a color for coloring the image from the color chart.

Red/Green/Blue
Using the "Red/Green/Blue" slider, you can change the color portion
mix for each color.

Farbbereiche einzeln bearbeiten (Plus-Version)

Secondary color correction allows individual colors in video and
image objects to be adjusted. This includes essentially two layers, the
fore and background. The master layer may also be used to influence
the overall image.

The foreground layer corresponds with the mask created, and editing
in the background changes all of the areas outside of this mask. The
mask may be assigned to a certain color or to multiple colors
simultaneously.

To open color correction, click the video or image object and open
the entry "Color correction" via "Video effects" in the Media Pool.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 133
"Add" allows a color to be
selected with the pipette tool to
create a mask. MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16 displays the mask in
black and white stripes to
highlight the current selection.

Click with the pipette

tool on the color in the
program monitor that
you would like to add
to the current layer
until your selection is
complete.

Unwanted colors can be removed from the selection again by

selecting "Remove" and clicking the corresponding color.
Select the layers
(fore and
background) to edit.

Now edit the

selection like normal.

www.magix.com
134 Titles and effects
A classic example:
Saturation of all
brightness areas on the
background layer is
reduced, and colors in
the foreground are
adjusted as desired.

Chroma key
This section contains the mixing effects for chroma keying used to
mix together a foreground and background videos to create an
overlay effect.

Note: The background video must be present in the track above the
object for the foreground!
For example, track 1: background, track 2: foreground

Stamp: The currently selected object is "stamped" onto the video on

the track above the object. This is only possible if the bottom video
takes up only a part of the image, as otherwise only the bottom
(currently selected) video would be visible. The object should be
reduced or moved first. This can be achieved using the edit functions
(see above) or the "Selection" sub-menu in the "Effect" menu. To find
out more, read "Shrink or interlace videos (view page 106)".

Color: Select the range with the color that should be transparent in
the video monitor. The video is made transparent in the areas
featuring this color, and the video on the top track can be seen
“through” these areas.

Mix: This button mixes the two videos together. With the aid of the
fade handles, very soft cross-fades can be achieved between the
partially overlapping videos.

Black/blue/white/green screen: The selected video covers up the

video on the top track and all black/blue/white/green areas appear
transparent. this makes it possible to "place" a person who has been
recorded in front of a blue (or green, white or black) background into
any type of landscape or background.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 135
Alpha: This video effect uses the brightness of a video to control a
cross-fading effect between two other videos on neighboring tracks.
The additional videos should be situated directly above and below the
alpha-keying object.
In all black parts of the alpha-keying object, the top video is faded in,
while in all white passages the bottom video is shown. Grey passages
are permeable for both videos and create a mixture of the two. In the
case of colored passages, the brightness of the color is used for
control purposes.

Video level: The video level essentially changes the brightness of the
video before other video effects are applied. This can have significant
influence on the effects, especially in case of chroma keying. The
effect can be automated; read about this in the chapter "Animating
objects (view page 178)".

Artistic filter
Erosion: The image is broken up by means of small rectangles and
resembles a "patchwork".

Dilate: The image is broken down into cell-like elements.

Emboss: The edges are strongly highlighted.

Substitution: Using the rainbow scale red, green, and blue parts are
exchanged. Quickly create surreal landscapes and green faces.

Shift: The color values are increasingly inverted. Blue colors turn red;
green ones appear purple.

Quantize: Depending on the setting, colors are either rounded up or

down so that the overall number of colors is reduced. This creates
impressive grids and patterns.

Color fill: Using this slider, you can color in your video using red,
green and blue colors (the basic TV colors).

Contour: The image is reduced to its contours in two sizes (3 x 3 or

5 x 5); vertical or horizontal contours may be selected.

www.magix.com
136 Titles and effects
Distortion
Motion: Moving parts of the image are enhanced and warped.

Echo: The moving images create an optical "echo"; previous images

stand still and gradually turn paler until they completely disappear.

Whirlpool: The image is twisted into an "S" shape.

Fisheye: The perspective is distorted as if the image were viewed

through a fisheye lens.

Mosaic: The video is depicted as a mosaic.

Lens: The image is dynamically distorted at the edges.

Sand: The image is depicted in a granulated manner.

Kaleidescope: The left upper corner is mirrored horizontally and

vertically.

Horizontal/Vertical mirror: The object is reflected vertically or

horizontally – it appears on its side or upside down.

Sharpness
The fader allows you to regulate the level of image sharpness or apply
a soft filter.

"Fine adjustment" allows you to set how sharp surfaces or edges

should appear. This enables you to effectively reduce image
distortions (noise).

Speed
The playing speed can be adjusted with the slider control. The range
between 0 and 1 plays the video slowly; values above 1 accelerate
playback. If the playing speed is increased, the object length in the
arranger is automatically shortened.

Reverse: This button reverses the playback direction (with the same
tempo).

Note: Since the soundtrack of a movie cannot be played backwards,

you have to first separate the movie object from its soundtrack (view
page 106). The speed effects cannot be animated!

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 137
Animation
Nearly all preset effects may be automated or animated. To animate
effects or produce movements, please read the "Animating objects
(view page 178)" chapter.

Movement effects in the Media Pool

Size & Position

Values in: Set whether the values are applied in percent or pixels.

Position
Left: Enter the start position from the left image border.

Top: Enter the start position from the top image border.

Center: Based on the current image size, the image starting points
(left and top) will be positioned so that they are centered.

Note: Negative values can, of course, also be entered. The image

borders will then be outside of the visible area.

www.magix.com
138 Titles and effects
Size
Width: Enter the width of the image.

Height: Enter the height of the image.

Note: The size and the position of the image can be roughly entered
in the program monitor by simply moving the image into it and
dragging on the handles.

Maximize: The image will be maximized according to the movie's

resolution.

Set original size: The image will be scaled to its original size.

Retain proportions: This option makes sure that the image will not be
stretched or distorted. The proportions of width to height will remain
the same.

Edit: In the "Edit" mode you can change the position and size of the
image using handles that can be displayed or hidden.

The frame of the video monitor can be moved with the keyboard.

Nudge the screen 1 pixel: Arrow keys

Nudge the screen 5 percent: Shift + arrow keys

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 139
Camera movement

Cutaway
Cropped cutaways can be used to:

• display just one section of the photo.

• to move the clip through the picture with the help of a movement
effect – the result is a type of camera movement. Please read more
on this in the next chapter, "Movement".

In the program monitor, you can set a picture section to serve as the
basis for the movement effect. Press the left mouse button and drag
out the section you want to use.

Alternatively, both buttons can be used to specify the section.

Keep proportions: In this menu, you can select the format for the
section. The format of the original picture is used as the default.

www.magix.com
140 Titles and effects
Movement in direction
Determine the direction in which the selected section
or image will move during the time indicated under
"duration". In addition to horizontal and vertical
movements, diagonal movements are also possible.

Fullscreen: If this check box is active, the opened section will zoom
to fullscreen. If this option is switched off, it won't be possible to add
movement to the section.

Preview: Displays a preview of the section at the playback marker

location.

Direction and time

Zoom in: The entire picture is displayed and then zoomed
to show only a smaller picture section according to the
time set in “Length of movement”. If no portion is
previously set, a central portion of 50% of the picture is
set.

Zoom out: The selected picture section is displayed and is

then zoomed out to display the entire picture according to
the time set in “Time period”. If no portion is previously
set, a central portion of 50% of the picture is set.
Direction and time
The value specified here determines the position at which the
keyframes for the corresponding movement effect are set as
standard. They determine the positions at which the pan start and
stops.

Note: Automatically placed keyframes can be edited retroactively,

and the option will then be set to "User defined". Read the section
"Changing an effect's keyframes (view page 180)" in the chapter
"Animating objects (view page 178)".

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 141
Movement & zoom
Reset: This option applies a static zoom to show
the selected section of the picture only.

The frame of the video monitor can be moved with the keyboard.

Nudge the screen 1 pixel: Arrow keys

Nudge the screen 5 percent: Shift + arrow keys

Rotation & Mirror

This button resets all settings.

Note: If you animate the object using keyframes, then only the current
keyframe is affected by pressing reset.

www.magix.com
142 Titles and effects
Rotate
Rotates the image on the horizontal axis.

Rotates the image on the vertical axis.

Rotates the image around its center point.

Straighten horizon
The image can be rotated around the axis via the slider. The image is
automatically zoomed to avoid black edges.

Show guidelines: Activating this check box displays a grid in the

program monitor for orientation during horizontal straightening.

Mirror
Mirrors the image on the vertical axis.

Mirrors the image on the horizontal axis.

Rotates the image 90° clockwise.

Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise.

Presets
Various useful presets are located here.

A dialog opens for opening presets from other folders.

Save your owns settings as a preset.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 143
3D distortion
This makes real 3D positioning of images possible, letting you distort
the image in space and move it. Enter the individual corner points
numerically or move them in the program monitor using the mouse.

This button resets all settings.

Animation
Nearly all preset effects may be automated or animated. To animate
effects or produce movements, please read the "Animating objects
(view page 178)" chapter.

Additional effects
Additional effects may be loaded into MAGIX Video Pro X2 in the form
of video effect plug-ins. Video effects plug-ins are additional
programs of third-party manufacturers that can be used to add
additional video effects to video objects. You can use them to extend
the comprehensive effects selection of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 even
further.

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supports the plug-in format of the freeware
video editing software "VirtualDub", as well as the "VitaScene" and
"Adorage" program by "proDAD". A selection of tested VirtualDub
plug-ins (.vdf files, also called VirtualDub filters) and Adorage plug-ins
can be downloaded as an installer package directly from within
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

Important examples of using plug-ins are, for instance, removing

channel logos, disturbances or adding special effects.

www.magix.com
144 Titles and effects
Using video effect plug-ins
In order to be able to use plug-ins, you have to install them first.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 checks whether plug-ins are already
available. If not, it will offer to download them from the Internet or to
manually set the plug-in path .

Note: For the included proDAD programs in the Plus version, please
read the special chapter at the end of this manual!

In order to use a video effect plug-in, select the video or image object
first, then open "Effects -> Video effects -> Video effects plug-ins" in
the Media Pool menu. It lists all available plug-ins on the right side of
the dialog.

Video plug-ins manager

Effect templates for plugins: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 does not
include plugins due to licensing grounds. However, presets for
removing the Channel Logo (view page 146) are provided for some
TV channels with the "logoaway" plug-in.

You can save your personal settings by pressing the

"Save" button and remove them from the list by
pressing the "Delete" button.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 145
Available plug-ins: Here all available plug-ins are listed.

Add plug-in: The selected plug-in is added to the editing chain ( plug-
ins on the current object list is on the right). You can load as many
plug-ins as you like simultaneously. They are then edited
subsequently according to the list sequence.

Plug-in settings: Here you can open the settings dialog for the
selected plug-in. All plug-in settings on the entire list can be saved as
a preset (effect templates for plug-ins).

Advanced: Opens the Advanced settings (see "Advanced...") dialog.

Navigation buttons: Unlike in the Media Pool you can switch to the
previous or next movie with the navigation buttons in the lower part of
the dialog of a movie.

Apply from previous: Uses the settings of the previously set movie.
This option is only active if you are editing objects in sequence with
the navigation buttons (see above).

OK: The adjustments made to the settings will be applied to the

current movie.

Apply to all: The effects will be applied to all video and picture
objects in the slideshow.

Cancel: Closes the dialog, the settings will not be applied.

Advanced...

www.magix.com
146 Titles and effects
In the "Advanced" dialog, you can specify the search path for plug-
ins. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 checks these for available plug-in files
at program start and adds these to the list of available plug-ins. "Add
path" adds new search paths, and "Delete path" removes them from
the list again.

Check for file extension only: Accelerates the search for new plug-
ins if a larger number of plug-ins are available by not checking if they
are valid.

Scan subfolders: Extends the search to subfolders below the

selected paths.

Local settings

Recalculate video effects plug-in on bitmaps for each frame

dynamically: If you apply a plug-in to a bitmap (image), then this
option must be activated in case the plug-in creates moving effects.

Remove a channel logo with the "Logoaway" plug-in

The "Logoaway" freeware plug-in by Krzystof Wojdan is a high-quality
option for removing the channel logo from your video material. The
plug-in attempts to remove the channel logo by reconstructing image
elements using from the surrounding area.

Since each station positions its logo at a different location and in

different sizes, you can select the presets for different channels from
the effects templates.

Hint: The broadcasting rights of each channel must be observed.

Commercial use of the edited material clearly constitutes a breach of
copyright.

Image stabilization
The motion stabilizer reduces unsteady camera motion and helps to
smooth pans. This option can be accessed from the context menu of
a video object or via "Effects -> Open video objects".

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 147
Functionality

Image stabilization balances undesired picture movements. The

motion stabilizer equalizes inadvertent movements in the image by
moving the image in the opposite direction in accordance with the
wrong movements. This produces unusable edges in the footage that
are cut off automatically, and black strips replace the edge of the
shifted picture, which are then removed using a zoom shot. The result
is a clearly more stable, almost imperceptibly larger picture.

Application

Activate the motion stabilizer in the video object FX or context menus.

You will see the current video object in the preview monitor.

First, check the movie material for shaky scenes by clicking on the
"Stabilize" button. Based on the preset parameters, a relative shift
between the pictures is calculated. After concluding the analysis, take
a look at the suggested correction, then use the slider for further
adjustments. Once you are happy with the final correction, click "OK".
If the first scan did not provide a satisfactory result, try changing the
parameters below and repeat the process.

Image stabilization dialog

Stabilizing radius: To prevent the image stabilizer from recognizing

every camera movement as unwanted shakiness, you can determine
the radius within which movement is accepted; the larger the
stabilization radius, the more shakiness is corrected. Changing this
parameter will require re-analysis of the source footage.

www.magix.com
148 Titles and effects
Analysis area: This area determines the area of the footage that
should be analyzed. The center of the image is preset. If shaking
occurs in one area more than in another, then you can move the
analysis area (e.g. a foreground element at the edge is especially
shaky). To do this, use the mouse to “capture” the shaky area. The
smaller the area, the quicker the analysis will be calculated. Generally,
changing this parameter will require re-analysis of the source footage.

Maximum movement: Correction moves the image accordingly to the

shaking movements. This means that the edge of the image will be
removed. This value determines how large the edge area is which
may be cut away by the stabilization feature; the smaller the value,
the less movement correction. Changes to this value are immediately
applied.

Temporal smoothing: This value determines the speed of the

movements considered shaky. This allows you to differentiate
between a panning shot and a nervous hand-held shot. Changes to
this value are immediately applied.

Cancel: Exits the dialog without accepting changes to settings.

Reset: Resets the current settings.

Create panorama pictures

This function will turn your photos into a sensation. Add new life to
your holiday memories and create great panoramas with only a few
clicks. You don't need to create only "proper" panoramas; let your
imagination run wild and put together anything you want to! You'll see
your photos in a new light and create stunning montages.

Select pictures for panorama

Load all necessary images into the film project as usual. The images
that should make up the panorama should be selected one after the
other while holding down the "Shift" key. Select the entry "Panorama
photo" from the context menu "Effects (view page 271) -> Video
object effects".

Invert image sequence for panorama image

Sometimes photos are accidentally loaded in the wrong sequence or
were created from left to right. If you forgot to sort your photos
correctly beforehand, then simply click "Invert sequence".

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 149
Calculating the panorama image
If you click "Create", the panorama image will be processed.
Depending on the resolution and number of original images included,
this may take some time. The original photos are replaced in your
slideshow with the panorama image you've created, but the original
files on the hard drive will remain intact.

Hint: You can create a panorama image from a maximum of six

images. Click on "More options" for more information on the upgrade.

Finished panorama (2 images)

Finished panorama from 2 images

Borders
The "Frame" directory can be accessed via the button in Media Pool.
There, you will find bitmap patterns for the borders of videos. These
are much like picture-frames that can be modified by video mix
effects. Drag them to the lowest track of the arranger and select the
Bluescreen or Greenscreen effect to make the blue or green space in
the middle transparent for the upper videos. This way you can see the
objects of the upper tracks of the arranger in the field.

You can use the lower handles to adjust the size of the borders to fit
any length of the video. This allows you to add a frame to a video
from start to end. You can also achieve interesting effects by inserting
and discarding borders within a video.

www.magix.com
150 Titles and effects

Title editor
Titles can
be used for
many
application
s: as a
running
text
(ticker),
subtitles,
speech
and
thought
bubbles, to
display
date and
time, and
much
more.

The button in the toolbar opens the title editor.

Enter text, e.g. for subtitles, lead or end credits in the video monitor.
Texts can be displayed in all kinds of fonts and colors.

If you want to format individual words or letters, select them with the
mouse and choose a different format or color. If no selection is made,
the entire text will be formatted.

Creating titles from a template

The Media Pool includes the tab "Title" beside the entry "General",
and this features additional, thematically named title templates.

• Open one of these entries and select any title template. A simple
mouse click provides a preview, and double clicking creates a title
object using the template.

Note: Templates may be applied to an existing title object. Settings

outside of the text will be lost!

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 151
Creating titles without a template
• Try clicking on the entry "General" under "Title" in the Media Pool.
• Next, click in the video monitor on the location where the title should
be positioned.
• Next, simply enter the text via your keyboard.
• After the text has been entered, click the check mark to confirm your
entry.

Edit title
• Click again on the title in the video monitor window or the title object
in "Timeline" mode.
• Now change the text however you like.
• Confirm your entry by clicking the check mark next to the positioning
frame.

Font
Font: Select the font here that should be
displayed for the text.
Font style: Choose here whether all of the text or
parts of it should be shown bold, in italics, or
underlined.
Font size: Set the size of the text here.

Direction: Choose here whether the text should be

justified to the left, centered, or to the right within
the positioning frame.
Color: Press this button to choose the font color.

Effects
Font style: Choose here whether all of the text or
parts of it should be shown bold, in italics, or
underlined.
Outline/shadow/3D: This function allows you to add
shadows, 3D effects, and an outline to the text. These
settings can be adjusted in detail via "Advanced".
The X3D button converts the title object into a Xara 3D
text object. More about Xara 3D text objects is
described in the section "3D text (view page 129)".

Animation

www.magix.com
152 Titles and effects
You can make your credits scroll down the
screen, and many other text movements and
effects and designs are also available.
The display duration for the subject can be set here.

Templates for animated text are arranged in the other Media Pool
categories; the icon and the description are there to help you find the
correct settings.

Title object
Center position: Clicking "Center position" puts
the title back in the middle.

Delete: The whole title object, i.e. text and

settings, will be deleted.

Advanced title editor settings

Options

Only use visible TV area: The text will be zoomed so that it will
always be within the TV's limits, which is specified in the Movie effect
settings (view page 158).

Background

Specify here whether the text's background should appear black or

white. This is only meaningful if no other video or image object is in
the background.

Text effects

Edit different text effects in detail. One color may be set for each
effect.

Shadow: The position of the shadow may be set on the horizontal

and vertical axes.
Transparency makes the background "shine through" more or less.
Soften makes the edge of the shadow harder or softer.

Outline: A border appears around the letters in the text.

A filled outline appears in the color selected, i.e. as a line in the set
width.
If the option is deactivated, then the color of the outline will match the
text color; the color of the outline is selected here.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 153
3D: The text appears with a 3D-style outline. The width and thickness
of the 3D contour (H) can be set in points.

3D-Text (Plus-Version)
3D text can be created directly from the title editor. Click the title
editor and then press the "X3D title" button. The title object will now
be turned into a MAGIX 3D object. If you have also installed MAGIX
3D Maker, the program will open for you to work on the text.

Presets are also located in the Media Pool under "Titles -> 3D". You
can enter or process text here.

For more information about MAGIX 3D Maker, try the help file. You
can open it by pressing "F1" from within the program.

Fade in time code

MAGIX Video Pro X can add a time or date ("timecode") to the picture
material. To add a timecode, right click on the video object and
choose the "Fade in date as title" option from the context menu.

• If you're using a DV-AVI file (a digital recording from a camcorder, for

instance), then the recording date will be used from the selected
section.
• If you're using a different file, the creation date will be used as the
timecode.

The title editor is then opened in order to customize the entry.

www.magix.com
154 Titles and effects

Slideshow Maker
Slideshow Maker is ideal for converting still images into moving
pictures, adding background music, and effects.

Open Slideshow Maker via "File -> Edit -> Wizards".

Style template
Select a template that best matches your needs.

Save/delete style template

Style templates you have created
yourself appear in the list of included
style templates when you use the
default folder provided as a save
location.

If you like, these can be deleted

again.

Intensity
Controls the portion of video and image objects that feature effects.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 155
Transition
The different sliders are used to set the portion of individual fade
types.

3D / Other:

Fade duration: Set the length of the fades in seconds.

Random fades: The fades are set to random values.

Effects
The faders enable the respective effects types to be specified.

Random effects: The faders that control the amount of effects are set
randomly.

Properties & title

Film length
Resulting film length: This is an estimation of how long the film will be
after applying Slideshow Maker.

Available music: This is the complete length of the music that is

currently selected. Background music (view page 156) enables
detailed settings for the pieces of music to be used.

Adjust film length to the music: An attempt is made to adjust the

length of photo objects to the background music. If the film is too
short the music will be cut off. If the film is too long, the music will
repeat.

Adjust music length to the film: Photo objects have a set length, and
the resulting film is filled with music. The music at the end of the
movie is simply faded out.

Including video objects

Process videos: If this option is set, then videos will be automatically
processed with effects and transitions.

Length: Settings may be made here about whether the original length
of the video should be maintained or if it should be shortened.

www.magix.com
156 Titles and effects
Opening and closing credits
Set the text for opening and closing credits here.

Text: Enter the corresponding text for opening and closing credits
that should be added by Slideshow Maker.

File: A title template, a video, or an image file may also be used.

Note: Titles created using Slideshow Maker may also be edited (view
page 149) at any time.

Group associated recordings together

If this option is active, an attempt is made to detect associated
events via their date information and to separate them from each
other optically. Detection of individual events is based on the time
span of these events to achieve a sensible separation.

Begin group with black fade:A black fade is added between the
different events.

Begin group with title and black fade:A black fade is added between
the different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration,
e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple
days.

Begin group with title and picture:A black fade is added between the
different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration after
the black fade, e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place
over multiple days.

Background music
Specify here whether and which music should be used for the
background.

Use background music: Adds background music.

Load file(s): A file selection dialog will open to choose a folder with
pieces of music where you can select one or multiple files.

Remove: The selected pieces are removed from the list and will not
be used.

Preview: Previews the selected piece of music.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 157
Volume: This slider controls the volume ratio between the original
sound and the background music.

Tip: Pieces of music in the first track are listed and used for the
background music, provided they are not removed.

Create movie
After all of the important
settings have been made,
click this button to produce
the film.

If the results do not match what you imagined, then click "Cancel" to
discard the changes. Otherwise, you can change the settings again
or select another style template and click "Create film".

Master effects
All of the settings made here influence the entire movie. Settings are
made separately for each individual movie in the project. You can
open the effects from the the settings via the "Effects" menu.

On the right, you'll see a preview of the current settings. Use the
position slider to jump to different positions in the movie or to various
scenes in order to see how the selected setting affects the image
material.

Brightness/Contrast
Brightness/Contrast: Use the faders to increase or reduce the
brightness and contrast of the image.

Selective brightness (gamma): "Gamma" sets the middle gray value

transmitted from various color areas. In the presets menu you can
determine which color areas should be used. Using the fader you can
also set the intensity of the brightness or darkness.

Color space correction (master effect): This option combats colors

that are too strong and cannot be properly displayed on your TV. The
color saturation of the photos in question are "turned down" to the
maximum level at which they can be properly displayed.

www.magix.com
158 Titles and effects
Color
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue
proportions in the image. A newly developed algorithm is now applied
that carries out color changes in relation to other parameters (e.g.
contrast settings) to achieve the most natural coloring possible. With
just a little bit of experimentation, you can achieve the most
astounding results – anything from turning summer snapshots into
autumnal scenes to funky pop art...

Hue: Use the palette to select a hue for coloring the picture.

Red/Green/Blue: The "Red/Green/Blue" slider corrects the color

proportion mix.

Sharpness
This fader allows you to regulate the level of image sharpness.

The "fine tuning" option allows you to determine the level of focus for
particular surfaces or borders.

TV picture
This option ensures that the image size is adapted to fit the real
television picture (anti-cropping). Without adjustment, the television
might otherwise crop the image borders.

Fade in TV display area in the preview monitor: This option displays

the image borders of the television as lines in the preview monitor.
The four image borders of the TV display area can be set by means of
the 4 input fields. In this case, it is necessary to know the actual size
of the TV picture. To determine it, proceed as follows:

The four image margins can be proportionally adjusted by means of

the four input fields. Here it is important to find the optimal balance
between distortion, reduction, bar formation and image cropping:

• If the same value is entered for every margin, the image size is
reduced proportionally. In this case no distortions will occur, but
there will be bars along the edges.
• If different values are entered for the 4 fields, the image size is
reduced disproportionally. This causes image distortion.

Apply margin to: With this option the entered values for the four
margins are applied as an image reduction. The result can
immediately be viewed on the preview monitor.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 159
Determining the visible TV frame size

To determine the picture properties of your television as well as

optimal image size editor settings, you should perform a test run.

1. Load the Visible TV picture.mvm film from the "My projects >
visible TV picture" folder in Media Pool.
2. Play back the film and read the instructions on the video screen.
3. Copy the slideshow to CD or DVD.
4. Place the disc into your player and play back the film. Compare
the TV picture to the picture displayed on your video screen by
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.
5. Determine the proportional value of the borders cropped by the
television with the 4 measurement scales along the edges of the
test picture.
6. Enter the values in the “Full TV size” editor.

The image size is now optimized to your TV picture. Please note:

Depending on device settings and disc carrier type, the cropping
values may vary slightly.

TV picture
In the context menu or in the Effects > Video object effects you will
find various adjustments for various specifics of the TV picture.

Next to the interlace and anti-flickering filter in the object properties,

you will find the option to adjust the image to the real proportions of
the TV picture. A special algorithm ensures an optimal ratio between
image size and image borders (anti cropping).

Interpolation for interlace source material: Select this option to

remove ridge structures from the (video) image. If, for instance, you
extract freeze frames from a video, these ridge structures appear in
image sections showing movement.

Anti-flicker filter: Select this option for freeze frames with very fine
structures and high contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during
TV playback.

Border cropping - offset: Select this option if the edges are cropped
during playback on your television. Values stored in "Film effect
settings" (view page 158) will be applied.

www.magix.com
160 Titles and effects

Audio Effects
Load audio effects from the Media Pool
In „Effects“ > „Audio effects“ you find several audio effects you can
drag & drop onto the audio object. A preview is played by double
clicking the effect.

Another advantage of this so-called "object-oriented" working method

is that automations are moved automatically with objects when they
are moved, since they are attached to the object and not to the track
itself.

General
Under "Effects ->
Audio effects ->
General", you will find
audio effects that can
be animated using
effects curves (view
page 178). This
means that certain
effect settings can be
changed during
playback.

Effect curves are always object related, i.e. they only apply to one
object and are moved or copied together with the object.

Note: The faders AUX 1 and AUX 2 control the volume at which the
object's signal is sent to the corresponding FX tracks in the mixer.

Audio Cleaning (view page 162), Echo/Reverb (view page 166), and
Timestrech/Resample (see "Timestretch and pitchshift") can also be
accessed here.

Note: Volume and balance curves are also present in the track. The
set values in the curve are also active, respectively.

Audio effects presets

Under "Effects -> Audio effects -> Audio effects presets", you'll find a
broad palette of effects settings which you can add to audio objects

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 161
via drag & drop. A preview can be played back by double clicking the
object corresponding preset.

Synthesizer
Synthesizers in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can be loaded as individual
objects. This is less of an effect than a technical means of producing
your own sound effects. More information is available in
"Synthesizers".

Using audio effects

Track effects

Besides audio effects in the object (audio cleaning, reverb/echo,

timestretch/resample, Surround, etc.), a separate track effects rack
with equalizer, reverb/echo, compressor as well as plug-ins can be
used in each mixer track.

The plug-ins are loaded via the plug-ins slot.

You can open the track audio effects rack with the FX
button.

A light blue track FX button indicates that effects are active in the
track.

Track effects always affect all audio objects of a track, for instance,
they also affect individual record takes of an audio recording.

Master effects

Master effects influence the mixed sum of all audio tracks. For this
purpose a Master Audio Effects Rack and further plug-ins are
provided. The MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page 172) is also
available to help produce perfect sound.

Note: This saves storage space as opposed to applying an effect to

each object individually. Object effects, on the other hand, are only
calculated of the affected object is played back to save computing
power.

www.magix.com
162 Titles and effects
Control Effect devices
The effects are controlled in the conventional way by the use of slider
controls, turning knobs, buttons or using graphic sensor fields.

Sensor fields: Sensor fields can be intuitively used with mouse

movethe sound of the audio and the respective effect settings change
according to the mouse movement. For every effect, two settings are
simultaneously affected within the sensor fields (such as echo delay
and feedback).

Power: Every effects device in the rack can be separately switched

on or off.

Reset: Every effect has a reset button that restores the effect
device's initial default (off). The effect is not calculated into the sound,
and the effect is not rendered.

Preset: Each effects device is equipped with a selection of presets

are selected through the dropdown menu.

Bypass: Some effects are equipped with a bypass button which

bypasses the effects device. The bypass button allows you to directly
compare the neutral, unedited sound of the audio object with the
effects setting you have chosen.

A/B: Similar to the bypass button, the A/B button also compares two
settings with each other. If you have selected a preset for the effect
and make manual changes to it later, you can compare the original
preset sound with the new settings by using the A/B button.

Sound optimization
This option opens an editor for correcting audio material
discrepancies.

Select the cleaning function you desire from the upper part of the
dialog:

• The equalizer (on page 165) allows you to manipulate the frequency
spectrum – perfect for cleaning up muffled dialog.
• The compressor is a dynamic volume control that lends the overall
sound a deeper, richer quality.
• The stereo FX processor ("Stereo FX") justifies the position of the
sound in the stereo panorama.
• DeNoiser, DeClipper, and DeHisser are professional noise reduction
tools that do exactly what their titles say they do.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 163
Presets: You can try out the suitability of a number of presets in the
preset menu.

Temporarily deactivate all effects: Switches all the effects off.

Apply to all scenes: Applies the selected cleaning settings of all

effects to every scene of the movie.

DeClipper
Should the input level of an audio recording be too high, then
overmodulation (digital distortion) may result at the loudest parts (the
signal peaks). This digital distortion can also be called "clipping". At
the overmodulated area, the values that are too high are simply cut
off, and the typical, quite unpleasant sounding crackling distortions
are heard.

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 contains a special function for dealing with
digital clipping and analog distortions.

Using the fader, you can set at what level the DeClipper should
register a signal as being overmodulated and, if required, correct it
(clip level). This is important, since different sound cards show
different clipping methods. The more the fader is turned up, the lower
the level recognized by the program as overmodulated. If the clip level
is set too high, unwanted sound modification may occur.

Get clip level: The clip level is gauged automatically.

DeNoiser
The DeNoiser removes persistent background noise like computer
hum, hissing, noises from sound charts, disturbance from ground
circuits, interference from audio equipment with high-impedance
outputs (such as record players), impact noise, or the turntable
rumble.

The DeNoiser requires a noise sample. Some typical noise sounds are
included in the "Preset" selection menu.

Set the degree to which the noise should be reduced with the fader.
It is often better to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than
as much as is possible in order to keep the sound "natural".

A different option consists of creating a noise sample yourself. All

that's needed is a short section from the audio track in which the

www.magix.com
164 Titles and effects
distortion can be found. To get it, switch to the DeNoiser dialog by
pressing "Advanced".

DeNoiser – Advanced settings

Step 1: Choose a noise sample

First of all, a sample of the distortion you wish to remove must be

selected, i.e. a so-called "noise sample".

You have two options to choose from:

Pick out typical background noise: You can select and use a number
of typical background noises from the flip menu. Select one and listen
to it by pressing the "Play" button. If it is similar to the background
noise in your sound track, go ahead and use it (see "Step 2:
Removing background noise").

Extract a new noise sample from an audio track: You can also pick
out a short passage (from the existing sound track) in which you can
hear the background noise.

Automatic search: Searches especially quiet passages in which

background noise is most noticeable.

Previous / Play / Next: These buttons allow you to play all of the
passages found for easy comparison.

Save as: Once found, you can save noise samples to the hard drive.
They then appear as entries in the "Typical background noises" flip
menu to be used in other projects.

If you only wish to use the noise sample in the current project, you
don't have to save. Instead just go to the "Remove noise" category.

Step 2: Removing background noise

Noise level: The level of the noise reduction function should be set as
precisely as possible. Values that are too low are expressed at a low
distortion dampening level and in artifacts, like noises or "twittering"
(see below). High settings produce dull results – useful signals that
sound similar to hissing noises are also filtered away. Try to find the
best setting for the project at hand.

Reducer: This sets the balance between the original signal and the
signal with the applied noise reduction. It's often better to reduce
interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as is possible, so

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 165
as to keep the sound "natural". In case of buzzing, it’s best to apply
complete removal.

Dehisser
The DeHisser eliminates regular "white" noise typically produced by
analog tape recordings, microphone pre-amplifiers, A/D converters,
or transformers.

Noise reduction can be regulated in decibels with the fader. It is often

better to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much
as possible in order to keep the sound "natural".

Noise level: You can choose between different noise levels. The level
of the noise reduction function should be set as precisely as possible.
Low settings result in incomplete deletion of the hissing. Incomplete
deleting of hissing produces artifacts and should be avoided, since
high settings will produce dull results and some useful signals (i.e.
woodwinds) which are similar to hissing are also filtered away.

Equalizer
The 10-track equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into 10 areas
(tracks) and supplies them with separate volume controls to allow you
to achieve many impressive effects, from the simple rising of the bass
to total sound transformation. If you raise the low frequencies too
much throughout the whole level, it might cause distortions.

Fader: The volume of each of the 10 frequency bands can be set

separately with the 10 volume controls.

Link frequency bands: The frequency fields can be bundled together

flexibly in order to avoid artificial-sounding exaggeration in individual
frequency fields.

Compressor
The compressor is essentially an automated dynamic volume control
tool. Pitch dynamics are limited, loud passages stay loud, and low
passages become louder. Compression is often used to make the
material more powerful, particularly for bass recordings and vocals,
but also as master effects in the mixer for adding to the overall sound.

Ratio: Regulates the compression ratio.

www.magix.com
166 Titles and effects
Function: Defines the compressor's mode of operation depending
upon the sound material.

Stereo FX
The stereo FX processor provides adjustment of the alignment of the
audio material in the stereo balance. If the stereo recordings sound
weak and undifferentiated, an extension of the stereo base width can
often provide better transparency.

Bandwidth control: Adjust the bandwidth between mono (on the

extreme left), unchanged base width (center) and maximum
bandwidth ("wide" on the extreme right).

Reducing the bandwidth can raise the overall level. In extreme cases,
when the left and the right channels include identical material and the
bandwidth control is pushed to the extreme left on "mono", the result
can be a level increase of 3 decibels.

Raising the bandwidth (values of 100) diminishes the mono

compatibility.

Audio effect dialogs

Some of the following effects can be opened individually (via the
context menu), or as part of the track or master effects rack.
However, the functionality remains the same.

Reverb/Delay

The reverb effect device offers newly developed and very realistic
reverb algorithms to add more room depth to your recording.

Reverb
Reverb is probably the most important, but also the most difficult
effect to generate.

Fundamentals
Our everyday experience shows that not every room matches every
instrument. Thus we have designed "virtual" rooms. However, it still

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 167
remains important to find the correct parameters. Here are some
examples of parameters that are decisive for the sound impression in
real and virtual rooms:

• Size of room: The larger the room, the longer the sound travels
between walls or objects. Our brain "calculates" the size from the
time difference. The size impression is mainly determined from so-
called first reflections and the discreet echo. We don’t notice a
(diffused) reverb.
• The reverberation time is mainly influenced by the composition of the
walls, ceilings, and floors. This reverb time is highly frequency-
dependent. For instance, the highs and mids are dampened more in
rooms with curtains, carpets, furniture, and some corners than in an
empty, tiled room.
• The density of the reflection. The sequence of the first reflection is
particularly important. A room with many individually recognizable
echoes feels alive, especially if they are quite far apart.
• The diffusion. Simple reverb machines do not take into account that
reflections become more and more complex as they develop. They
blur the first echoes at the beginning, which sounds artificial and
"two-dimensional" for many signals. Our reverb effect works like a
real room instead where individual echoes can still be heard at the
beginning of the reverb but then reflect amongst each other more
and more until they disappear in the signal sustain as a so-called
"diffused hiss".

The presets include many rooms that were designed for certain
instruments and applications and whose internal parameters have
been optimized for these applications. However, you can influence
most of the characteristics of the room using the provided sliders.

In addition to the rooms we have modeled two device types in the

reverb effect that allow you to create an artificial reverb for a longer
time: Plate Reverb and Spring Reverb.

Plate reverb
A plate reverb consists of a large metal plate (often 0.5 to 1m² thick,
or more) that is put into motion by a magnet and coil system (similar
to a loudspeaker). On the reverb plate, so-called "taps" are positioned
at different locations. These are pick-ups comparable to those on a
guitar. Reverb plates have a very dense sound (high diffusion); no
direct echo can be heard. They are therefore ideal for percussive
metal. A plate reverb generates a smooth "pleasant effect" with
vocals.

www.magix.com
168 Titles and effects
Spring reverb
You probably remember spring reverb from guitar and keyboard
amps, particularly the older ones. At the bottom of these amps, a unit
consisting of two to four spirals is mounted on a vibration-free
carriage. As with the reverb plate, it uses systems for transforming
the electric signal into a mechanical one. There are different designs
and sizes of spring reverb; however, they all have the same quite
peculiar sound: the typical "bloing" sound when the springs are
moved, similar to splashing. When the reverb dies away the basic
pitch of the spring(s) can usually be heard quite clearly. Furthermore,
the frequency range is considerably limited due to the losses in the
spirals and in the used pick-up/transmitter. Despite this, the sound is
special and some of the latest music styles (e.g. dub & reggae) would
hardly be possible without spring reverb.

Parameters
The reverb effect has the following parameters:

Size: Defines the size of the room (or the system for the plate and
spring). With some low "size" settings, you can also reduce the
distance between the individual reflections. This allows resonance to
develop (accentuated frequency ranges), which can sound oppressive
if the reverb sustain is too long. The proper size for each instrument
can be gauged by taking into account the interplay between the room
and the resonance.

Time: Reverberation time. This controller lets you define how far the
echo will be absorbed, i.e. the time for the reverb to die away.
Turning this knob to the left minimizes the time. You will then only
hear the first reflection. Turning the knob to the right minimizes the
absorption, and therefore results in a long sustained reverberation.

Color: Within certain limits, you can influence the sound characteristic
of the effect. The effect of this controller depends on the used preset.
In rooms, "color" controls the dampening of the highs in the reverb
(from dark to bright) as well as pre-filtering of the signal. The
controllers for plate and spring presets also determine the dampening
of the basses.

Mix: This controller sets the mix ratio between the original and the
edited signal. For rooms, you can quite easily move a signal further
into the room by increasing the amount of effect. The last four
presets are intended for use in an AUX channel of the mixer and are
set to 100%.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 169
Presets
The presets are primarily sorted by instruments, but you can (and
should) choose which preset you want to use for which instrument.

Delay
This effect is like an echo which delays the signal and repeats it.

Delay: This sets the period of time between the individual echoes.
The more the control is turned to the left, the faster the echoes will
follow each other.

Feedback: This adjusts the number of echoes. Turn the dial

completely to the left, there is no echo at all; turn it completely to the
right and there are seemingly endless repetitions.

Mix: This fader determines how much of the unprocessed original

sound (dry signal) is subjected to the echo (wet signal). Application of
this effect in an AUX bus requires the controller to be set to 100% (all
the way to the right).

Timestretch and pitchshift

This effect device changes the object’s speed and/or pitch.

Pitch: This control changes the pitch independent of the object’s

speed (‘pitch-shifting’).

Tempo: This control changes the tempo independent of the pitch

("time-stretching"). The object acts as if it were compressed or
stretched on the track.

Tones/BPM: These fields are used to numerically enter the pitch or

speed change. Only MAGIX Soundpool files are suitable for numerical
entries as the contain information on pitch and speed.

Setup: This button opens a setup dialog where you can select various
pitchshifting and timestretching procedures.

www.magix.com
170 Titles and effects
• Standard: Timestretching and pitchshifting in standard quality. This
method is suitable for audio material without a pronounced beat.
Beat markers are evaluated to improve audio quality.
• Smoothed: Timestretching and pitchshifting for audio material
without pulsing elements. The method is suitable for polyphonic
orchestral instruments, pauses, speech, and singing. Beat markers
are not evaluated.
Here a considerably more complex algorithm is used which requires
more processing time. The material can now also be used on very
large factors (0.2...50) without bringing about strong artifacts. The
material is "smoothed", which makes the sound softer and emits it at
an adjusted phase level. This smoothing is hardly audible, for
example, with speech, singing or solo instrumentation. Problems in
the shape of distortions may arise with more complex spectra (sound
mixes from various instruments or finished mixes).
• Beat marker slicing: Beat-synchronous timestretching and
pitchshifting via splitting and temporal repositioning. Exactly set beat
markers are required at the beats or transients. The markers can be
generated in real time (automatically) or read from the WAV file if
available (patched). In the Plus version's included MAGIX Music
Editor, a patching tool is provided for users to set the markers
themselves. The algorithm is suitable for rhythmic material that can
be divided into individual beats or notes. This requires a low audio
level before each beat or note.
• Beat marker stretching: Beat-synchronous timestretching and
pitchshifting in standard quality. The material is stretched between
beat markers positions so that the beats or attacks at the beat
marker positions are not impaired by stretching. The markers can be
generated in real time (automatically) or read from the source file if
available (patched). This method is suitable for rhythmic material that
can not be divided into individual beats or notes because the beats
or notes overlap each other.
• Beat marker stretching (smoothed): Beat-synchronized
timestretching and pitchshifting in high audio quality even with
extreme time extension. Beat markers are used at the beats or
transients. The markers can be generated in real time (automatically)
or read from the WAV file if available (patched). This method is
suitable for rhythmic material that can not be divided into individual
beats or notes because the beats or notes overlap each other. This
method requires a lot of processing time which is why it should be
used sparingly on less powerful systems.

• Universal HQ: Universal methods for timestretching and pitchshifting

in very high audio quality. Suitable for all types of audio material. Beat
markers are evaluated to improve audio quality. This method requires
so much processing time, that a realtime application is

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 171
recommended only in exceptional situations. Using the apply
function is recommended instead.
• Monophonic voice: Timestretching and pitchshifting for vocal solos,
speech, or solo instruments. The material must not contain
background noise, and excessive reverb may also be detrimental to
the use of this method. With suitable material the audio quality is very
high. In addition, the formants remain when pitchshifting.
• Resampling: Pitch shift and tempo cannot be changed individually.
This method requires considerably little CPU time.

Audio effects in the mixer

Equalizer

The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into ten

areas ('bands') and equips them with separate volume controls. This
way it is possible to create many impressive effects, from a simple
boosting of the bass to complete elimination of a certain range of
frequencies. Note: If low frequencies are boosted too much, the
overall sound level is heavily increased which may lead to distortion.
In this event, adjust the overall volume downward by using the
'master volume' control situated at the bottom center of the effect
rack.

Slider control: Each of the ten frequency ranges can be separately

boosted or turned down with the ten volume controls.

Link bands: Using this button randomly combines the frequency

ranges with each other in to avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis of
an individual frequency range.

Touch screen (right EQ section): This is the 'sensor field' of the EQ.
Here you can draw any type of curve with the mouse. This will be
immediately translated into a corresponding control setting on the left
side of the EQ.

www.magix.com
172 Titles and effects
Compressor

The compressor is an automated dynamic volume control. It limits

overall dynamics, maintains the volume of loud passages so they stay
loud, and increases the volume of low passages. A compressor can
be put to good use for bass recordings and vocals, but also as a
master effect in the mixer for subsequent editing of the overall sound.

Processing is carried out using a "look-ahead" method, similar to

high-quality studio appliances. There are no peak overmodulations or
other artifacts, as the algorithm can never be 'surprised' by sudden
level peaks.

Ratio: This parameter controls the amount of compression.

Threshold: Set the volume threshold, below and above which

compression is applied.

Attack: Sets the algorithm's reaction speed to increasing sound

levels. Short attack times can create an undesirable "pumping"
sound, as the volume is quickly reduced or increased
correspondingly.

Release: Sets the algorithm's reaction speed to falling sound levels.

MAGIX Mastering Suite

The MAGIX Mastering Suite is a special effects rack for use with the
mixer master channel. Its effects provide audio mastering functions to
give the finished mixed music file a final polish.

The On/Off switches switch the effects on and off individually. Each
effect has a range of presets that can all be picked from a list along
the lower border of the effect.

The settings of all effects can also be

saved together as one preset so that you
can use your ideal mastering setting again
for other arrangements.
Each effect can be reset by pressing the
"Reset" button. You can press the

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 173
"Bypass" button to temporarily deactivate
the effects.

Note: 5.1 Surround mode only provides the compressor and

parametric equalizer devices in this case.

Parametric Equalizer
The parametric equalizer consists of four filter bands for adjusting the
overall sound of the music track. Each band is a filter with a typical
"bell shape". Within a certain frequency range and around an
adjustable middle frequency, you can increase or reduce the signal
level gain. The width of this frequency range is called bandwidth. The
bandwidth is defined by the Q value. The higher the Q value, the
narrower and steeper the filter curve.

You can influence the basic sound of the mix by increasing and
decreasing the broadband to give it more "depth" (lower center =
200-600 Hz) or more "air" (highs = 10Khz). You can also decrease
the narrow bandwidth (high Q value) in the frequency response, e.g.
to remove disruptive frequencies.

Graphic: The resulting frequency path of

the equalizer is displayed in the graphic.
The frequency is spread out horizontally,
the increase or decrease of the respective
frequency, vertically.

The blue bullets 1-4 symbolize the four wave bands. You can move
them around with the mouse until you find your desired frequency
response.

www.magix.com
174 Titles and effects
Peak meter: The peak meter gives you control over the output level of
the equalizer. The adjacent master gain controller can be used to
balance the level with the EQ.

Edit: The "Edit" button opens the fine tuning for the four
bands:

Parameter selection: With the buttons on the right you can select the
parameter that can be adjusted with four faders of each band.
Furthermore, there are number keys to enter every parameter of the
bands.

Gain dB: These controllers allow you to raise or lower the filter.
Setting the controller to 0 deactivates the filter and doesn’t use CPU
power.

Freq. Hz: The center frequency of the individual filters can be set
between 10 Hz and 24 kHz with the frequency controllers. Freely
choosing the frequency enables multiple filters to be set to the same
frequency in order to have a greater effect.

Q (bandwidth): Set the bandwidth of the individual filters between 10

Hz and 10 kHz.

There is still a peculiarity among bands 1 and 4; The filter curve for
these bands can be changed from a normal "peaking" EQ filter ( )
to "shelving" ( ) (this is the basic setting) and high (band 1) or high-
cut (band 4) . When using the "shelving" filter, a soft increase or
decrease in all frequencies happens above or below the filter
frequency, and the Q parameter does not have a function here. With
a low-cut or high-cut filter, all frequencies below (low-cut) or above
(high-cut) the set frequency are filtered out.

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 175
MultiMax

MultiMax is a compressor with three independent frequency bands.

The dynamics are edited separately for each band.

The benefit of a multi-band compressor in comparison to a "normal"

compressor is that the "pumping" tendency and other disturbing side
effects are dramatically reduced when editing the dynamics. For
instance, it can prevent a bass top peak from "reducing" the entire
signal.

Multi-band technology also lets you specifically edit individual

frequency ranges.

Link bands: When this function is activated and one fader is adjusted,
all faders are changed in the same ratio. The type of dynamic editing
is not influenced.

High quality: When the "high quality" setting is activated, an even

more precise algorithm is used, but this requires more processing
power. We recommend that you switch on this setting before you
export the project.

Setting the frequency band: The settings of the frequency bands are
changed directly in the graphic. Simply click on the separator lines
and move them.

Bass/Mid/High: These knobs control the level of compression for

each frequency band.

Presets

In MultiMax you can use the presets to open further special functions.

Dynamic expander: Compression that is too high will result in audible

noise (usually defined as a pumping sound). Particularly radio
recordings are recorded with very high compression rates to increase
the perceived volume. Unfortunately compression reduces the
dynamics (interval between the quietest and loudest part). The
expander enhances the dynamics of the recording.

www.magix.com
176 Titles and effects
Cassette NR-B decoder: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 simulates
decoding of Dolby B + C noise suppression if no Dolby player is
available. Cassettes recorded with Dolby B or C sound more muffled
and slurry if played back without corresponding Dolby.

Noise gate: This cleaning function suppresses noise entirely below a

certain noise level. This lets you create, for example, song transitions
that are entirely noise-free.

Leveler: This setting automatically sets the entire material to an

identical volume level. The volume control knob is no longer required.
You can use this function to equalize greater volume differences
within a song. To equalize volume variations between different songs
you can also use the function "Normalize loudness" from the "Effects"
menu.

DeEsser: These special presets are for removing overstressed hiss

sounds from speech recordings.

Stereo FX

The Stereo FX enhancer allows you to determine the positioning of

the audio material in the stereo picture. If the stereo recordings sound
out of focus and undifferentiated, an extension of the stereo base
width can often provide better transparency.

Bandwidth control: Adjusts the bandwidth between mono (on the

extreme left), unchanged bandwidth (center), and maximum
bandwidth (”wide”, on the extreme right). Reducing the bandwidth
can produce a rise in the level. In extreme cases, e.g. when the left
and the right channels include identical material and the bandwidth
control is pushed to the extreme left on “mono”, the result can
increase the level by 3 dB.

Raising the bandwidth (values of 100) diminishes the mono

compatibility. This means that recordings edited this way sound
hollow when listened to in mono.

Volume control: Adjusts the volume of every single channel, thereby

adjusting the entire balance. The reduction of left and right levels is

www.magix.com
 Titles and effects 177
displayed under the control buttons. A centered recording can later
be moved to the left or right of the stereo balance.

Stereo meter: This provides a graphic display of the phase relation of

the audio signal. You can use it to review the orientation of the signal
in the stereo balance and the effect of the stereo enhancer.

In order to achieve greatest compatibility with mono, the display

should come closest to a diagonal line. Otherwise some frequency
ranges may erase themselves if the stereo signal is played on a mono
device.

Karaoke presets: These presets open a special karaoke effect that

more or less eliminates vocals. It deletes middle frequencies typical
for human vocals during playback so that someone else can do the
singing.

In typical karaoke songs, the lyrics are usually displayed as subtitles

in the video clip so that the singer can follow along. MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16 also comes with a suitable feature: the title editor, which can
be used to create karaoke subtitles. Please read the "Title editor"
section in the chapter "Images and video objects".

Digital Audio Meter

On the lower border of the MAGIX Mastering Suite there is a digital

audio meter which provides separate control method displays for 10
wave bands on each channel. This device is used for orientation
purposes, e.g. selective equalizer editing.

Limiter
Limiter: MultiMax includes a limiter that
prevents clipping by automatically lowering the
level. Quiet parts remain untouched. Unlike the
Compressor, it does not try to change the
basic sound.

www.magix.com
178 Animate objects
Automatic track damping
This command automatically dampens the volume of other audio
objects to add movie comments. You can also specify whether you
want to dampen the original sound of the video, or all sound tracks.

In the dialog, you can activate and deactivate the dampening value.

You can use this command while recording audio (view page 78)
(audio recording, advanced options).

Animate objects
Different kinds of animations are provided in the Media Pool. The
"Effects" tab under "Video effects" and "Movement effects" provides
you with the effects which can animated using keyframes.

The following objects can be animated:

• Video objects
• Image objects (still images)
• Title objects
• MAGIX 3D Maker objects (3D texts)
• Visual objects

Preparing animations
• First, select the object in the arranger to animate.
• For complex animations, we recommend placing a marker
beforehand for orientation.
• In the Media Pool, open the "Effects" tab and click on the effect you
would like to animate under "Video effects" or "Movement effects".
Note: For audio effects, activate the effect to be animated in the
audio object's context menu.

• If necessary, set up the effect however you would like it for the start
of the animation.
• There is a timeline in the lower section of the Media Pool. You can
see here which animated effects are applied to the selected object.
Keyframes may be placed, selected, moved, and deleted.

www.magix.com
 Animate objects 179
There are two stippled lines in
the timeline to help you
orientate yourself while you edit
movement. These lines will help
you recognize the start or end
of the transition.

Place keyframe
Click the timeline to set the playback marker at the locations where a
keyframe should be added.

Note: You can also use the timeline in the arranger for exact
positioning. If you are using markers for orientation, then this is the
easier choice.

The button places keyframes for all parameters required in the animation.

Additional keyframes can be added simply by placing the playback

marker at the next keyframe location and changing the parameters

The positioned keyframes can also be retroactively moved via drag &
drop.

Copy keyframe
Select the keyframes to be copied by clicking them and then
press the "Copy" button.
Next, set the playback marker at the location for insertion and
the press the "Insert" button.

Display keyframes of individual parameters

Multiple keyframes are added simultaneously to effects if they include
multiple parameters.

Click the small arrow beside the name of the

animated effect to display all of its parameters.

www.magix.com
180 Animate objects
Now all keyframes of the effects parameter
can be individually moved, deleted, activated,
and deactivated.

Note: Only those parameters are listed which are used for the
animation. As soon as another parameter is required for editing the
effect, it becomes visible to you here.

Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes

Previously set keyframes can be retroactively and temporally moved
and their values edited.

Keyframes can be moved via drag & drop. Simply click on the
keyframe and drag it to the desired position.

To change an effect's setting for an already positioned keyframe, click

the keyframe and adjust the effect in the Media Pool.

Soft movement
Normally, a hard, unnatural pan results after points are set.

This option makes sure that the progression of these movements is

executed softer and more naturally. However, you should note that it
can happen that a pan slightly exceeds the frame border.

Delete keyframe
Select the keyframe to be deleted by
clicking it.

This button removes the selected keyframe.

www.magix.com
 Animate objects 181

Editing an effects curve in the object

Activate effects curve: For each animated effects parameter, a
curve is created and placed over the object. Click this button to
display the effects curve on the object.

The curve can either be edited

with the individual curve
points (in "Standard" mouse
mode) or by freely drawing the
effect curve (in "Curve" mouse
mode).

New curve points can be added to the curve in "Standard" mode via
"Ctrl + Shift" and clicking; existing ones can be deleted in the same
way. Every curve point can be moved with the mouse horizontally and
vertically.

Note: The buttons for activating effects curves are first displayed
once the first keyframe has been placed.

Effects curves - Additional functions

The context menu can also be opened via the small arrow beside the
effects indicator.

Delete effects: Removes the selected effect completely.

Delete effects curve: Removes the effects curve to be created again.

Copy effects curve: The effects curve is copied to the clipboard to be

used at other positions.

Insert effects curve: A previously copied effects curve can be

inserted elsewhere with this function at any time. This may be in the
same object or in another object.

www.magix.com
182 Add sound

Note: If you would like to insert the curve into a longer or shorter
object, then think about setting the option "Connect curve length with
object length" correctly before copying.

Connect curve length with object length: If this option is set, then
changes to object length will affect the effects curve accordingly.
In practice, this behavior is only desired very seldom, for example if
objects are stretched or compressed. The option is deactivated by
default for this reason.

Load effects curve: A previously saved effects curve may be loaded

via this menu item. This is useful, for example, if you have added your
own default animations.

Caution! The current effects curve will be overwritten as another one

is loaded.

Save effects curves: Effects curves can be saved as a separate file.

This is useful, for example, if you want to add your own default
animations and simply load them again at other positions again.

Tip: Be aware that during saving the setting "Connect curve length
with object length" is saved as well and applied during loading.

Add sound
In principle, any track in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can be used as a
sound track. There are no specific track types. But it is easier not to
mix object types within one track.

Load and edit audio files

All importable audio files can be accessed from the Media Pool and
previewed (as sound) by a click on the file name. All files can be
dragged into the arranger window.

Tracks from audio CDs can be also placed into the arrangement via
drag & drop.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 183
Edits, fine positioning, volume adjustment, fading in and out, are all
processed using the object tab directly in the arranger.

Various effect curves may be selected for audio tracks, dynamically

controlling selectable effects, volume or stereo panorama. More
information about this can be found in the chapter "Animate objects",
section "Effect curves for the audio track".

Import audio CD
The steps are similar to transferring wave files into an arrangement:

• Insert an audio CD into the CD/DVD drive of the PC.

• Go to your CD/DVD drive in the Media Pool. The individual CD titles
appear in the file list.
• A single mouse click starts the playback of the CD title for
prelistening.
• Drag & drop the CD title into a track in the current arrangement and
the song will be grabbed and copied to the hard drive. The files will
be saved in the "Import" directory ("Program settings -> Folders
(More Informationen can be found in the section "Directory settings"
on page 312)")
• The audio object appears in the track and can be played back or
edited immediately.

A special program is used for digitally importing the audio data from
the CD/DVD drive. Some drives do not support this mode (an error
message will be displayed) or support will only be of low quality (the
audio objects will contain crackling).

If this method does not yield a satisfactory result, you can open the
CD manager via the menu command "File -> Read tracks from audio
CD". This option opens the CD manager where you can select tracks
from audio CDs and import them into the arrangement. You can also
select the drive if you have more than one and adjust the import
settings.

If this is also unsuccessful, you can also play the CDs using the drive
and record them with the sound card. More can be found in the
"Recording audio CDs" (view page 186) section.

www.magix.com
184 Add sound
CD Manager
This option opens the CD Manager where you can select tracks from
audio CDs and import them into the arrangement. You can also
select and configure the CD-R if you have more than one drive.

The CD Manager lets you import audio data using most CD and DVD
drives. You may have to contact your technical support to find out
which drive is suitable. Data is imported digitally. Audio tracks are
imported into the arrangement as WAV files and saved in the Import
directory. (Program settings -> Folders (More Informationen can be
found in the section "Directory settings" on page 312)).

To import audio tracks you should proceed as follows:

• Select the desired CD-R drive if you have installed more than one
drive.
• Click on the "Track list" button.
• Select the desired title from the track list (using the key combination
Shift or Alt and the cursor keys).
• Click on "Copy selected track(s)."
• The audio material is now copied from the CD drive onto hard disk.
The progress is displayed.
• Close the track and drive lists. In your arrangement there are now
one or several new objects that contain audio material of the disc.

Drive list dialog

Tracklist: This button opens the track list dialog for copying one or
multiple tracks.

Configuration: This button opens the configuration dialog where you

can make various special settings, SCSI IDs, etc.

Reset: Restores the default settings of the drive.

Add drive: Creates a new drive entry in the list, which you may wish
to adjust.

Delete drive: Deletes a selected drive from the list.

Save setup: Saves the current drive list and all configuration data in a
*.cfg file.

Load setup: Loads the current drive list and all configuration data
from a *.cfg file.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 185
The tracklist dialog
Copy selected track(s): This button starts audio copy. A new object
is created for every track in the arrangement and the corresponding
track marker is created.

Play: Starts the audio playback of the first selected track on the list
(for testing).

Stop: Stops playback.

Pause: Stops playback so as to start it later from the same position

using the "Resume" button.

Resume: Resumes playback if it had been paused before.

Select all tracks: All audio tracks are selected, for instance, to copy
the entire CD. Track markers can also be made using Shift or Alt
pressed together with the arrow keys. Multiple tracks can be selected
by pressing "Ctrl + mouse click".

Deselect all tracks: All markers are reset.

The CD-ROM configuration dialog

Drive name: Lets you edit the name of the drive in the list. This is
useful if you create more than one entry accessing the same physical
drive.

Host adapter number: Lets you specify the number of your SCSI
adapter - normally "0".

SCSI-ID: Lets you set the ID of your CD-ROM drive. Be sure to set
the correct ID; there is no error checking!

SCSI-LUN: Select the SCSI-LUN parameter, normally "0".

Alias: Lets you select the manufacturer type of your CD-ROM drive.

Normal copy mode: Copies the audio data without any software
correction.

Sector synchronization copy mode: Copies the audio data using a

correction algorithm. This is especially useful, since many CD drives
have problems finding an exact position again and gaps can occur.

www.magix.com
186 Add sound
Burst copy mode: Optimizes the speed of the copy process; no
software corrections made.

Sectors per cycle: Defines the number of audio sectors that should
be read from the audio CD in a read cycle. The higher the number of
sectors, the faster the copying process. Many SCSI systems have
problems with more than 27 sectors.

Sync sectors: Sets the number of audio sectors that will be used for
software correction. A higher number results in a better
synchronization but also in a slower copying process.

Scanning CD tracks with the recording dialog

Some CD-ROM drives do not support this mode (trying digital
extraction results in an error message), or they only support it with
difficulty (results in audio objects with crackling noise, skips, etc.). In
this case, the CD may be "scanned" by recording it into the
computer. When recording the CD to the computer, the CD titles are
simply played back from the CD-ROM drive and are re-recorded as
.WAV by the sound card. Before recording a CD to your computer,
change the program settings in the"File -> Audio/Video options"
menu. To ensure easy recording of the CD titles via the "Recording"
dialog, the audio output on the CD-ROM drive must also be
connected with the sound card input. This connection is usually
already set up on modern multimedia PCs. If not, this is easily done
by installing a cable inside the computer case.

MAGIX Soundtrack Maker

The MAGIX Soundtrack Maker adds atmosphere. Music tracks
corresponding to the specified mood are generated automatically.
Even mood changes are possible.

Open the MAGIX Soundtrack Maker using the Edit > Assistants (view
page 267) menu. The work is split into 3 steps.

Then close the dialog by clicking on "Apply". If you click on "Cancel",

the dialog will be closed and all changes will be discarded.

Select music style

www.magix.com
 Add sound 187
First, choose the musical style you want. The option "Apply only
between start and end marker" lets you limit the length of the
background music you want to create. You can also set the start and
end markers with the left and right mouse button while MAGIX
Soundtrack Maker is open.

Set mood change

You can also select a mood from the list.

Preview: Here you can preview your selected emotion.

Position: With the position slider you can go to a certain position to

set the emotions at a certain position. Instead, you can also move the
start marker with the left mouse button. The preview will be displayed
in the video monitor.

Insert emotion: This button inserts the emotion at the current

position. MAGIX Soundtrack Maker will then suggest a new position
for the next emotion by adjusting the position slider. Of course, you
can also position it elsewhere and insert additional moods.

Delete emotion: Deletes the current emotion.

Generate background music

One click on "Create soundtrack" creates a new soundtrack.

"Progress" shows the current status.

Variations

www.magix.com
188 Add sound
If you don't like the background music created, you can create
variations.

You can do this for the entire background music as well as for
individual emotions:

• If you want to vary the entire background music, simply click on

"Create variations".
• If you only want this to apply to a certain emotion, you should first go
to it with the position slider in the dialog (or the start marker on the
main screen). Then activate the option "Vary only selected emotions".
Now click "Create variations".

Tempo and beat recognition (Plus version)

The Tempo and beat recognition in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 is a

special tool for videoclips. It analyzes the rhythm of a musical piece.
The basis for this analysis is the rhythm speed, measured in BPM
(Beats Per Minute).

www.magix.com
 Add sound 189
After determining the BPM value of the song, the song will be
subdivided into short passages of equal length. The individual objects
having the duration of exactly one bar at first stay grouped, so as not
to accidentally "rearrange" the song. (Of course, if you like you can do
just that! To do so click on "ungroup".

When editing only the resulting object edges are important. Because
all objects can always latch to each other on their edges, videos can
be arranged to transition exactly to the beat of the music: The points
along the track where videos lock together lie exactly on the bars of
the music.

Prerequisites for using the beat recognition assistant

• Songs must be longer than 15 seconds
• Songs must be "rhythmic" (i.e. they can be danced to)
• Songs must be in stereo format

Preparation - Setting the start marker and object end

Before opening the Auto Remix Assistant, you should set the start
marker at the position in the song object in the arranger where you
want detection to start. If the song contains a long intro without
beats, set the start marker after the intro. As a rule of thumb, the
Auto Remix Assistant should always be "fed" dance music.

• The start marker should be set before a quarter note beat or, better
still, briefly before a beat at the start of a bar.
• If the start marker lies before the song object, the object is examined
from the beginning.
• If detection is not performed by the end of the song, the object can
be shortened accordingly with the object handle at the end of the
object.

Automatic Tempo Recognition

When the Auto Remix Assistant is launched, the selected song object
is analyzed and played back. A metronome begins to click according
to the result and lines visualize the positions of the quarter notes
found in the wave-shaped display.

The following cases are differentiated:

• Position of the start of a measure (the one): red line.

• Position of the other quarter notes (the two, three, and four): green
lines.

www.magix.com
190 Add sound
• Reliably recognized positions: thick lines.
• Unreliably recognized positions: thin lines.
• When tapped, blue lines appear.

If the tact and tempo information is already present, points are

indicated above the display at the appropriate positions. The
metronome volume can be regulated below and to the left of the
wave-shaped display. To the right, the BPM value is indicated. If a
valid BPM value was found, it is displayed in green.

If the metronome clicks in time with the music, the measure start is
correct. If not, you can correct the tempo manually.

Setting the manual and and Onbeat/Offbeat

If the result is incorrect, you can help the Auto Remix Assistant with a
few mouse clicks on the correction buttons.

There are two possibilities:

On the one hand, the "Tempo correction" list offers alternative BPM
numbers which could also fit with the music. The adjustable BPM
values are detected automatically – the total BPM can therefore
deviate from song to song.

For more difficult audio material, we recommend using the "Tapping

input" mode. Either the "T" key must be pressed or the "Tap tempo"
button must be clicked with the mouse in time with the music. With
repeated tapping of the tempo correction button, one should keep an
eye on the color in the BPM display. In the "unlocked" condition (red),
the tapping is not in time with the music. One should tap until the
"locked" condition is displayed. After a short time, you will hear if the
result is correct via the metronome.

Subsequently, offbeat correction takes place as required. If the

detected quarter note beats lie around the length of an eighth note
(transferred behind the real positions of the quarter note beats), one
or more alternatives can be selected from the onbeat/offbeat
correction list.

Determining the start of a measure

Next, the starting point of the measure is corrected. The beat at the
start of the measure must always agree with the high tone of the
metronome and/or the red line in the wave-shaped display.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 191
Corrections can be made by tapping; If the start of the measure can
be be heard, tap with the mouse or press the "T" key. Alternatively,
you can also select how many quarter notes the "one" is to be
pushed to back.

If the starting marker was set briefly before the first beat of a
measure, this correction is not necessary.

Note: With all corrections, the metronome and visualization react to

the lines in the wave-shaped display only after a short delay.

Using BPM and beat detection

Now you may select one of the actions to be adapted to the
arrangement song (or vice versa) or cut up the songs at the ends of a
measure.

Save only Tempo & Beat information

Only wave file data is stored. This makes sense if some manual post-
correction is required for determining beat/tempo.

When the data is stored, tempo & beat regulation can be released for
future tempo adjustments or to create object remixes.

Tempo adjustment
Setting the object tempo to the arrangement tempo
This fits the object length to the existing arrangement. Three different
procedures are possible: timestretching, resampling, or audio
quantization.

• Timestretching keeps the pitch of the song constant, but sometimes

the sound quality can suffer.
• Resampling changes the pitch (similar to changing the speed of a
record player), and retains the sound quality of the song as much as
is possible.
• During audio quantization, the audio file takes the tempo
adjustments into consideration as if the first remix object (see below)
were created and combined immediately into a new audio file. If the
recognition is uncertain, extreme tempo fluctuation may result. It is
particularly important to set the starting marker so that the tempo is
recognized definitely. The advantage of audio quantization is that
small tempo fluctuations in the music balance out. The start of the

www.magix.com
192 Add sound
measure always agrees with the start of the arrangement measure
and never plays out of time.

Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo

The arrangement adopts the detected BPM value. If you would like to
use the cut-up song as the basis for a new composition (e.g. for
remixes), then this option should be active.

Creating remix objects

The song is cut by beat into individual objects. Some applications
may include:

• To produce loops from complete songs which can then be used with
other material. Most importantly, not all remix objects are suitable as
loops. Ideally, less complex material should be used, e.g. drums
from an intro.
• To remix songs, thus changing the sequence of the objects, cutting
or doubling beats or to enrich the song with other loops or synth
objects.
• To mix two songs: If percussion and tempo fit perfectly, can you
blend the songs without "side effects"?

This option can be activated later from the "Object" menu, provided
that the tempo data is stored.

The "Audio quantization" option: Audio quantization fits new objects

exactly in time with the arrangement.

With homemade music, tempo fluctuations are common, and

therefore different measure lengths may result. Nevertheless, so that
the objects fit into the rigid timing pattern of the VIPs, the time
processor is activated automatically and object timestretching is used
to correct the different lengths.

Setting resampling for small corrections: If the necessary corrections

are very small, better quality resampling can be used instead of
timestretching. Afterwards, you should not change the master tempo
any longer, since definite pitch changes may arise.

Remix objects in "Loop" mode: New objects are set in "Loop" mode.
When extending the object with the right object mouse handle, the
original length of the object is played again and again.

Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo: (see above)

www.magix.com
 Add sound 193

Note: Time correction assigned to objects can be subsequently

cancelled if the time processor is called up and edited
("Timestretch/Resample object", or double click on the object to open
the FX racks associated with the time processor).

Cancel: The dialog is closed.

Adding a sound track using MIDI songs

A few words about MIDI: MIDI files do not contain the actual sounds
like wave files, only the note control information. This data is
interpreted to effect playback by the synthesizer chip on the sound
card. This has several advantages:

• MIDI files need a lot less memory than wave files, so more MIDI files
will fit on a CD-ROM.
• MIDI files can be adapted to any beat (BPM) without affecting the
sound; only the playback tempo needs to be changed.
• MIDI files are very easy to transpose to another pitch; a section in a
song does not have to be saved in several different keys. The version
in C major is sufficient, and it can then be transposed to any key by
simply clicking with the right mouse button.

The disadvantage of MIDI files: The sound is not true audio. The
audio is only produced when the synthesizer chip on the sound card
plays it back. As a result, high-quality sound cards or external
synthesizers will sound completely different and better than standard
sound cards, depending upon the settings for playback "voices".
Therefore, it is definitely worth using a good sound card or external
MIDI synthesizer with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16!

Arranging MIDI files

Integrating MIDI files in an arrangement:

Search for a directory containing MIDI files using the Media Pool
located at the left edge of the screen. Click on a file, and it will be
played back immediately. Now drag the desired file into the
arrangement to finish the process.

An object will appear which displays the MIDI notes as dots. The high
notes are dots in the upper section, and the lower notes are the dots
further down in the lower section. You can even see the velocity of

www.magix.com
194 Add sound
the notes. The louder the note is played, the brighter it appears on
the screen.

MIDI objects may be arranged, the volume may be modified (middle

handle) or fades (in or out) may be added (top right and left handles)
in the same way as audio, video, or synthesizer objects. The
"element bar" lets you "open" an entire track instantly from a MIDI
loop. If a MIDI file seems to be empty, check the MIDI replay device
in the "Playback parameters" window ("P" key or menu "File ->
Settings -> Playback parameters"). Your sound card driver or your
MIDI interface must be set correctly to hear MIDI!

MIDI interface and external sound generator

Of course, MIDI objects can also be played back over a MIDI interface
into external synthesizers, sound modules, etc. Start by setting FX to
1.0. The timing between MIDI and audio can be balanced later if you
notice a delay between the two. This is important for very slow
arrangements, since the sample rate on the sound card is not
entirely. The MIDI drivers can be set in the "Playback parameters"
window ("P" key or menu "File -> Settings -> Playback parameters").

Convert MIDI files to audio files

Before exporting (as a video, for example) an arrangement, all MIDI
objects must be converted into audio objects first, since these
contain only pure control information for the sound reproduction
before they are exported.

First, connect the MIDI synthesizer (usually the sound card) output to
the sound card input. Now the MIDI file can be played back and
simultaneously recorded as an audio file using the record function.
The result is an audio file that can be processed and exported
together with other multimedia files.

Synthesizer
Creating synth objects
The software synthesizer is to be found in a special file that is
configured onto the hard disk during installation. To open it, press the
Synth-Button in the MediaPool File manager.

The symbols for all the available synthesizer Plug-Ins are now
displayed in the file list.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 195
Any plug-in can be pulled into the arrangement by means of drag &
drop. A synth object appears on the relevant track and the operating
console of the plug-in is opened. Synth objects are programmed with
the help of the operating console.

Programming the synth object

Depending on the plug-in, various functions to create and control
sound can be applied via the operating console.

To monitor programming, playback can be started and stopped at

any time with the space bar while the operating console is open.

Arranging the synth object

Once you have finished programming the melodies or rhythms of the
synth object, you can close the operating console and arrange the
synth objects on the tracks. They can be stretched or compressed,
faded in and out, turned down or up, etc. with the help of handles:
These steps are the same for all objects.

The operating console of every synth object can be reopened at a

later stage by double clicking or via the synth button if you would like
to reprogram the object. In addition, you can drag as many other
synth objects of the same software synthesizer as you like onto the
tracks and program them separately.

Effects and mix down of synth objects

Just like audio objects, synth objects can be edited with any available
master effect. Please read the chapter on "Audio effects" for more
information.

In the real-time mixer, it is possible to exactly adjust the level of every

synth track.

The mix down function mixes all tracks, including the synth objects,
into one file so that tracks and computing power for new objects are
released.

www.magix.com
196 Add sound
Atmos
Atmos is a synthesizer which can be used to easily create realistic
nature sounds in no time. From thunder and lightning to animal
sounds and traffic noise, Atmos helps you design natural-sounding
atmospheric noises for your projects.

• In the upper border window, select the top category "Scenario". You
can select a desired nature sounds category (for example, "Thunder
and Lightning").
• In the middle of the window, a collection of control elements appears
for designing the desired "Ambience". Each element has its own
description (e.g. "Thunder") and two faders, i.e. "Volume" and
"Intensity". The "volume" control adjusts the loudness portion of the
element. The "Intensity" fader controls the behavior of the sound,
depending on controller element. For example, with "Thunder", you
can set how often thunder and lightning should sound; with "Rain",
the strength of the rain can be regulated (if moved to the far left, light
rain can be heard, while if moved to the far right, a downpour with
loud splashing noises is audible).
• At the bottom right border you will find a master volume fader with
which the master volume of the synthesizer can be set. Furthermore,
the "Randomize" setting is also located here. This way you can
change the settings of the control elements by yourself.

Drum & Bass machine 2.0

The Drum & Bass machine is a dual synthesizer, uniting both distinct
styles of drum’n’bass in one piece of equipment to produce fast beat
crashes and rumbling bass lines. With the Drum & Bass machine you
need no special skills to create authentic sounds for your
drum’n’bass songs.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 197

A tip: The typical speed for Drum’n’Bass is usually around 160-180

BPM. The Drum & Bass machine also fits in perfectly with other music
styles, e.g. bigbeat (120 BPM) or trip hop (80-90 BPM).

Setup

The top half of the synthesizer controls the rhythm section, the
bottom half controls the bass section. Between the two, on the left
side you will see a symbol where both sections can be turned on and
off individually. You can turn off the bass section, for example, so that
you take only the drum section break beat into the arrangement. The
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 arrangement mix will then only include the
drum section in the mix file.

The volume control is on the right border, controlling the volume for
both sections. The play and stop buttons allow you to listen to your
drum’n’bass creations up front in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

The "Drum‘n’Bass" label covers a menu containing functions to load

and save drum’n’bass patterns (Load machine state/Save machine
state), and functions to delete or generate patterns (Clear all/Random
all). The submenu "Velocity presets" contains some help functions for
programming of the velocity row.

The rhythm section (top half)

You can easily create complex and authentic jungle break beat
sounds. In a professional recording studio, jungle break beats are
created by dividing any given drum loop into several small "bits" and
putting them back together in a different order. This lengthy process

www.magix.com
198 Add sound
is significantly simplified by the Drum & Bass machine. You just have
to design your own new play sequence.

You set up the new sequence in the top ("steps") row. The blue cells
indicate the individual sections ("notes") for the subdivision of the
loop.

A left mouse click on one of the blue cells allows you to select one of
six possible symbols. Each symbol represents a different note or
other way of playing the note. Every time you click on one of the blue
cells, the next symbol is chosen.

Rely on your own intuition and creativity when programming your

beats. It is not absolutely necessary to know the exact meaning of
each individual symbol in order to create cool and authentic beats.

Summary symbol description:

1: Play drum loop from beginning

2: Play drum loop from the second note

3: Play drum loop from the third note

4: Play drum loop from the fourth note

Backward symbol: Play backwards from this point

Stop symbol: Stops play

The right mouse button allows you to delete the step cells individually.
The "Clear" button on the right deletes all step cells; the drum loop is
played in its original sequence. The "Random rhythm" button
generates a random sequence. You can then alter the rhythm as you
wish.

By clicking on the blue field in the bottom part of the rhythm section
you open a pop-up menu where you can select the drum loop sound.
If you select a different drum loop, it will be loaded and played as
programmed by you.

In the "Flame" row you can set the note to be played twice quickly in
succession instead of only once, allowing you to program rolls and
fill-ins.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 199
The "Velocity" row allows you to set intensity values between 0 and
16 with the mouse (left mouse click increases value, right mouse click
decreases value). Use the three buttons under the "Velocity" row to
determine how these values will affect the sound of your loop. If you
select "Volume", the velocity value alters the volume for this cell (16 =
loud, 0 = quiet). If you select "Filter", the velocity value alters the filter
strength for this cell (16 = sharp, 0 = muffled). The "None" button
blocks use of the velocity values.

The bass section (bottom half)

The bass section allows you to create the right bass lines for your
rhythm quickly. As in the rhythm row, there are two-step rows.

• With the first "Notes" row, you determine the sequence of the notes,
i.e. the sound sequence.
• By clicking on a cell with the left mouse button, you open a pop-up
window, where you can select the notes.
• By clicking with the right mouse button, you delete a cell.
• If you click on an empty cell with the right mouse button, you will see
a "Stop" symbol. This function is similar to that in the rhythm section,
i.e. it stops the bass sound at this point.
• In the "Octave" row you can determine the bass octave sound.
Octave 1 creates a deep tone, Octave 3 a high tone. You can only
set the octave values if there is a note in the row above.
• As in the rhythm section, there are also buttons for "Clear", "Random
notes", and a red selection field at the top border of the bass
section. The red selection field allows you to set the bass sound.
• Underneath the step rows, you will also find two sliding controls for
sound adjustment. You can use the "Vibrato" control to make the
bass tone "swing" at its pitch. If the control is pushed all the way to
the right, the swing will be stronger; all the way to the left will have no
effect on the pitch.
• With the "Delay" controller you can set a time for the sound to
completely fade out. All the way to the right makes the sound fade
out quickly (after approx. ¼ second); all the way to the left means
ongoing sound.

www.magix.com
200 Add sound

Mixer

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 includes a real-time mixer with a master

effects section that professionally mixes all the tracks within an
arrangement. The mixer can be opened by pressing the "M" key or
accessed via the toolbar in the main window ("View -> Mixer").

Mixer tracks
Each track has its own volume or brightness fader. This fader also
affects added MIDI objects.

The stereo position for each audio track is defined with

the Pan controls.

The "Solo" button switches a track to solo mode, i.e. all other tracks
are muted. The "Mute" button mutes a track.

Double clicking any of the controls resets them to their default

passive setting (no boost or cut in level), and no processor output will
be required.

Track effects

Besides audio effects in the object (audio cleaning, reverb/echo,

timestretch/resample, Surround, etc.), a separate track effects rack

www.magix.com
 Add sound 201
with equalizer, reverb/echo, compressor as well as plug-ins can be
used in each mixer track.

The plug-ins are loaded via the plug-ins slot.

You can open the track audio effects rack with the FX
button.

A light blue track FX button indicates that effects are active in the
track. Please read the chapter "Audio Effects (view page 160)" for
functionality and handling of the individual audio effects.

DirectX audio plug-ins

The MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supports DirectX audio plug-Ins. These
are usually effects modules such as reverb, equalizer, etc.

The DirectX system must be installed on your PC prior to using the

DirectX plug-Ins – a manual installation is only required on rare
occasions. Generally, DirectX is already available through the
Windows installation. If your PC does not have the DirectX System
installed or if it is out of date, you can find a DirectX installer on the
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 disc. Of course, DirectX plug-ins have to be
installed first, depending on the plug-in used.

Two so-called "slots" for track effects are located in

the channel strip of the mixer for the corresponding
track, plus in the FX tracks.

Clicking on the small triangle will let you select an effect from the list.
Select "No effect" to remove a plug-in from the slot. A left click
temporarily disables the plug-in. Active plug-ins are displayed in light
blue. Right clicking on the slot opens the settings dialog of the plug-
in.

FX tracks (effect tracks)

Two FX send controllers (FX1 and FX2) are located
below the plug-in slots.

You can determine the volume at which you want the signal to be
routed to the two available FX tracks.

www.magix.com
202 Add sound
An FX track is a complete, additional mixer track which provides a
complete track FX rack and two plug-in slots for use as a send effect.

A send effect differs from

a normal effect found in
the track (insert) insofar
as it can edit the signals
from multiple tracks or
objects simultaneously.
A send effect roughly
corresponds to the
scheme of a parallel
switch, while an insert on
a track is like a series
switch.
A special feature offered
by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 is that audio objects
can also send directly to
the FX track.

The FX are usually hidden in the mixer. They will be displayed as soon
as one of the FX send controllers is used.

In the first FX track, the reverb function is activated as standard, since

it is the most important application of the send effects.

The volume controllers regulate the volume of the FX track and

correspond with the old AUX return controller. "Mute" is used to
switch the FX portion on and off. "Solo" enables you to single out FX
individual tracks. The track's peak meters which send to the FX track
are displayed in grey.

Master track (Plus version)

The FX button and the plug-in slots function exactly like in the tracks.
The FX button will open the master audio effects rack. The complete
mixer settings including the FX tracks can be reset with the "Reset"
button.

MAGIX Mastering Suite: Opens the MAGIX Mastering Suite (view

page 172).

5.1 Surround: This button switches the mixer to "Surround (view page
208)" mode.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 203
Both faders control the total volume.

Link button: If you deactivate the link button, you

can control the volume of the right and left
channels individually.

Volume and panorama automation

You can automate the volume and panorama curves on a mixer track.
This means you can record this movement of the track volume faders
and panorama controls while playing the movie. This way, for
instance, you can simulate the movement of a sound source and
volume adjustment from left to right instantly during playback.

As long as the "Auto" button in a track is active, all

movements of the volume and panorama controller are
recorded.

The automation is displayed as a curve in the arranger and can be

edited later with the mouse.

Unlike the automation curve of the mixer, the dynamic effects are
track-dependent, i.e. regardless of the objects contained in the track.

Audio effects
For more information about this, see the section entitled "Audio
effects" in the chapter "Effects and titles” (view page 160).

www.magix.com
204 Add sound

5.1 Surround
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supports playback and export in real 5.1
Surround.

Requirements
You will require a sound card or a sound chip which is integrated into
the computer's motherboard with six individual outputs to playback
the individual channels:

• front left (L) / right (R)

• centre (C) / subwoofer (LFE)
• back left (Ls) / right (Rs)

Surround playback is possible with all audio driver models (see

Playback settings (view page 309)), (Wave, DirectSound, ASIO).

DirectSound is supported by most of the standard sound cards.

Wave drivers are similarly supported by many standard sound cards;

however, individual sound cards (for example, Soundblaster) require
access to DirectSound.

Note: 24-bit Surround playback is often not possible, therefore

please select 16-bit output.

For Surround output with ASIO drivers, you will require a 6-channel-
capable ASIO driver (e.g. MAGIX Low Latency). Older multi-channel
audio cards that activate their stereo output couples via multiple
separate drivers are not suitable.

Output of the six output signals is achieved in all driver models in the
output channels in the same (standardized) order:

Channels 1/2: L-R

Channels 3/4: C-LFE
Channels 5/6: Ls-Rs

When using WAV or ASIO drivers, the loudspeaker settings normally

have to be changed to 5.1 playback in the control panel.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 205
In order to do this you have to start the Control Panel for "Sounds
and audio devices" and select "Loudspeaker settings", "Advanced",
"5.1 Surround loudspeakers".

On most systems the program does this automatically while using

DirectSound.

Importing and exporting surround audio files

Import
When importing MPEG2 files with Dolby Digital sound (for example,
VOB files from DVDs or DVB-TV recordings) you can choose from two
different application cases:

• Mixdown: The surround sound is displayed as an audio object under

the video object, playback of the surround track is reduced and
recalculated to stereo playback. Use this option if you don't wish to
edit the surround sound, but rather wish to export it. You can also
use it if you think that a stereo export is enough to meet your
requirements.
For the import of surround sound as a mixdown the free activation of
the Dolby Digital stereo codec is required.

• Surround mix: The individual surround channel pairs (L-R, C LFE,

Ls-Rs) are split into three audio tracks as separate objects and the
mixer is then set to Surround Mode (only in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
Plus, optional fee-based activation of the Dolby Digital surround
codec would be required). In this mode you can adjust the surround
mix.

In MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 the import of Dolby Digital surround is

always executed as a mixdown.

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus can also import interleaved wave files
(multi-channel wave files), multi-channel Windows Media Audio and
MP3surround files. A surround mix is always created.

Note: The surround channels of AVCHD video streams are not

importet, in this case only a stereo signal is used.

www.magix.com
206 Add sound
Export
Surround mix exports can occur in any one of the following formats:

• 6-channel PCM files (interleaved wave)

• Windows Media files (as a Surround soundtrack of a Windows Media
Video or WMV-HD disc)
• MPEG-2 files with Dolby Digital sound track (requires activation of
the Dolby Digital codec (view page 343))

The files created are fully compatible with the normal file formats, this
means that they can also be played on computers incapable of
playing Surround (in normal stereo).

The export is performed via the same menu commands (e.g. "File ->
Export movie -> Audio as wave") like the normal stereo export. You
will then be asked if the export should be in stereo or Surround
format.

Export Dolby Digital Surround via Smart Encoding

You can also burn material to be exported with surround sound again
without the need for the Dolby Digital codec (in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 or MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus without Dolby Digital encoder
activation) to DVD or export the corresponding MPEG files while
keeping 5.1 Surround Sound. To do so, use the "Smart Rendering"
option which transfers the unprocessed parts of the output material
without renewed encoding. Read more on this in the MPEG Encoder
Settings annexe, General Settings (view page 375) section.

The import has to be executed as a mixdown, the audio material

cannot be changed (no fades, no audio cleaning, no volume
adjustment). Harder steps, for example, for removing commercials are
allowed, they may not happen precisely according to the frame, but
at the GOP (group of pictures) borders.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 207
The mixer in Surround mode

To activate Surround playback, open the mixer (M key) and click on

"5.1 Surround" button in the master.

In the master, six peak meters for the individual channels are
provided. The normal panorama button turns into a representative
display of the Surround editor (see below), which can be opened by
clicking on the display.

The Surround sound editor is also available to the effects tracks. For
example, you can send the original track to the front L/R speakers,
the FX track however will remain at the rear L/R speakers.

The master volume is applied to all channels, here the left controller
influences channels L and Ls, the right controller; channels R and Rs
and the middle value of both controller; the channels C and LFE.

The master plug-ins are only applied to the front channels.

The full effects palette of the mastering effects rack in MAGIX

Mastering Suite is not available in 5.1 Surround mode, but rather only
the compressor and the parametric equalizer (from the Mastering
Suite) are provided. The settings of these effects have the same effect
on all six channels.

www.magix.com
208 Add sound
5.1 Surround Editor

The selected mixer track's 5.1 Surround editor allows you to arrange
the audio signal of a track (displayed as two red sound sources) in
stereo space. The signal is dispersed to the 5 (blue) loudspeakers
which represent the individual Surround channels.

There are 6 channels:

L: front left
R: front right
C: center
Ls: back left/left Surround
Rs: back right / right Surround
LFE subbass (Low Frequency Effect) channel

Dispersing the signal to the 5 loudspeakers occurs after the sound

source emits a sound field of a certain level (displayed as red circles).
The further away a loudspeaker's source is, the lesser its share of the
corresponding loudspeaker channel. The position of the loudspeaker
can be moved with the mouse.

The subbass share (LFE) is set directly from the corresponding value
table. It can also be changed by dragging the mouse.

There are various modes in which you can use the source signal:

www.magix.com
 Add sound 209
• Mono: The (stereo) source signal is seen as mono material, the left
and right channels are mixed together and arranged together. The
original stereo information is lost here.
• Stereo 1: Similar to mono mode insofar as the left and right channels
are moved together, but only a portion of the left source is audible in
the loudspeakers L and Ls and only a portion of the right source in
the right channels R and Rs. The stereo information remains as
intact as possible.
• Stereo 2: The left and right channels can be moved individually. The
distance between the left and right source is retained when you
move the left source. You can move an individual source by holding
down the "Alt" key.
• Center/LFE: Only the left channel is arranged. In return, the LFE
share is drawn solely from the right channel. This mode is only
important for importing Surround material.

"Width" determines the level of the sound field of an individual

source.

Automation:

Panning of the sound source on the loudspeaker can be automated

to simulate movements in the room.

For this to happen "Automation" must be activated. There are two

methods to create automations: record and draw.

To record (when automation is on), the sound source is moved

between the loudspeakers during playback. When recording the
automation, the "Record" check box lights up red.

The draw function is an alternative to drawing out complex

movements. When drawing in active mode, all panning movements
are transmitted to the time interval between the start and end marker
(when the mouse button is held). You can thus draw the entire
movement curve for the selected time range.

"Reset" deletes surround automation from the track.

There is no automation of the parameters for width and LFE, of the

distance between the left and right source in "Stereo 2" mode, or of
the loudspeaker positions.

www.magix.com
210 Add sound

Scrubbing
Scrubbing originates from a time when tape machines still dominated.
The function is suitable for quickly previewing individual passages of a
film or piece of music.

This was technically implemented in these devices by keeping the

tape head on the tape itself, but the motor doesn't drive the tape rolls
in this case. Instead the tape is "manually" set to the desired position.
In this way, positions where a cut should be made, for example, can
be set fairly precisely. The disadvantage of this method is that the
pitch chnages proportionate to the playback speed - like when a
record is played too quickly or too slowly.

Scrubbing in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 certainly behaves a little

differently than its analog predecessor; instead, it plays short samples
of the material at the original speed.

Note: In order to preview individual audio objects, use the "Preview

(view page 47)" mouse mode.

Scrubbing: Activate
Scrubbing can be activated via the
menu beside the speaker button on
the upper edge of the arrangement
window.

Scrubbing: Modes
No scrubbing: Scrubbing is inactive. If the playback marker is set or
moved, then sound will not be played.

Scrubbing (1 frame): Scrubbing is active and samples are only 1

(video) frame in length. The speed is 25 fps, i.e. 1/25 second. This
mode is suitable for positioning the playback marker exactly.

Scrubbing (long): Scrubbing ist active, the sample length amounts to

approx. 0.5 seconds. In this mode, locating specific events is
particularly easy.

Play 1x during scrubbing: if this option is active, the current position

will be played one time. If it is inactive, then it will be repeated.

www.magix.com
 Add sound 211
Scrubbing: Apply
If a scrub mode is selected, then you can simply set the playback
marker with the mouse at a location on the timeline. Hold down the
mouse button and move the playback marker to different locations in
the arrangement.

Scrubbing also functions via the keyboard. Using the jog and shuttle
wheels in the video monitor also enables scrubbing, even for different
hardware controllers, which makes the program feel just like an analg
video editing system!

Mix down of audio objects

If the arranger becomes too full to manage, the system is out of RAM,
or you just want to "summarize" your production, use the mix down
function to convert the entire audio arrangement into a single audio
file. Just click on the mix down button in the button bar or select the
function from the "Processing" menu.

You can choose a name and a destination for storing the mix down
object. The default directory is "My audio/video".

Storage of the audio arrangement will take up a little more space on

your hard-drive, but it requires less RAM for playback than an
unmixed entire arrangement.

Note: The mix down effect optimizes the volume automatically. Even if
the mix down function is used various times, you will not lose audio
quality.

www.magix.com
212 Managing video projects

Managing video projects

Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard
drive crash or some other error.

Copy movie/project and media to folder

This menu option allows you to put a complete MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 arrangement, including all applied multimedia files, into one folder.
This is especially useful if you want to reuse or archive such an
arrangement later on, or if the files are located on multiple storage
devices (CDs, DVDs, etc) so that you continually have to change them
during loading. Effects files used are also saved in a folder together
with the other files.

If you select the option, "Copy disc project, movies, and media into
folder", all movies in the current disc project, including all of the
related media, are put together and copied into the chosen folder.

Hint: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 also features DV logging. You no

longer need to save large DV-AVI and audio files, since MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16 saves the position of this material on the DV tape and
imports missing files automatically when reloading the DV tape.

A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the
video.

Shortcuts:

Copy movie and media into folder Shift + R

Copy project and media into folder... Ctrl + Q

Burn project/film and media onto CD/DVD

Use this option to burn the film as well as all associated files to disc.
To do so, you must have a burner installed on your computer and a
blank CD must be inserted.

If you choose the option "Burn project and media", the current project
and all of the associated media files are grouped together and burned
onto disc.

www.magix.com
 Managing video projects 213
Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if
necessary, will be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs.
A restore program which is burned to the first disc of this type of
backup guarantees that the backup can be restored without any
problems.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + R

Restore disc project from (S)VCD/video DVD

With this menu command, you can restore a project backup that has
been saved to a CD/DVD. The disc has to be burned with the option
"Add project backup" (see "Burn disc dialog options" ("Options")).
You can select which movies on the disc should be restored by
selecting them in the list. You will also enter the folder where the
project should be saved. As subfolder "Backupxx" will be created for
every restored project and all of the project files from the disc will be
saved there. All restored movies will be loaded into MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16 for editing.
If you select the option "Restore image files only", only the original
image files contained on the disc are restored.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + R

www.magix.com
214 Managing video projects

Load backup project...

This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This
type of automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore).
This command is only intended for use in emergencies, for example, if
you unintentionally saved your change and wish to return to the
previous version of the movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + O

Tip: Under "File -> Settings -> Program...", you can determine how
often an automatic backup will be created in the "System" tab under
"Automatic backup".

Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps you delete projects from your hard drive,
including all media files. Use this function to free up disk space for
future projects.

Caution: If the files you used in the slideshow have also been used in
other slideshows (like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should
make backup copies of these files beforehand.

Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + G

Delete specific files

Choose this option if you would like to select certain files for deletion.
In the file selection dialog, you can select the desired files. In the next
step, the clean-up wizard searches for other files which belong to
your selection. Using this method, you can delete an entire movie
with all of its accompanying media, help, project, and backup files.
Before they are deleted, you will receive relevant information in a
dialog and a confirmation request.

Search and delete superfluous files

Choose this option if you would like to find unnecessary files or free
up some space on your hard drive. The clean-up wizard automatically
looks for extraneous files created during use of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 215
16. Before they are deleted, you receive relevant information in a
dialog and a confirmation request.

Advanced
"Advanced" lets you set which files and folders should be included in
the cleaning process.

Options for using the final movie

Create playable disc

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 allows discs to be burned for playback on
conventional playback devices (e.g. DVD players, Blu-ray players). For
more information, please see "Burning discs (view page 233)".

Export movie
You can export your movie in various video formats. The options
available vary according to the selected format.

Presets: These are the typical settings for the selected format and the
most important applications.

You can save your personal settings by pressing

the "Save" button, or remove them from the list by
pressing the "Delete" button.

Export settings: You can set up the general export parameters like
resolution, page proportions and frame rate in the dialogs. Select the
most frequently used values from the list fields; to set your own
values click on the "..." button. The "Advanced" button opens the
specific settings for the selected video format. "File" allows you to
export your file to a different folder than the one specified as the
preset (More Informationen can be found in the section "Directory
settings" on page 312). With "Overwrite file automatically", you can
perform multiple exports from the same file.

Other: Under "Other" you also have the option of switching off your
computer automatically after long encoding processes and limiting
the export to the selected area (start to end marker).

www.magix.com
216 Options for using the final movie
Output after export: Some formats allow special playback options
(e.g. DV-AVI on the camera or WMV export with output via Bluetooth
to your mobile phone).

Video as AVI
When exporting to AVI video you can set and configure the size and
frame rate of the AVI video and the compression codec for audio
(audio compression) and video. Please also observe the general
information on AVI video formats (view page 347).

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + A

Video as DV-AVI
This option exports the video as a DV encoded AVI. You will be asked
for which video standard you want to export DV data. PAL (Europe) or
NTSC (USA)? The arrangement can be easily transferred to the
Digicam via the FireWire interface.
The window will provide further information on all available options.
You can access it via the button "Advanced..." in the "Export" dialog.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + B

Video as MPEG video

MPEG stands for "Motion Picture Experts Group" and is a high-
performance compression format for audio and video files.

Details on the settings of the MPEG encoder can be found in the

"MPEG encoder settings" appendix.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + C

MAGIX video export

Exports the movie in MAGIX video format. This format is used for
video recording by MAGIX video software and is optimized for digitally
edited high-quality video material.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + D

Video as Quicktime Movie

Exports the movie in QuickTime movie format. This enables streaming
playback of audio and video files over the Internet.

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 217
As with RealMedia export, appropriate adjustments can also be made
for video site, frame rate, and codec settings. However, the export
dialog does not permit you to add commentary to the video.

For QuickTime files (*.mov) you have to install the QuickTime library.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + E

Uncompressed movie
When exporting an uncompressed AVI video file, you can adjust the
size and frame rate of the AVI video you wish to create.

Warning: This will create very large files!

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + U

Video as MotionJPEG AVI

Opens the export dialog for AVI video in Motion JPEG format. This
format is supported by digital picture frames, for example.

Movie as sequence of individual pictures

This option exports the video as a sequence of single frames in
bitmap format. This means that for every video frame, a graphic file
will be created. The image count can be determined in the export
dialog under "Frame rate".

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + V

Windows Media Export

Exports the arrangement in Windows Media format. This is a universal
audio/video format from Microsoft. The setting options in the
Advanced dialog are correspondingly complex.

Manual configuration

Audio/Video codec: Various codecs corresponding to the many

versions of Windows Media (7, 8, 9) are possible. If playback
compatibility problems arise, try an older codec with a lower version
number.

www.magix.com
218 Options for using the final movie
Bit rate mode: Constant and variable bit rate modes are possible;
however, most devices and streaming applications require a constant
bit rate. For VBR two-pass modes, the movie is compressed in two
passes for optimal use of the bandwidth required for highly-
compressed movies on the Internet.

Bit rate/quality/audio format: The bit rate substantially determines

the display and audio quality. The higher this is, the better your videos
will look and the larger the files and the required encoding time will
be. For variable bit rates, the bit rate is adapted dynamically to the
requirements of the corresponding picture or sound material. Here,
either the quality value of between 1-100 can be set or, for two-pass
encoding, an average or maximum bit rate. For audio, the bit rate is
set additionally by the audio format.

Import from system profile (export type): For the most used methods
(other than for playback on mobile devices; for this you should use
the supplied presets), e.g. Internet streaming, Microsoft provides a
diverse selection of system profiles. If you have the Windows Media
Encoder 9 installed (available from Microsoft as a free download),
then you can edit the profiles or create your own. These can be
loaded by pressing the "Import from profile file" button.

Go to Clip info to insert title, author name, copyright details, and a

description.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + F

Video as RealMedia video

Exports the movie in RealMedia movie format.

RealMedia enables streaming playback of video files via the Internet.

This has a very high compression rate, but the quality is noticeably
reduced. After choosing a name for your file, you can specify the bit
rate of the transmission speed (modem, ISDN, etc.) at which the
audio file should still be playable without any errors.

There are many options for embedding meta information for this
format.

The advanced video options allow you to select the number of frames
per second ("fps"), the lower the value, the less data is transferred
and the lower the picture quality.

The following settings can be accessed via the "Advanced..." button.

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 219
Audio/Video settings: Here you can select presets for the quality of
audio or video material.

Clip information: You can enter the author, video's name, and so on,
which appear in the Real player during playback.

Clip meta information: You can enter keywords for search engines
here. When the RealVideo clip is uploaded to a homepage, search
engines will find it using these keywords. This search engine indexing
can also be switched off.

Preprocessing: Of special interest here is the "Two-pass encoding"

field, since this can be used to enhance the quality of the video. The
video is compressed into two runs in order to optimize the
bandwidth. You can also select various filters.

Video size: Select between video sizes of 160 x 120 and 720 x 576
pixels.

Profile: You can select at which bandwidth the video should be

created, i.e. over which data connection it will be played in real time
("streamed"). The settings selected here may limit other selection
options, since files for 28k modems cannot be created to be played
at high quality.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + G

Exporting as Flash
Export of FLV files has been replaced by the more powerful H 264
export. Flash plug-ins of the new generations to playback MP4 files
with H.264 material instead of FLV files.
You can select a preset labeled as "Flash Player" or click on
"Advanced" and activate the "Export as website" entry forMPEG 4
export (See below "Video as MPEG-4 video"). This will automatically
create an HTML page and a SWF file with Flash Player in addition to
the exported file.

When applying manual settings, AVC H.264 format with AAC sound is
recommended. In order to be able to play back the file in a browser,
the exported MP4 file, the SWF file and the HTML file must be in the
same folder. The browser needs an installed Flash plug-in (version
9.0.115.0 or higher is recommended).

www.magix.com
220 Options for using the final movie
Video as MPEG-4 video

Hint: In order to use the MPEG-4 video export feature, you will have
to activate this function first (view page 343).

MPEG-4 is the most advanced video format available at the moment.

Unlike others, it can provide high-quality pictures at the same file size.

Behind MPEG-4, you'll find a highly complex "academic" standard

that operates and is supported variably according to make. To go into
detail on these differences and parameters would be beyond the
scope of this documentation. For this reason, indications, along with
the operational manual of your device, are given that should help
create executable MPEG-4 files. For more experimental users, the
complete setup options of the MPEG-4 codec can be found behind
the "Advanced settings..." buttons.

Video/Audio: The MPEG-4 format and the advanced AVC format are
also available but have, as of yet, only been used in a few devices.
MPEG4 video can be combined with AAC or AMR sound, the latter
mostly in conjunction with mobile phones. The combination ACC/AAC
doesn't appear very often (Apple iPod Video), ACC with AMR in
contrast, not at all.

Multiplexer: Here you can find teh so-called container formats and
special options for Apple iPod and Sony PSP. MPEG-4 is usually
used as an output format, mobile phones mostly use 3GPP.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + K

Note: To import and export AVC and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4
codec must first be activated (view page 343). A dialog will open if the
codec is required. Files with a horizontal resolution of more than 768
pixels can only be loaded in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus.

Audio as MP3
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supplies an optional MP3 Encoder for
especially fast and good-sounding conversions into the popular MP3
audio format.

Warning: In order to use the MP3 export function, Windows Meida

Player 10 or higher has to be installed to your system.

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 221

Hint: The MP3 Encoder cannot be used as a codec for the audio
track of AVI audio files.

Transmission format

Here you can specify how you wish to send the audio file to the
mobile device. Read more on this under Transferring files.

Options

In the "Options" section you can set the format and the compression
of the audio file.

Bit rate: The "Bit rate" selection specifies the level of compression:
The higher the bit rate, the higher the quality of the exported audio
file. On the other hand, the bit rate determines the final file size: The
smaller the bit rate, the smaller the files.

Mono/Stereo/5.1 Surround: Most mobile devices have only one

loudspeaker. To save on memory, you can export in mono as well. In
5.1 Surround Mode (see Mixer in Surround Mode) you can also export
in MP3surround.

Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees

that the music is not too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + M

Audio as WAV
The soundtrack of the movie is exported as a WAV audio file.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + H

Export as transition...
Please see "Creating custom alpha transitions (view page 110)"

Single frame as BMP

Exports the image at the position of the start marker and displayed on
the video screen as a BMP file.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + M

www.magix.com
222 Options for using the final movie
Single frame as JPG
Exports the picture located at the current start marker and displayed
in the video monitor as a JPG file.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + N

Animated GIF
The video will be exported as an animated GIF file (also called
"AniGIF). This file format is supported by many mobile phones.

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 223

Export audio/video

This window lets you transfer your finished video to external devices.
Besides the camcorder options for digital camcorders (DV/HDV) and
VHS recorders for playing analog video, many options for further
players such as mobile video players, SmartPhones, PDAs or games
consoles are also included. These are explained in the section
"Exporting to mobile devices (view page 226)".

Video playback via TV output

Video or graphics cards with TV outputs allow you to transfer videos
directly to external analog video recorders. The arrangement must be
displayed in fullscreen mode and recorded by the external device.
Make sure that the TV output in the Windows Control Panel (in
"Display") is active.

Warning: For many graphic cards, the TV output can only be

activated when a television or video recorder is connected before
turning on the computer!

For the best video monitor quality via TV output, select "Overlay"
mode. When in doubt, make sure that "Overlay" mode is selected as
the video mode in the program settings ("File -> Program settings ->
Display options").

You can play the video directly from the arrangement. Errors may
result if the processor is overloaded by real-time calculations of video
effects and transitions.

www.magix.com
224 Options for using the final movie
If direct playback doesn't work without errors, open the menu item
"Output video" and select "VCR -> Render and output in fullscreen".
All tracks and effects are then combined as a single file. The file will
be played back after this analysis.

If you would like to play a finished movie several times, export it as an

AVI file and reload it into a new movie! It should then be possible to
play the file directly without constant rendering.

Playing videos on digital devices

The digital output always consists of two processes:

1. Exporting, i.e. compiling all tracks, video, music, effects,

transitions, and titles into one single video file. This video file is
created in the format required by the target device and then
temporarily saved to your computer's hard disk.
2. Output: In this case the created video file is transferred to the
mobile device or to the camera. The data is either written to the
device via FireWire as a removable device if connected to the USB
port or transferred by Bluetooth or infrared.

Both processes are normally performed together. However, you can

only export vie "File -> Export movie" or export via the option "Output
file" in the dialog "Output audio/video".

The Settings button opens the "Export" dialog (view page 215)of the
file format for your selected device.

Export DV/HDV
For digital output, please select "File -> Export audio/video", and then
select Camcorder in the device menu. For DV cameras, you can
select the device DV camera for HDV camcorders HDV1 or HDV2.

"Settings" opens the respective export settings dialog (DV-AVI export

for DV camcorders; MPEG export for HDV camcorders). For most
applications, you should use the settings defined here. Advanced
takes you to the DV export settings (More Informationen can be found
in the section "DV export settings" on page 226).

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 225
Now connect your camera and follow the displayed instructions.

If you want to play a rendered movie on DV, then there’s no need to

render it again. Simply activate the "Play own DV file" option and
select your DV video from the "My Audio/Video" directory.

Tip: Digital cameras that can record in digital via a PC connection are
usually more expensive. You may be able to reduce your purchase
costs considerably by buying a digital camera that cannot transfer
digitally and then have it activated by a camera specialist. You should
inquire about this option before buying one.

www.magix.com
226 Options for using the final movie
DV export settings

PAL/NTSC: The PAL format is used in Europe, and the US and Japan
use NTSC. This option usually does not require changing.

Render changed parts...: Non-edited original files are simply copied

into a completed DV AVI. Normally, you have to decompress the DV
data, add the set effects calculations, and recompress it. If no effects
processing is pending, then these steps may not be necessary. This
option can be permanently activated.

Use references to original material...: Unedited original files are

exported directly to the device. Effects are rendered in real time. Use
this option for finished movies without edits and effects, since real-
time effects processing of DV data causes high processor loads that
often result in output errors.

Transfer DV back to device after export...: Deactivate this option if

you are only rendering your movie but do not want to export it. You
can export your movie later by clicking "Export own DV file" from the
"Export" dialog.

Export to mobile devices

Most devices require certain format settings (file format, resolution, bit
rate, picture repeat rate, etc.) to be able to play a video.

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 227
The menu is divided into various device classes (mobile phones,
organizers and PDAs, games consoles, and video players) to make it
easier to select your device. The last three selections are saved as
favorites in the top part of the device list if you have more than one
device or want to present your movies to your friends.

If your device is listed here, you won't have to worry about the format
settings, because the necessary settings of the export dialog (view
page 215) are automatically customized to the target device. Simply
select your device, and then click the "OK" button - that's all.

Transfer with Bluetooth

Warning! The procedure described here refers to Windows XP with

Service Pack 2!
Dialogs may be different depending on the Bluetooth driver and
operating system version, or their order may vary (e.g. for password
allocation) when transferring to your mobile phone. However, the
process is usually similar if other drivers are used. Read more on this
in the help file or the corresponding chapters of your operating
system's manual and Bluetooth adapter.

• If you own a Bluetooth device, you can export the movie straight to
your device. To do so, your device and your PC must both have
Bluetooth interfaces. If your system has a Bluetooth device, you can
activate the "Transfer via Bluetooth" option.
• After converting the movie into the desired format, the Bluetooth file
transfer assistant opens.
• The first time you try to transfer files to your device via Bluetooth, you
have to specify your device as the receiver in the dialog by clicking
on "Search...", selecting your device and then pressing "OK". The
name of your device in the Bluetooth network is specified in the
Bluetooth settings of the device. Check your device manual for this.
Select your device and confirm your choice by pressing "OK".
• Now enter a password of your choice, which you will later have to
confirm on your device and click on the "Continue" button in the
assistant. Since connections between multiple Bluetooth devices can
be set up simultaneously in a room, the password serves to identify
certain connections as well as to safeguard your data.

The order may be the other way around, depending on the Bluetooth
device driver, i.e. the mobile phone will request a password which

www.magix.com
228 Options for using the final movie
must be confirmed on your PC. It's important that you use the same
password in each case.

• You may be asked once again to enter the file name and path of the
movie. In this case, we recommend using a folder that you will be
able to find again quickly to export the file (e.g. "...My Files/My
Videos").
• Click the "Scan..." button, open the set up folder, and select your
video file by double clicking it. Now, in the wizard, click the
"Continue" button.
• Next, you may have to activate the reception of files on the device
and re-enter the password. Afterwards, the transfer of the videos will
begin automatically.
• Once the transfer has been completed successfully, "1 new
message" will display on your device. Read more on how to save
and play videos in the corresponding device manual.

Warning! We only recommend activating data reception via Bluetooth

on your device once this function is actually required, e.g. for
transferring files. Once you have completed the uploading process,
you should deactivate Bluetooth again, since permanently activated
Bluetooth reception constitutes a security risk!

Transfer via infrared

For devices with infrared interfaces, the transmission of movies works
similarly to using the Bluetooth transfer method. To do this, your PC
and your device have to have infrared interfaces. Many notebooks are
already fitted with such IrDA interfaces.

• Before starting the export, an infrared connection must already be

established between the computer and the device. Activate the
infrared interface on your device and establish the connection to your
computer. You can check if a connection has been established via a
corresponding symbol in the task bar. More information on this can
be found in the Windows help under the keyword "Wireless
connection".

Note: Some devices deactivate the infrared interface when no data is

exchanged after a certain amount of time. In this case, you can
search for the exported movie in the Media Pool again, reactivate the
infrared interface of your device, open the context menu of the file,
and then send the video to your device again by clicking "Transfer".

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 229
• Open the "Export" dialog via the export button, and under "Play after
export", select the option "Export with infrared". Confirm with "OK".
A window will now be displayed which informs you of the current
status of the transmission.
• Once the transfer has been completed successfully, "1 new
message" will display on your device. Read more on how to save
and play videos in the corresponding device manual.

My device is not in the list, what should I do?

Update devices online
The assortment of playback devices is constantly changing. Every
day, new devices or versions are coming onto the market. The list of
supported devices may therefore not be up-to-date and may not (yet)
contain your specific device. MAGIX continuously maintains updated
preset lists for the available devices, and these can be downloaded
by pressing the update button. Internet access is necessary.

The command "Download presets for new device" in the "Help" menu
opens a website containing an up-to-date list of all supported devices
and device versions. Just search for the desired device and click the
corresponding link. The settings for the device will be downloaded
and made available to you in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

Warning: Some browsers display a warning if you try to download an

executable file (.exe). You can ignore this warning.

If your device is not listed on the website, you can report your
unsupported device so that it will be included in later updates.

User-defined:
If your device does not appear in the list after the online update, you
can set up the export settings manually. No need to worry though;
you only have to do it once, since these settings can be saved as a
preset.

Read the instruction manual of your mobile device to find out which
file format is required for this. If your device supports multiple formats,
then you can experiment with the formats to get the best results.

Specify the file format by opening the target device's menu and
selecting "User-defined -> Video -> ...Format". If you then click on

www.magix.com
230 Options for using the final movie
"Export", you arrive at the Export dialog (view page 215) of the
selected file format where you can set all the advanced settings.

For details on these settings, please consult your device manual.

Explanations for the file format's settings can be found in the
Overview of the device classes chapter, for the special settings of
the export dialogs see "Export movie (view page 230)" in the "File
menu" chapter.

Tip: If the format settings for your device are not accessible, then you
can try out a different device from the same manufacturer and, using
it as a template, make adjustments accordingly.

If you find settings you like, we recommend saving these as a

preset for further use.

Overview of the device classes

This chapter explains the various supported device classes and which
peculiarities should be noted when manually setting the export
format.

Quick overview of the device types*

Example devices MPEG-4 profiles (audio + video formats within
MPEG-4 container format)
iPod & PSP AVC (video) + AAC (audio)
Mobile phones 3GP (video) + AMR or AAC (audio)

Additional video formats

Symbian mobile MPEG-4
phones
Video players DivX / XviD
PDAs, WMV9
PocketPCs
*No guarantee taken for correctness of information
Mobile phones
This refers to multimedia mobile phones and SmartPhones.

File format: For SmartPhones running the Symbian operating system,

you should ideally use the Real format for maximum compatibility,
since RealPlayer is integrated into the system. Many mobile phones
also play MPEG-4. It's important in this case that the correct

www.magix.com
 Options for using the final movie 231
container format (for mobile phones, usually 3GPP) is set up ("Video
as MPEG-4 video export")

Resolution: The resolution corresponds to the display size of your

mobile phone in pixels. Standard resolutions are 128 x 96 pixels (sub
QCIF), 176 x 144 pixels (QCIF), 300 x 180 pixels, and 320 x 240
pixels (SmartPhones). You can find out the resolution of your mobile
phone from its documentation. Many mobile phones require the
precise setting in order to play back videos. If the aspect ratio does
not correspond to the display resolution (300 x 180 corresponds to
5:3 instead of 4:3), then black bars are added. For broad displays
(optimized for 16:9) we recommend the video effects Aspect ratio
16:9 (anamorph/letterbox).

Frame rate: Picture repeat rate, i. e. the number of frames per

second (fps). For mobile phones this is usually reduced from 25fps to
around 10 or 15fps in order to save memory space and because
mobile phone processors are not powerful enough. If you don't have
to save on memory, select the largest frame rate possible (see device
manual) because at low frame rates the video can be very jerky.

Organizers and PDAs

Under "Organizers and PDAs", Pocket PCs and similar devices are
listed.

File format: For Pocket PCs, you should ideally use Windows Media
Video format for maximum compatibility, since it usually only runs on
modified Windows Operating Systems (Windows Mobile), and the
Windows Media Player is integrated in the operating system.

Resolution: The resolution corresponds to the display size of the

PDA, mostly 320 x 240 pixels. You can find out the resolution of your
PDA from its documentation. A PDA can also play back at higher
resolutions than those set; mostly, however, the CPU is usually not
able to handle this as it must scale the picture before output, which
can cause errors.

Frame rate: Picture repeat rate, i. e. the number of frames per

second (fps). If you don't have to save on memory, use the largest
frame rate possible (see device manual) because at low frame rates
the video can be very jerky.

www.magix.com
232 Options for using the final movie

Games consoles
Some portable games consoles (Sony PSP, Nintendo Wii) can also
play videos. The consoles are extremely particular with regard to file
format settings, and they sometimes use their own file format
variations.

Warning: Do not change the presets!

MAGIX tries to supply presets for all games consoles with video
functions on the market, but you may have to update your device list.

Warning: Sony PSP and Apple iPod video only play movies when
they are copied with a specific name into a pre-defined target folder.
Always copy movies for these devices from the export dialog along
with the corresponding presets (at the top of the "Preset" list and at
the bottom beside "Play after export").

Video players
Video players are considered to be video devices if they have been
developed especially for mobile video playback. They usually have
relatively large displays and their own hard disk or a very large flash
card memory (in GB).

File format: Mostly DivX AVI or WMV (Windows Media Video) are
used. While WMV is its own format, AVI is a so-called container
format. This means that the actual file format is set via the medium's
codec (view page 347).

In addition to the AVI format, you will also have to set up a codec that
your mobile device supports when exporting AVI files.

A much-used codec for AVI is the DivX codec. This is supported by a

large number of portable video players. Specific standards have been
set up between the codec manufacturer DivX and the device
manufacturers (profiles) that a certified DivX device has to fulfill.

Unlike Windows Media or MPEG4, a separate audio codec (ACM

codec) is required for the sound in order to encode the sound track in
the same high compression at acceptable quality. Select the codec
you wish to use for the sound under Audio compression. MP3
56kBps is used as a preset. For improved sound quality, you should

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 233
read your device manual to find out which sound formats AVI audio
still supports and, if required, install further ACM codecs from the
Internet.

The DivX codec can be downloaded from www.divx.com

http://www.divx.com.

Resolution: Video players can handle almost every resolution up to

TV resolution (720x576), as most models can display your video
picture in TV resolution via an analog TV output. For the optimum
picture quality on the device display (if you do not wish to use the TV
output) use the resolution that the device can display.

Frame rate: Picture repeat rate, i. e. the number of frames per

second (fps). This isn't problematic, since the frame rate of the output
material is used.

Warning: Sony PSP and Apple iPod video only play movies when
they are copied with a specific name into a pre-defined target folder.
Always copy movies for these devices from the export dialog along
with the corresponding presets (at the top of the "Preset" list and at
the bottom beside "Play after export").

Burn discs
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the
button indicated.

You can burn your movies (including a selection menu) onto CD,
DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or upload them to MAGIX Online Album.

All movies loaded into the project are taken into account. If you want
to take out some of the movies that are loaded, then you will have to
switch back to the "Edit" screen and delete some of them from the
project. To do so, switch to the corresponding movie, open the "File"
menu and select "Manage movies -> Remove movie (view page 257)"

Note: At a screen resolution of 1280 x 1024, the program display

changes. This makes the program more manageable and easier to
use. The work steps remain the same despite the different display.

www.magix.com
234 Burn discs

Preview and editing

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 provides two different modes for designing
and previewing the disc menu.

The preview mode is mainly intended to behave

like a DVD player or Blu-ray player for checking
the disc menu under realistic conditions.
Only templates may only be used; more detailed
editing of the disc menu is not possible at this
time.

During editing, you may adjust many features of

the disc menu. There are many templates
available for this that may be changed flexibly
once loaded.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 235
Remote control
The virtual remote control is an important helper when it comes to
checking how the disc will perform later.

When you later insert the CD or DVD with your disc project into your
player, this remote control will control the preview picture just like a
"real" remote control controls the picture on a monitor or TV. The
DVD menu navigation can now be initiated with the arrow keys or the
"OK" button. Activated buttons are highlighted.

The number keys select the corresponding entry

on the menu page. All menu entries are marked
with a corresponding number. Within a chapter
menu, playback is started from the particular
scene. In the movie menu, the corresponding
chapter menu (if available) is changed or movie
playback is started.
Navigation keys: These help you move from one
section to the next in the menu of the CD/DVD
being burned. You can switch between individual
entries and confirm the switch by pressing "OK".
The remote control works just like the remote
control for your home DVD player.
Skip/Move forward/back: This allows you to skip
to the next or previous scene while playing back
your movie. In the menu, you can skip forward or
back from one menu page to another.

Play: Starts the first entry in the menu. In case both the scene menus
and chapter menus are available (see menu mode), the scene menu
will be displayed first. Press the play button again to start playback at
the beginning of the first scene of the first chapter.
Pressing stop halts playback.
Disc switches to the first page of the film menu.
Sub switches into the chapter menu (if available) of the currently
selected film.

www.magix.com
236 Burn discs

Menu
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can add graphical selection menus to your
movies. The menu is also burned to CD/DVD and appears when
inserted into your player. Just like with a purchased DVD, you can
easily select your movies with the help of preview pictures, or access
particular chapters within a movie.

This sort of menu is available for the following disc types:

• Blu-ray Disc
• DVD
• Mini DVD
• Super Video CD (SVCD)
• Video CD (VCD)
• WMV HD disc (Plus version only)
• AVCHD disc (Plus version only)
• Multi disc (Plus version only)

VCD, SVCD, and AVCHD disc are only possible as static menus.

Templates
Below the preview monitor and the editing elements you will find
templates for DVD menus and layouts.

To the left you will find a tree structure that makes it easier to select
the template type. Now you can select using two buttons in the tree
structure, whether you want to select templates in the "16:9" or "4:3"
(default) format. Every menu template is high resolution. Under "4:3"
the following are available:

• Animated DVD: These templates contain background and

introductory videos as well as music. The control elements are
displayed in various states. The templates can only be used for mini
DVDs and DVDs. If you burn a VCD or SVCD, still pictures and
control elements will be shown, but music will not be audible.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 237
• Static (DVD, VCD, SVCD): Here you will find templates equally
suitable for use with DVDs and SVCDs. They consist of normal
background pictures and tools
• Unique: These templates adjust to your disc project, i.e. the videos
and scenes you use are integrated directly into the menu.
• TV showtime DVD: With these templates your pictures will not be
displayed in the movie menu as small preview pictures, but rather as
fullscreen preview pictures for every menu page. With the “Skip”
button on your remote control you can present the chapters with the
help of the preview pictures, like in a slideshow – with the option of
being able to start the movie at any time from the current preview
picture. These templates are intended for DVDs.

Note: For these menus the "Movie and chapter menu" mode in the
menu design must remain active.

• HD (DVD, WMV HD): These templates contain super-sharp, high-res

background images that are particularly noticeable on HD TV
devices.

Under 16:9 additionally:

• HD animated (DVD, WMV, HD, mini HD DVD): These templates

contain super-sharp, high-res background images that are
particularly noticeable on HD TV devices and are additionally
animated.

If you selected a specific type of menu template, you can use the
horizontal scroll bar to view all the templates. There are lots of
options when using the templates:

• If you wish to apply a template to all menu pages, click on

"Complete" in the template bar and double click on the template of
your choice. The complete template will then be applied.
• You can also combine the various elements of the individual
templates. If, for example, you wish to combine the text format of a
template with the background of another one, first double-click on
the template with the text of your choice. Then click on the tab
"Text". There you can select the desired template for the text.

www.magix.com
238 Burn discs
You can load the template (or
individual template elements) for the
current menu (movie or chapter) as
well as for all menus.

Note: Some menu templates include intro videos with a smooth

transition to the menu page!

Edit disc menu

The preview pictures and the menu title can be moved freely in the
preview monitor. The menu may be edited very flexibly.

Activate the "Edit" button to do this.

Load on-disc editing project from disc

Use this button to load the DVD-/+RW in your drive for on-
disc editing. For more information on this, consult the On-
disc editing (view page 244) section.

Edit menu elements

Hold down the left mouse key and drag text boxes or graphical
elements to the desired position. You can adjust the size by dragging
out the corners and edges of the frame.

During project editing, you can undo the last changes you made. This
way it's no problem if you want to experiment with critical operations.
If you don't like the results, then you can always revert to the previous
state by using "Undo".

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Z

The "Redo" function undoes the previous "Undo" function.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Y

Set ratio: Avoid distortions by using this button to set the

page proportions of the menu elements.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 239
Group: Menu elements, including the description text and
number, can be moved or scaled in size.

Fade in TV display area in the preview monitor: This

option displays the image borders of the television (view
page 158) as lines in the preview monitor.

Grid: You can precisely align the frame positions with one
another using the grid button. A dialog can be opened to
set the grid more exactly using the small arrow next to
the button.
Navigation
• All movies are listed as first entries. The
corresponding menu level is the film
menu.
• All scenes are listed as second entries to
the right. The corresponding menu level
is the chapter menu.

Removing the red check deactivates the

corresponding entry in the photo menu.
The scenes are shown of course, but they
are not selectable directly in the menu.
• If you click a film entry, then the film
menu will open in the preview.
• If you click one of the chapters listed,
then the chapter menu will open in the
preview.

Disc options
You may deactivate the menus entirely or customize them here.

Intro video: You can use this button to load videos to be used as
introductions to your DVD or mini DVD. The *.avi, *.mpg, *.mxv, *.vob
formats are supported. The intro is played immediately after the DVD
has been inserted into the player. The DVD menu will then appear.

www.magix.com
240 Burn discs
Menu intro
You can use this button to load videos into the preview monitor to be
used as introductions to your DVD or miniDVD. The following formats
are supported: "*.avi", "*.mpg", "*.mxv", "*.vob". The intro is played
immediately after the DVD has been inserted into the player. The DVD
menu will then appear.

Film menu & chapter menu

The disc menu essentially consists of two layers:

Film menu: The upper layer includes the film menu, which is only
used if a project contains multiple movies.

Chapter menu: This is the lowest layer of the disc menu, which
assumes the chapter markers in a movie as menu entries. More
information about this is available in "Chapter markers (view page
118)".

Note: A chapter menu cannot contain more than 99 entries. If your

movie has more chapters, then you can either burn it without a
chapter menu or split it into multiple parts.

Note on SVCD compatibility

Some DVD players may have difficulty playing created SVCDs
(despite fault-free burning) if the disc contains a project burned in
"Chapter and photo menus" mode and contains several slideshows
and/or a large number of photos. These compatibility problems can
be avoided by:

• Using menu mode 1 or 2 for SVCD,

• Only adding a single movie to the disc, or
• Turning off the PBC (playback control) function, i. e. the menu
navigation of the DVD player.

Preview pictures: Shows/hides the preview pictures in the disc

menu.

Numbering: The numbers beside the menu entries can be selected

directly using the remote control, but they might be disturbing
sometimes. Use this option to show/hide them.

Frame: A frame borders the preview pictures. If you think it gets in

the way, then you can easily remove it using this option.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 241
In the arranger: Clicking this button opens the arranger to edit
animated menus.

Create your own menu background

Every menu background can be created new
from scratch or edited.

A click on this button switches to the "Edit" interface and loads the
selected menu background as video. Here you can change and
design the background as you please. The created film must be
saved and then applied as a menu background.

Tip: If you would like to design a menu background yourself from

scratch, first press Ctrl + A, to select all objects, and then Del, to
delete them.

Design page
Background graphic: You have three options in this case. You can
either set a certain "color value" for the background. Or, you can
select an image file from your hard drive. You can also select a
certain frame from a video in your project.

Plus version only!

New menu pages may also be added or irrelevant pages may be

removed.

Adds a new menu page.

Removes the selected menu page.

Design button
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 enables simple editing of any menu entry.
They will appear in the disc menu as buttons with preview images.

Plus version only!

New menu entries may also be added or irrelevant pages may be

removed.

www.magix.com
242 Burn discs
Adds a new menu entry.

Removes the selected menu entry.

Tip: If you would simply like to deactivate unused menu entries, this
may be done via the navigation.

Note: The chapter menu is formed via chapter markers (view page
118) and can be influenced in detail with these.

Pressing this button or double clicking the menu

entries allows menu entries you have created to be
edited. The dialog with the properties of the menu
entries (view page 242) will open.

Edit in MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer:

These buttons open MAGIX Xtreme Photo
Designer for further editing of your
background pictures or the selected menu
elements.

Jump to linked page

To test the targets of menu entries, select
the desired menu entry and click the
button.

Menu entry/menu page properties

Double clicking the preview picture or a menu entry opens an editor
for you to adjust the preview picture or menu entry.

Menu entry: Specify the menu page that should be opened when this
menu entry is selected.

Preview image: Select a suitable preview picture here.

Menu text
In the text input field, you can enter any text to match the chosen
menu entry.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 243
Set the vertical direction of the text (upwards, centered or
downward).

Set the horizontal direction of the text (left, centered or

right).

Font size: Set the height of the text in pixels.

Font color: Define the foreground color of the text.

Font: Set which font and which style (bold, italic, etc.) should be
used.

Shadow: Set the color and size of the shadow that will appear
underneath the text.

3D effect: If you would like to make your text appear three-

dimensional, you can set the width, height, and color of the 3D effect.

Apply to all: Except for the text, all settings are applied to all entries
in the current menu.

Menu image
Use frame from movie: Use the fader to set which frame should be
used in the video as a preview picture. The numerical input fields are
sorted as follows: Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.

Use different graphic: You can also load your own bitmap images to
be used as menu pictures.

Hint: It may be the case that there are no menu pictures in some
menu templates, so changing the menu picture won't have any
noticeable effect.

www.magix.com
244 Burn discs
Actions at the end of the movie (only in the film menu)
You can enter which action should be carried out once the film has
finished playing. You have the choice of:

• Stop playback
• Jumping to the video menu or photo menu
• Jump to chapter menu
• Jump to next movie
• Play film as an endless loop

Edit your own menu entries

There is another view in this dialog to edit menu entries you have
created. Menu links can be edited here. This makes it possible to link
a menu entry with a certain action, menu page, or a certain position in
the movie.

No link: The menu element cannot be selected and has no function

other than to display menu text.

Link to page in current menu: Jumps to a a menu page in the current

movie or chapter menu in the current film.

Link to another menu: Opens another movie or chapter menu.

Link to chapter in a movie: If this option is selected, enter a film and

chapter marker where playback should start.

Note: For DVDs, only chapters within the current movie may be
jumped to.

Link to film start: The movie will play back from the start.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 245
OnDisc Editing
OnDisc editing lets you burn more movies onto disc at a later stage
and customize the menu accordingly. It's also possible to just rework
the menu.

In order to use OnDisc editing, the "Prepare disc for OnDisc editing"
option has to be activated. You can find this option in the Burn
options (view page 250)of the "Burn" dialog.

To put a movie onto DVD, first

load the movie and then switch to
the "Burn" screen. Insert your
DVD+/-RW and press "Load
project".

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will ask you if you wish to add the loaded
movies to the disc. If you answer "Yes", the entries will be added to
the existing menu.

It is not possible to edit movies you have already burned onto disc
later in the "Burn" window (to do this, please use the "Restore
backup" function). You can only change the menu.

In addition to normal menu design possibilities (see Burn (view page

236)window) you can hide entire movies in OnDisc editing mode, e.g.
to replace them with an entirely reworked version.

Select a movie in the navigation

structure and press the "Del" key.
To display the movie again, press
"Shift + Del".

Important: Deleting certain parts of your DVD-/+RW is not possible.

Every new version of the menu will be burned additionally to the disc.
Accordingly, the remaining disc space decreases the more changes
you make. Deleting movies from your DVD is also not possible. When
you remove a movie from the menu, it will still be played, providing
"Actions at the end of the movie" is set up accordingly (see "Menu
entry properties (See "Actions at the end of the movie (only in the film
menu)")" in the "Burn" interface).

With "Burn disc" you can create your "new" disc. Only the new
movies and the adjusted menu will be encoded and burned to disc.

www.magix.com
246 Burn discs
Burning assistant
Click "Burn" to open the screen where you create DVDs, Blu-ray
Discs, or another video medium, including a menu.

Here you can select the type of disc you would like to create. Under
"More options" additional disc options are available to you which
aren't used as frequently.

Burning assistant: Disc limitations

Note: For each disc format there are different limitations. For
example, with many formats animated menus are not possible or no
menus and transitions at all are possible. You can find an overview of
these limitations in the PDF manual or in "Help" under "Appendix:
Digital videos and storage media ("Overview of the different disc
types")“.

Memory
VCD (approx. 700 MB) approx. 70 minutes
SVCD (approx. 700 MB) approx. 30 - 40 minutes
DVD (approx. 4.7 GB) approx. 2 hours
Mini-DVD (approx. 700 MB) approx. 20 minutes

Blu-ray Disc (approx. 25 approx. 4.5 hours

GB/single-layer or 50 GB/dual-
layer)

Especially with the MPEG-2 encoder which is used for SVCDs, DVDs,
and mini-DVDs (i.e. on CD-ROMs written in DVD file format), it can be

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 247
difficult to supply reliable relating to the required memory. If the
“Variable bit rate” of the MPEG-2 encoder is activated, encoding will
occur according to the movements in the picture. The required
memory depends on the film material; an action film would need more
memory than a drama, for instance.

If you cannot save your disc project on a blank CD, you will have to
divide it up into different sections.

A movie, for example, can be burned onto 3 SVCDs by creating three

different projects: Start, middle, and end are added and burned
sequentially.

Further information on MPEG compression and formats can be found

in the chapter "Video and data formats (view page 346)" of the PDF
manual.

Test series with variable encoder settings

If you would like to know how much memory you will require for
various encoder settings, then you should run some simulations
before burning.

To avoid wasting blank CDs while testing, you should activate the
“Simulate first” option.

Then create, for example, a short (ca. 5 min.) disc project and
simulate burning in multiple cycles with various settings.

After every simulation you can access the MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 file on
the hard disk to check how large the file has become.

You will discover how much disc space your disc project will require
from the simulation results. The memory requirements of a 5-minute
disc project would have to be multiplied by 20 in order to estimate the
space required for a 100-minute movie. You should also add buffer
for the selection menu. (view page 236)

Separate project onto multiple discs

Automatically: If the disc project requires more memory than is
available on the CD or DVD, a dialog will appear before burning
asking whether the disc project should be automatically segmented
for multiple discs. Confirm this by clicking “Yes”. The disc project will
then be automatically divided into individual disc projects and burned

www.magix.com
248 Burn discs
sequentially onto multiple discs. This is the easiest method since
everything is automatic, and all you have to do is insert a new blank
CD when required.

Manual

Case 1: If several movies do not fit onto a single disc...

In this case, switch back to the “Record” screen and delete as many
movies as is needed until the remaining movies fit onto the disc. You
can create a new disc project and load and burn the other movies
afterwards.

Case 2: When a long film doesn’t fit onto a disc...

In this case, the movie has to be split into two or more parts that will
be burned separately onto disc.

• Switch back to the "Edit" view and place the start marker to the
position at which you wish to divide the movie. In the "Edit" menu,
select "Cut -> Separate movie".
•
• All passages behind the start marker
will be removed from the movie and
made into a smaller movie. Both
movies can be moved using the
"Select to edit" menu in the arranger.
Save both of them separately to your
hard disk (“Save movie” menu option,
for example, as “Part 1” and “Part 2”).
• Remove one of the two movies (for example, "Part 2") from the disc
project ("Manage movies -> Remove movie (view page 257)" menu
option).
• Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the first film ("Part 1") to CD
or DVD.
• Create a new disc project (“New” button), switch to the “Record”
view and load it into the second film (“Part 2”).
• Switch to the “Burn” interface and burn the second movie to CD or
DVD.

Burn dialog for DVD player

Select your burner, the type of disc, the encoder settings, etc. For
video CDs this is MPEG-1; for Mini DVDs, Super Video CDs and DVD,

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 249
use MPEG-2. Blu-ray Disc uses MPEG-2, and higher bit rates are
applied in order to reach the higher HD resolutions.

Steps for burning DVDs, etc.

1. Set up burner and burn speed: If you have multiple burners
installed, you can select which device you wish to use in this
menu.
2. Encoder settings: Use the “Encoder” button to access the
selection dialog where you can specify the properties of the MPEG
encoder (memory requirements, quality and duration of the MPEG
conversion).
The "Advanced" button opens the "Advanced settings" dialog.
Here you can adjust all the fine settings of the MPEG encoder.

Burning disc/starting video encoding: "Burn disc": This starts the

disc burning process. Every time you burn and every time a
simulation is carried out, the disc project is encoded (for VCDs with
MPEG-1, with SVCD, DVD and mini-DVD with MPEG-2 (See "MPEG
Compression")). You have the option of choosing a storage location
(view page 312) for the MPEG file on the hard disk. Please note that
the MPEG file is not deleted from the hard disk after the burn process
has finished. Depending on the length of the project, encoding and
burning may take some time. The time required can be seen in the
dialog.

www.magix.com
250 Burn discs
Creating an ISO image
The simplest way to create an ISO image is to select "Image
recorder" under "Burner". When starting the "Burning process", you
have to specify a name for the image file you wish to create.

Options
Simulate first: If you are not sure about the write speed or memory
requirements of the selected disc, you can simulate the write process
before burning.

Add project backup: Use this option to add additional project data to
the CD/DVD together with the selected video format. You can then
load the disc project from the finished disc to re-edit it and create a
changed version.

Activate buffer underrun protection: Many burners support

techniques that prevent "buffer underrun". Use this option to activate
this protective feature and burn your files at higher speeds (without
risking making a coaster out of your blank disc).

Completely format DVD/CD-RW media: This option reformats the

RW media and deletes all existing file material.

Prepare disc for OnDisc editing: With a DVD±RW, it is possible to

add more slideshows to the disc, or to edit the menu at a later date.
The disc has to be burned with the option "Prepare disc for OnDisc
editing" (view page 244) activated.

Shutdown computer after burning: Activate this option to

automatically turn off the computer after encoding and burning has
been completed. You could, for instance, start the encoding and
burning process in the evening, and then you don't have to wait for
the process to finish to switch off your computer.

Activate the burner's defect management option: If a certain section

of the disc is defective, then this will be recognized by the burner and
labeled as such. No content will be saved there as a result.

Burn standard video DVD onto same disc: On a WMV HD disc you
can use this option burn an additional normal DVD video onto disc.
This ensures that your discs can also be played back on standalone
DVD players. See Multi disc.

CD/DVD title: This is the title of the DVD as displayed as disc name
on the PC. The disc project name is displayed here by default.

www.magix.com
 Burn discs 251
Encoder settings
Use the "Encoder" button to
access the selection dialog where
you can specify the properties of
the MPEG encoder (memory
requirements, quality, and duration
of the MPEG conversion).

Preset: Additional settings for the

selected disc type.

Longplay video DVD DVD with extra-long play time. The bit rate is
reduced, causing a compromise in quality.
Longplay music DVD DVD with extra-long play time for music. The
bit rate for the soundtrack remains at the
highest quality level.
Standard DVD Normal DVD
Widescreen DVD Normal DVD in 16:9 widescreen format

Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement of the
completed video. The higher the bit rate, the larger the file, and the
shorter the maximum play time of the movie that fits on a disc.

Adjust bit rate: The expected file size of the finished video is
estimated, depending on the set bit rate. If the movie does not fit
onto the disc, then the bit rate is corrected accordingly.

Quality: Determines the quality of the encoding process. The higher

the quality, the better the finished video will look, but encoding will
take considerably longer.

Smart rendering: Smart Rendering considerably reduces the

encoding effort for MPEG files. During production of MPEG files, only
those parts of the movie that were changed in the program (e.g. by
video cleaning or effects) are re-encoded. Please note: The MPEG
files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit
rates (variable or constant), audio formats, image resolutions, and
video formats must match.

Anti-flicker filter: This option should only be activated for playback on

a TV screen to reduce line flickering.

www.magix.com
252 Burn discs
To return to the standard settings please use the "Reset" button.

The "Advanced" button opens the "Enhanced parameters" dialog.

Here you can adjust all the fine settings of the MPEG encoder. Please
also read the addendum MPEG Encoder Settings (view page 375).

Create PC show
Click this button and a presentation optimized for your PC
will be created.

First, enter a path where the PC show will be found again later, and
click "OK".

Create webDVD
You can create an online presentation which can be
uploaded to MAGIX Online Album and opened there. To do
this, you must first register on MAGIX Online Album.

First, create and save the online presentation on your computer, and
then it can be uploaded. Indicate a location to save the file. Usually
the suggested folder does not need to be changed.

www.magix.com
 Batch conversion 253

Batch conversion
Batch conversion makes it is possible to convert multiple video files,
movies, objects, or whole projects into another format in just one
step.

Open batch conversion

Batch conversion can be opened using different presets. A pre-
selection appears only if you have loaded a film or a project.

The following scenarios exist:

• Batch conversion has been opened from the context menu in the
Media Pool: The file selected in the Media Pool beforehand will be
transferred to the task list and can be converted to the available
formats. In case of projects which contain multiple movies, all movies
will appear as individual tasks.
• Only one empty movie is open: A dialog opens additionally for batch
conversion, in which video files that have to be converted to other
formats can be selected and loaded.
• A movie with video material and more than one object in the first
track is opened. A dialog opens, in which you can select which tasks
should be created for batch conversion.
- All scenes in the movie: All objects present in the 1st track
will be used as starting points for the video files to be
exported. An application for this could be that all scene
beginnings of a movie should be exported as bitmap files or a
backup for a movie is to be created as individual scenes.
- Multiple movies: The opened movie will be exported as a
whole video. Additional movies can be added to the list in the
dialog.
• Multiple movies with video material are open: The opened movie will
be exported as a complete video. This is especially useful for large
projects with a lot of individual movies, eliminating the need to export
each one individually.

www.magix.com
254 Batch conversion

Administration
Save and load your settings here. These include the list of files to be
exported and the export settings and names of all entries.

Caution! Batch conversion references the projects, movies, and the

objects contained therein directly. Keep in mind that when converting
entire movies, the source material must also be available. During
conversion of individual objects from movies, you have to make sure
that the movie file has not been changed between loading and
saving.

Queued entries for batch conversion

This is the list of all objects that have to be converted into the
indicated format. Each task can have its own export settings.

Add files (not during conversion of individual objects from movies):

Manually add files, including video files and projects.

Remove selected: The marked tasks will be removed from the list.

Duplicate selected: If you would like to export tasks in multiple

formats, you can simply mark and duplicate them and assigning
individual export settings to them.

Format settings for the selected conversion

process
These are settings for the currently selected tasks, and multiple tasks
can be given a setting simultaneously. Select one or more tasks from
the task list.

Note on format setting for multiple tasks: If one of the marked tasks
already has an individual setting, its will be lost after another format is
selected. To prevent this, remove the selection for each task using
Ctrl + mouse click.

Set the target format in the flip menu. Windows Media Video format
(*.wmv) is the default.

www.magix.com
 Batch conversion 255
Advanced settings: This opens the dialog for the advanced format
settings. This corresponds to the dialog for normal video export of a
movie.

Tip: If you give several tasks the same file name, the files created will
be documented intelligently. For example, you can easily convert and
simultaneously line up multiple movies that belong together
thematically.

Shut down PC automatically after successful

export
This option is especially useful when you export long movies and are
using an especially high-quality and resource-demanding export
format. You can leave the computer to work on the individual tasks
and after finishing them it will turn itself off.

Start batch conversion

Click on "Start conversion" to start the process. After ending
conversion processes, a list of all export processes with a message
informing of its success will appear.

Hint: During batch conversion, messages that appear during normal

file import will be for the most part suppressed. This is to enable the
smoothest conversion of all tasks. Therefore, please make sure that
all files to be converted or the project can be easily loaded before
starting a batch conversion.

www.magix.com
256 Menus

Menus
Certain menu items are not available on the "Record" and "Burn"
screens. The menu reference describes the full menu as found on the
"Edit" screen.

File menu
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 project. A dialog with
settings for a new disc project or a new film (view page 54)
opens to get started.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N

Load project
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please
note that all media files associated with it must be accessible.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will search for all used sounds and
video files in the folders in which they were located when the
movie was saved.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O

Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the
project window. If you have not yet specified a name for your
project, a dialog will open asking you to do so.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + S

Save project as...

A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video
for saving.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + O

Manage movies
New movie
Use this option to create a new movie for your recordings and
imported files. Since a film is normally already opened, you will have

www.magix.com
 Menus 257
to decide whether the movie should be inserted into the existing
project or if a new project should be created.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + N

Delete movie
This option lets you remove the current movie from the project.
However, it is still available on the hard drive and can be loaded again
at any time.

Shortcut: Shift + F4

Attach movie
Using this function you can attach a movie to an opened one. This is
then attached to the end of the movie and automatically takes on the
original movie's settings.

Rename movie
You can enter a new name for your movie here.

Import movie file

Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please note
that all media files associated with it must be accessible. MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16 will search for all used sounds and video files in the
folders in which they were located when the move was saved.

The "Select movie for editing" button lets

you switch between movies.

Export movie file

A dialog will open in which a file name for the film to be exported has
to be entered. The movie can then be imported again into other
projects.

Note: The movie file (*.mvd) contains all information about the used
media files, cuts, effects, and titles, but not the picture and sound
material itself. This is found in the recorded or imported media files
that remain unchanged during the entire MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

www.magix.com
258 Menus
editing process. To save the full movie into a dedicated directory, e.g.
to continue editing on a different PC, please use the function "Copy
movie and media into directory".

Export movie
This provides all export formats supported by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16 that aren't covered by burning. Refer to "Exporting (view page
215)" for more information.

Record audio / images / video

A selection window will
open for you to select the
desired recording type. You
can also access it via the
"Record" button in the
transport control.

Keyboard shortcut: G

Import Audio CD track(s)

You can simply import a CD track as a regular file from the Media
Pool via drag & drop. If this simple method doesn't work for some
reason, then you can use the menu command to open the CD
manager to select tracks from an audio CD and load them into the
arrangement. More about this can be found in the section "Importing
Audio CDs" in the Audio chapter (view page 183).

Keyboard shortcut: C

Scan image
Select scanner
The twain interface connects MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 with almost all
current scanners or digital cameras. Proceed as follows if working
with the twain interface for the first time:

1. Install the twain software for the device.

2. Restart your computer.
3. Start MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

www.magix.com
 Menus 259
4. Click on "File -> Twain scanner -> Select source", if the scanner
works with 32-bit software.
5. In the dialog field click on the device you want to work with. This
step will no longer be necessary if you continue using the same
device.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Q

Start the scanning process

The scan window of your scan software will appear. Specify the
resolution and color depth in this window. Once the scan process is
finished, the twain software will normally switch off by itself – the
sanned image file will be added to MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
automatically. If the twain dialog remains open, you will be able to
scan multiple images in succession.

Output audio/video
This command opens the dialog for exporting the completed video or
its audio track to analog or digital video recorders/camcorders or
various mobile devices such as smartphones, PDAs, video players, or
games consoles.

Please read the chapter "Output audio/video (view page 223)".

Keyboard shortcut: H

Burn CD/DVD
Manually compile files
Opens the MAGIX Speed burnR burning application for burning
movies or other files onto CD/DVD. The files are selected by simply
dragging & dropping them into the MAGIX Speed burnR explorer.
Further information can be found in the MAGIX Speed burnR help file.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + R

Copy CD/DVD direct

The dialog provides several options for creating a copy:

• Copy: Here you can directly copy a non copy-protected CD or DVD.

• Shrink: Compresses a DVD to the size of a regular single layer
DVD+/-R/RW. All files of the original DVD have to be on the hard
drive.

www.magix.com
260 Menus
• Analog copy: Copies your video onto a disc via analog recording.

More on this in the chapter about the "Record" dialog.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + D

Burn an already created (S)VCD/Video DVD

All necessary files, menus, and encoded video files needed to burn a
CD/DVD will be temporarily stored on your hard drive. After your disc
is burned, these are not automatically deleted. Using "Disc image"
multi-copy, you can uses these images to burn as many discs as you
would like without having to encode the files again.

In the dialog, choose the image you want. All necessary files are then
transferred to the MAGIX Speed burnR burning tool.

For more information on using MAGIX Speed burnR, read the

program's help file.

Internet
This is a list of menu entries regarding all of the services that are
available directly from within MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

MAGIX Online Album/MAGIX Online Print Service/Catooh

For MAGIX Online World please read menu item Online!

Export to magix.info
This command allows you to export your movie to magix.info.

First, export your project in one of the following formats: asf, mov,
mpg, mpeg, mp4, wmv, 3gp, or avi. Next, access "File -> Internet ->
magix.info -> Present videos on magix.info" to reach a page where
you can upload your video. You may need to register with magix.info.

Online login details

In this dialog, you can save your login information (login and
password) for MAGIX Online Album and all other MAGIX Online World
as well as for Catooh, making it unnecessary to login each time you
access MAGIX Online World.

www.magix.com
 Menus 261
The saved data are valid for all other MAGIX programs for the
corresponding computer user.

MAGIX Community
This is a direct connection between MAGIX and different communities
like YouTubeTM or VimeoTM.

Upload current movie as video

Uploads the current film to the selected portal or to the selected
community. Enter the data for video into the fields provided, so that
the search function for this portal can also find this video.

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 partially uses the H.264 format for this,
which is a component of the MPEG-4 codec. Since Flash supports
this format directly and most communities and portals use the format,
the film does not need to be re-rendered on the corresponding
server. This avaoids loss of quality.

When HD material is uploaded, a resolution of 720p is used for the

HD format.

Upload all selected media in Media Pool

Uploads the media selected in the Media Pool to the corresponding
portal or the selective community.

Note: To import and export AVC and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4
codec must first be activated (view page 343). A dialog will open if the
codec is required. Files with a horizontal resolution of more than 768
pixels can only be loaded in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus.

Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard
drive crash or some other error.

For detailed information, read the Backup (view page 212) section in
the "Video project management" ("Managing video projects") chapter.

www.magix.com
262 Menus
Load backup project
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This
type of automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore).
This command is only intended for use in emergencies, for example, if
you unintentionally saved your change and wish to return to the
previous version of the movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + O

Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps you delete projects from your hard drive,
including all media files. Use this function to free up disk space for
future projects.

Caution: If the files you used in the slideshow have also been used in
other slideshows (like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should
make backup copies of these files beforehand.

Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + G

For detailed information, read the clean-up wizard (view page 214)
section in the "Video project management" ("Managing video
projects") chapter.

Settings
Movie settings
Opens the movie settings (view page 51) of the currently selected
movie.

Keyboard shortcut: E

Program settings
Opens the program settings (view page 308).

Keyboard shortcut: Y

Edit Keyboard shortcut

This menu entry opens a dialog for editing the keyboard shortcuts
(view page 342). This allows you to adjust MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
to your own specific needs.

www.magix.com
 Menus 263
Exit
Closes MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + F4

Edit menu
undo
During project editing, you can undo the last changes you made. This
way it's no problem if you want to experiment with critical operations.
If you don't like the results, then you can always revert to the previous
state by using "Undo".

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Z

Restore
The "Redo" function undoes the previous "Undo" function.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Y

Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X

Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected
object in Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C

Paste objects
This command inserts the clipboard material (photo or object)
at the current position of the start marker.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + V

www.magix.com
264 Menus
Duplicate objects
This command duplicates all selected objects. The copies
appear beside the original and can be placed in the correct
position using drag & drop.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + D

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object
in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

Select all objects

All objects in the arrangement will be selected.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + A

Cut
Split scene
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.

Keyboard shortcut: T

Delete scene start

This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is
positioned, and deletes all material that precedes the start position
simultaneously.

Shortcut key: Shift + T

Delete scene end

This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is
positioned, and deletes all material behind the start position
simultaneously.

Shortcut: Shift + Z

www.magix.com
 Menus 265
Remove scene
If you want to cut a scene out of a movie retroactively, this option
automatically moves all objects, titles, and transitions on all tracks
forwards so that no gaps result.

Objects on other tracks which project into the area of the selected
scene will not be moved automatically; they will remain at the current
position.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del

Split movie
This command splits a movie at the point where the playback marker
is positioned, making two separate movies. The part before the
playback marker will remain in the arranger. The remaining part will be
erased from the current arranger and turned into a new movie, which
can be found in the "Window" menu.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + T

Musical editing
If your background music is edited using the beat recognition
assistant (view page 188), you can automatically adapt your cuts to
the tempo with this option. All hard cuts (no crossfaded objects) are
shifted across the musical quarter note positions.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + U

Range
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 provides object-based functions as well as
"band-oriented" editing functions. These always refer to the whole
project from the first to the last track as well as to the area between
the start and end marker.

Cut out
The section between the in and out points is cut from the current
arrangement and placed on the clipboard. This section can then be
reinserted elsewhere.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + X

www.magix.com
266 Menus
Copy
The section between the in and out points is copied from the current
arrangement to the clipboard. This section can then be reinserted
elsewhere.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + C

Delete
The section between the in and out points is deleted from the current
arrangement and not copied to the clipboard.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del

Insert
The contents of the clipboard are inserted at the current
arrangement's position of the in point.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + V

Extract
The section between the in and out points is preserved, and all of the
material in front and behind it are deleted. Use this option to isolate a
specific part of an arrangement for further individual editing.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + P

Form group
Orders all selected objects into groups. As soon as an object
from the group is selected, all other objects in the group will
be highlighted as well so that you can work on them
collectively.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + L

Ungroup objects
This turns all selected objects into free-standing objects again.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + M

www.magix.com
 Menus 267
Wizards
Slideshow Maker
Opens the Slideshow Maker (view page 153)

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + M

Soundtrack Maker
This command opens MAGIX Soundtrack Maker (view page 186).

Keyboard shortcut: W

Travel route animation

This menu entry opens the separate Travel route animation program.
This enables simple creation of animated travel routes with the help of
online maps.

Note: In order to be able to use current map data, maps are fetched
by Travel route animation directly from the Internet. This requires an
active Internet connection.
More information about the program is available in the help file, which
can be opened by pressing the "F1" key.

Mixdown Audio
This option joins all audio objects in one audio file. The sound material
will only occupy one track of the arranger and will hardly affect the
RAM, but it will occupy approximately 10 MB (in stereo) on the hard
drive. This will give you more control over the arranger and more
space for additional objects.

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e.
the loudest part of the wave audio object is identical with the highest
figure of the 16-bit resolution ceiling. This guarantees the same sound
quality, even if you repeat the mix down procedure or you combine
the mix down file with other wave audio objects again and again.

The mix function is very helpful if you want to go on using the

mixdown object. For the final AVI or WAV (or any other multi-media)
file, which is designed for burning a CD or for use on other PCs, use
the "Export arrangement" submenu options from the file menu
instead of the mixdown function.

www.magix.com
268 Menus

Tip: Instead of using the mixdown function, you can use the various
options of th submenu "Export movie" in the File menu to create a
final final *.avi or *.wav (or any other multimedia) file.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + M

Audio and video mixdown

In addition to the "Mix down audio" function (see above), all video
objects including effects, fades, and edits in a single MAGIX video file
(view page 216). If this overloads your CPU, try closing some other
programs.

Edit snap point

If the position of objects, object borders, markers, or the playback
marker is changed with the mouse, these will automatically spring to
certain "key positions" if you get close enough to them. This functions
as a "notch", i.e. even objects in a higher zoomed resolution can be
precisely positioned, without any gaps, which you wouldn’t normally
see in that resolution. Normally, all object borders and all markers
lock to one another.

• Per object, one additional snap point can now be placed within an
object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This is
helpful if you want to show a title at a certain spot in a video object,
for example.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker
at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
• Next, use "Set snap point" to set the point. Likewise, "Delete snap
point" removes a snap point. As soon as you select the option "Set
snap point" at another position it will be moved automatically.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + P

Marker
Set project marker
This option sets a project marker at the current playback position.
More information about project markers is available in the chapter
"Markers" under "Set project marker (view page 117)".

www.magix.com
 Menus 269
Delete project marker
Deletes the selected project marker (view page 117). Project markers
can be deleted and renamed via the context menu.

Set chapter marker

Sets a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker.
This creates a chapter entry in the disc menu, in case you are
planning to burn the movie to CD/DVD.

You can rename your chapter markers by right clicking and selecting
"Rename". The name then appears in the chapter menu (view page
236).

Shortcut: Shift + Enter

Automatic chapter markers

Automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement based on
certain rules. These chapter markers determine the chapters in your
DVD menu. This function is useful if you want to burn your recording
onto disc right away.

There are a few options for automatic chapter generation:

At the beginning of the movie: The movie contains only one chapter

At the object starts in a track...: Every object in a track creates a

chapter. Track 1 is preset.

At the position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance as

faded-in subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.

Provide interval (in minutes)/provide quantity: If the chapters are

separated without any particular method and are just needed for
quicker navigation, you can also insert chapter markers in pre-defined
intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter markers.

Titling the chapter markers: To title the chapter markers, you can use
a user-defined name with consecutive numbers or the object name or
text from the text objects.
Optionally, you can delete existing chapter markers and confine the
automatic chapter marker function to the area between the start and
end markers.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + Enter

www.magix.com
270 Menus
Delete (all) chapter markers
Deletes one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries from
the disc menu. Read more in "Burn screen".

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Enter / Alt + Ctrl + Enter

Marker -> Set range start/end

Sets a range start/end marker at the position of the playback marker.

Keyboard shortcut: I/O

Marker -> Jump to range start/end

Sets the playback marker at the position of the range start/end.

Shortcut: Shift + I/O

Marker -> Reset selected range

Deletes the range start and the range end.

Move screen view

Using these commands, a viewable portion together with the start
marker will be moved in the timeline. You can quickly skip between
different markers (skip, chapter, scene, ad-marker) and object edges.

Keyboard shortcut: See "Keyboard shortcuts", "Arranger". (view

page 336)

Multicam
This command switches to Multicam mode (view page 125).

www.magix.com
 Menus 271

Effects (FX)
Master effects
This menu item accesses the movie's effects settings (view page
157). The settings made in this case will affect the entire film.

Shortcut: Ctrl + B

Video object effects

Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer
videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z

Motion stabilizer
Opens the "Motion stabilizer" dialog for you to correct shaky footage.
Please read the chapter "Motion stabilizer (view page 146)".

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + K

Searching for and removing ads (only in Plus version)

Opens the dialog for searching and removing advertising (view page
115).

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + C

In MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer bearbeiten

Graphic files (BMPs or JPEGs) from the arranger can be post-edited
in an external graphics program. The selected image file is loaded
automatically and, once editing has been completed, is used in the
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 instead of the original material. For this,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 offers the high-performance photo editing
program MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer.

Save photos with effects

This allows you to save photos used in the movie and add the object
effects used in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 (e.g. StoryMaker) to the
photo.

www.magix.com
272 Menus
Create panorama...
Opens the dialog for setting a panorama. Place as many photos in
the correct order as you like, and align brightness and color settings
to get the best results. You should make sure that the photos
harmonize at the transitions.

Video effects
These are the various effects which can be applied to videos and
stills. The effects can be set after an object is selected in the
respective effects dialog which appears. For more information, see
the "Video effects in the Media Pool (view page 130)" chapter.

Video effect templates

This features general templates that can be added to the video
objects via drag & drop and several video mix effects that can be
quickly and easily applied, e.g. bluescreen.

Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by
using zoom or camera movements. For more information, go to the
"Effects and titles" chapter in "Movement effects in Media Pool (view
page 137)".

Movement effect templates

These are templates for movement effects. These can be added from
the Media Pool into the arrangement by double clicking or via drag &
drop.

Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read
the "Video effects" chapter for more details.

Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you
would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This
function is especially useful when photos have black bars around
them, or if they are reduced in size.

Reset background
Resets the background design (view page 272) settings to default
settings.

www.magix.com
 Menus 273
Set as background
Uses the selected photo or video as the background.

Load video effects

This command lets you load a saved effects combination for the
currently selected object. If you have selected multiple objects, then
the effects combination for each object will be applied.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + O

Save video effects

This command lets you save the current effects combination for each
object separately.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + S

Reset video effects

This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely
if you want to undo the changes.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + C

Copy video effects

Effects settings for an object can be copied to the clipboard to add
(view page 273) them to other objects.

Insert video effects

Video effects can be added from other objects to the one selected.
The settings must be copied (view page 273) to the clipboard
beforehand to do so.

Apply video effects to all

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie.

Apply video effects to all of the following

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie which lie behind the selected object.

www.magix.com
274 Menus
Audio object effects
Normalize
The "Normalize audio" function increases the level of the audio object
to the maximum possible without overmodulating the material. To do
this, the largest signal peak in the audio material and the level of the
object are detected so that this point corresponds exactly to 0dB (full
modulation).

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N

Reduce volume
Please see "Reducing volume (view page 178)" in the audio effects
chapter.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + L

Set volume
This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu,
controls the sound volume for individual objects, just like the object
handles in the arranger.

Audio cleaning
Please see "Audio cleaning” (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Sound optimization" on page 162) in the "Audio effects"
chapter

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + W

Echo/Hall
Please see "Reverb/Echo ("Reverb/Delay")" in the chapter "Audio
effects".

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + H

Timestretch/Resample
Read more about this in "Timestretch/Resample (see "Timestretch
and pitchshift")".

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Q

www.magix.com
 Menus 275
Load audio effects
This command lets you load a saved effects combination for the
currently selected object. If you have selected multiple objects, then
the effects combination for each objects will be applied.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + O

Save audio effects

This command lets you save the current effects combination for each
object separately.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + S

Reset audio effects

This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely
if you want to undo the changes.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + K

BPM Wizard
Please see "BPM wizard" in the chapter "Audio". (view page 188)

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + E

Volume curve
The most important object effects curve, allowing the volume to be
immediately accessible. Volume is also located in the Media Pool
under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General", and can also be
animated there.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + X

Title Effects
Title Editor
Opens the title editor (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Title editor" on page 149) for the selected photo,
video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T

www.magix.com
276 Menus
Load Title Effects
You can store the current preset effects combination for each title
object separately and later apply them to other title objects if they
have worked satisfactorily.

Save Title Effects

You can store the current preset effects combination for each title
object separately and apply it later to other title objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + T

Design elements
Multi picture-in-picture: These are various effects presets for image
stacking.

Collages: These work similarly to normal picture-in-picture effects,

but more objects are used. Depending on the collage, arrange the
selected objects one after the other and drag the collage onto the
first object.

Portrait effects: Select individual effects which are especially suited

to vertically formatted photos.

Image objects: These are various image objects like black bars,
thought bubbles for cartoons, etc.

Intros/Outros: These are beginning and end scenes for films with
various themes.

Visuals: Graphical displays of any played sounds which can be

combined with other video material.

Effects library
Using these menu choices, you can control the corresponding
directories in the Media Pool.

Synthesizer
Synthesizers in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can be loaded as individual
objects. This is less of an effect than a technical means of producing
your own sound effects. More information is available in
"Synthesizers".

www.magix.com
 Menus 277

Windows menu
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make
fine adjustments to the position of the selected video or image
objects and their handles – as well as the transition characteristics
(transition type, length). Please read the "Fine adjustment of video
("Trimming")" chapter for more details.

Keyboard shortcut: N

Object trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. Opens up the video
trimmer to help you fine tune the position and the handles of a video
object. Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")"
chapter for more details.

Shortcuts: Q

Mixer
This option allows you to display or conceal the real-time
mixer. You will find further information, especially with regard
to the integration of effects plug-ins, in the chapter "Mixer".

Keyboard shortcut: M

Master audio effect rack

Opens or closes the master effects rack; you can also use the
"Master FX" button in the mixer window for this.

Keyboard shortcut: B

Mastering Suite
This opens the Mastering Suite (view page 172).

Program monitor
Opens and closes the video window. If the standard layout is chosen
the Mediapool can be shown in a freely scalable and moveable
window.

Keyboard shortcut: V

www.magix.com
278 Menus
Media Pool
This option can be used to conceal the Media Pool or make it visible
again.

Keyboard shortcut: F

Project
Shows/Hides the arranger

Reset window arrangement

This option resets the window arrangement to its default state.

Shortcut key: F9

Display settings
See program settings -> "Display presets (view page 316)" in the PDF
manual.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + V

Show movie overview

With this option, you can display an overview of the entire
arrangement on the video screen. It is particularly suitable for long
and complex arrangements to prevent you from losing track. You can
view the whole movie and you are, despite this, able to access the
object you're looking for in a split second – you can zoom in directly
on the video monitor or move around the clip displayed in the
arranger.

Shortcut: Shift + A

Optimize movie view

The zoom level is set to 100% so that you can see every
object and the entire film.

The start and end markers are set to the beginning or end so that the
entire movie can be played.

Shortcut: Shift + B

www.magix.com
 Menus 279
Zoom horizontal
Here you will find a range of functions for altering the visible time axis
section.

Zoom vertical
The number of simultaneously visible tracks can be changed here.
The more tracks are visible, the smaller they will appear.

Close all movies

Closes all opened movies.

Online menu
This is a list of menu entries regarding all of the services that are
available directly from within MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

Tasks menu
In this menu you will find direct solution and short video explanations
on how to perform tasks in different topics. Not only will you find
step-by-step instructions for sound and pictures here, but you also
find quick access to many of functions.

If you click on an entry with a camera symbol, then you will open a
short tutorial video which displays a solution. Entries without camera
symbols offer a solution to the problem immediately.

Help menu
Help
This command is available for almost every feature of the program,
and it opens the "Help" file for the corresponding topic. Use this
command to get help on any of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16's functions.

Keyboard shortcut: F1

www.magix.com
280 Menus
Content
Use the command "Content" in the "Help" menu to open the start
page of the help file. You can read through the help file step-by-step
and jump to specific sections via the tree structure on the right hand
side.

Context help
By choosing the context help entry from the "Help" menu, or
by clicking on the button in the top toolbar, the mouse cursor
will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Then, when you click on any button of the main screen, program help
describing the control element in question will open.

Shortcut key: Alt + F1

Quickstart/Recording/Editing/Burning and exporting tutorial video

Displays tutorial videos on different video editing topics in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16.

Tip: If you are using MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 for the first time, we
recommend you view the tutorial videos first. They will give you a
quick introduction to the most important topics.

Ask questions online in the Knowledge Community

Ask magix.info a question.

Find knowledge & workshops

Have a look at the newest workshops at magix.info and read useful
tips from other MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 users.

Online tutorials
Interesting tutorials and useful tips for working with MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16 can be found on the MAGIX website.
An online connection is required.

www.magix.com
 Menus 281
Get in contact with other users
MAGIX Screenshare allows you to transfer the contents of your
screen to other users (Screen transfer as guest) or view the screens
of other users (Screen transfer as host).

To transfer the contents of your monitor to another user, select the

menu item "Transfer screen as host". The MAGIX Screenshare start
screen will appear. Now click "Start session".

Note: Clicking your name allows you to change it as it appears in the

session. In the start screen, you can also set if you would like to view
the guest's screen as the host via the "Settings" tab under "Options".

Two windows will open. A large one which

shows other screen contents as required,
and a smaller one which displays your
session ID. Provide this number to all users
who would like to view your screen.

Note: The session ID changes with every new session.

If you would like to receive another user's screen contents, you will
require the session ID. Select the menu item "Transfer screen as
guest". In the dialog that opens, enter the session ID you received
and click "Start session".

About MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

Displays copyright info and version number of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
16.

www.magix.com
282 Menus
Register online
This option opens the MAGIX homepage for online registration where
you can register yourself as a MAGIX user.

Registration grants you access to the MAGIX support website (see

support) where various program updates and help programs can be
downloaded.

With the registration form supplied (start menu under "MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16 -> Service and support -> Register") you can register via
post or fax. Simply print it out, fill it in, and send it off!

Online update
Connects directly to the MAGIX online update page where you can
get the latest version of your program.

Download presets for new device

It's possible that your device will not be supported for import or
export of video material by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

The command "Download presets for new device" in the "Help" menu
opens a website containing an up-to-date list of all supported devices
and device versions. Just search for the desired device and click the
corresponding link. The settings for the device will be downloaded
and made available to you in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

Warning: Some browsers display a warning if you try to download an

executable file (.exe). You can ignore this warning.

If your device is not listed on the website, you can report your
unsupported device so that it will be included in later updates.

Download video effects plug-ins

This command lets you download new video effects plug-ins (view
page 143).

www.magix.com
 Menus 283
Display tool tips
Tooltips are small information windows that open up automatically if
the mouse pointer stops briefly on a button or some other area. They
provide information about the function of the button. These
information boxes can be switched on or off with this option.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + F1

Reset program settings to default...

Use this function to reset all program settings you made in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16 to their original settings.

www.magix.com
284 Context menu (right click)

Context menu (right click)

Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object.
It offers functions which are available and can be expected in the
given context.

Video objects
Create frame table (new)
Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain
MPEG files. For example, such problems can be present if the
navigation (positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or
doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in
order to speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway,
MPEG files are normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.

Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer
videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z

Motion stabilizer
Opens the "Motion stabilizer" dialog for you to correct shaky footage.
Please read the chapter "Motion stabilizer (view page 146)".

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + K

Searching for and removing ads (only in Plus version)

Opens the dialog for searching and removing advertising (view page
115).

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + C

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 285
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make
fine adjustments to the position of the selected video or image
objects and their handles – as well as the transition characteristics
(transition type, length). Please read the "Fine adjustment of video
("Trimming")" chapter for more details.

Keyboard shortcut: N

Object trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. Opens up the video
trimmer to help you fine tune the position and the handles of a video
object. Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")"
chapter for more details.

Shortcuts: Q

Edit snap point

If the position of objects, object borders, markers, or the playback
marker is changed with the mouse, these will automatically spring to
certain "key positions" if you get close enough to them. This functions
as a "notch", i.e. even objects in a higher zoomed resolution can be
precisely positioned, without any gaps, which you wouldn’t normally
see in that resolution. Normally, all object borders and all markers
lock to one another.

• Per object, one additional snap point can now be placed within an
object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This is
helpful if you want to show a title at a certain spot in a video object,
for example.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker
at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
• Next, use "Set snap point" to set the point. Likewise, "Delete snap
point" removes a snap point. As soon as you select the option "Set
snap point" at another position it will be moved automatically.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + P

Create still frame

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can create a still frame of an object at the
position of the start marker.

www.magix.com
286 Context menu (right click)
Audio cleaning
Please see "Audio cleaning (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Sound optimization" on page 162)" in the "Audio effects"
chapter

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + W

Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the
"Video effects" chapter.

Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read
the "Video effects" chapter for more details.

Attach to picture position in the video

This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text
object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about
this in the chapter "Magnetic objects (view page 108)".

Interpolation for interlace material

Choose this option to remove interlace artifacts from your video
image. If, for instance, you extract freeze frames from a video, ridge
structures appear in sequences which feature movement.

Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high
contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.

Border cropping adjustment:

Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your
television. Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 158)"
("Effects" menu) will be applied.

Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you
would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This
function is especially useful when photos have black bars around
them, or if they are reduced in size.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 287
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.

Load video effects

This command lets you load a saved effects combination for the
currently selected object. If you have selected multiple objects, then
the effects combination for each object will be applied.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + O

Save video effects

This command lets you save the current effects combination for each
object separately.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + S

Reset video effects

This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely
if you want to undo the changes.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + C

Copy video effects

Effects settings for an object can be copied to the clipboard to add
(view page 273) them to other objects.

Insert video effects

Video effects can be added from other objects to the one selected.
The settings must be copied (view page 273) to the clipboard
beforehand to do so.

www.magix.com
288 Context menu (right click)
Apply video effects to all
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie.

Apply video effects to all of the following

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie which lie behind the selected object.

Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected
object in Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C

Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

Fade in time code

MAGIX Video Pro X can add a time or date ("timecode") to the picture
material. To add a timecode, right click on the video object and
choose the "Fade in date as title" option from the context menu.

• If you're using a DV-AVI file (a digital recording from a camcorder, for

instance), then the recording date will be used from the selected
section.
• If you're using a different file, the creation date will be used as the
timecode.

The title editor is then opened in order to customize the entry.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 289
Object properties
This function displays all of the information about the currently
selected objects such as file name, position on the hard drive, tempo,
etc. The object editor also defines the foreground and background
color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of
object, the elements displayed will vary.

General information

The name of the selected object and the fore/background color for
the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional
information is also displayed about which file the selected object
points to.

Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)

The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of

the video material.

Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

automatically makes suitable settings for this; however, if the video
material is faulty, you may have to make some adjustments yourself. If
playback of the exported movie is very jittery or if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the
source material frames.

Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace

processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed
separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No
interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.

For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace (view page

384)".

Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)

If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be

doubled or halved here. The tempo can be detected using Tempo
and beat recognition (view page 188).

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + E

www.magix.com
290 Context menu (right click)

Image objects
Create frame table (new)
Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain
MPEG files. For example, such problems can be present if the
navigation (positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or
doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in
order to speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway,
MPEG files are normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.

Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer
videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z

Edit snap point

If the position of objects, object borders, markers, or the playback
marker is changed with the mouse, these will automatically spring to
certain "key positions" if you get close enough to them. This functions
as a "notch", i.e. even objects in a higher zoomed resolution can be
precisely positioned, without any gaps, which you wouldn’t normally
see in that resolution. Normally, all object borders and all markers
lock to one another.

• Per object, one additional snap point can now be placed within an
object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This is
helpful if you want to show a title at a certain spot in a video object,
for example.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker
at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
• Next, use "Set snap point" to set the point. Likewise, "Delete snap
point" removes a snap point. As soon as you select the option "Set
snap point" at another position it will be moved automatically.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + P

Change photo length

This dialog gives exact values regarding the display duration for the
selected photo. You may select multiple photos beforehand to
change their display duration at once.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 291
Edit in MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer
Graphics files (BMPs or JPEGs) can be edited in MAGIX Xtreme
Photo Designer. The selected image file is loaded automatically and,
once editing has been completed, is used in the MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16 instead of the original material.

Save photos with effects

This allows you to save photos used in the movie and add the object
effects used in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 (e.g. StoryMaker) to the
photo.

Create panorama...
Opens the dialog for setting a panorama. Place as many photos in
the correct order as you like, and align brightness and color settings
to get the best results. You should make sure that the photos
harmonize at the transitions.

Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the
"Video effects" chapter.

Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read
the "Video effects" chapter for more details.

Attach to picture position in the video

This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text
object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about
this in the chapter "Magnetic objects (view page 108)".

Cut automatically to fit screen

This function ensures that images don't have black edges (in case
they don't fit into the given format).

Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high
contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.

www.magix.com
292 Context menu (right click)
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your
television. Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 158)"
("Effects" menu) will be applied.

Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you
would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This
function is especially useful when photos have black bars around
them, or if they are reduced in size.

Export to MAGIX Online Album

Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and
music into the album to share them with your friends and
acquaintances in the Internet. The assistant will lead you step-by-step
through the uploading process. After the process is finished, you can
access your updated MAGIX Online Album.

Export to MAGIX Online Print Service

Use MAGIX Online Print Service to order high-quality photo prints or
fantastic printed photo gifts of your valuable digital photos simply with
one click.

Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.

Load video effects

This command lets you load a saved effects combination for the
currently selected object. If you have selected multiple objects, then
the effects combination for each object will be applied.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + O

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 293
Save video effects
This command lets you save the current effects combination for each
object separately.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + S

Reset video effects

This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely
if you want to undo the changes.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + C

Copy video effects

Effects settings for an object can be copied to the clipboard to add
(view page 273) them to other objects.

Insert video effects

Video effects can be added from other objects to the one selected.
The settings must be copied (view page 273) to the clipboard
beforehand to do so.

Apply video effects to all

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie.

Apply video effects to all of the following

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie which lie behind the selected object.

Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected
object in Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C

www.magix.com
294 Context menu (right click)
Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

Object properties
This function displays all of the information about the currently
selected objects such as file name, position on the hard drive, tempo,
etc. The object editor also defines the foreground and background
color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of
object, the elements displayed will vary.

General information

The name of the selected object and the fore/background color for
the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional
information is also displayed about which file the selected object
points to.

Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)

The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of

the video material.

Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

automatically makes suitable settings for this; however, if the video
material is faulty, you may have to make some adjustments yourself. If
playback of the exported movie is very jittery or if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the
source material frames.

Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace

processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed
separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No
interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 295
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace (view page
384)".

Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)

If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be

doubled or halved here. The tempo can be detected using Tempo
and beat recognition (view page 188).

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + E

Transitions
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make
fine adjustments to the position of the selected video or image
objects and their handles – as well as the transition characteristics
(transition type, length). Please read the "Fine adjustment of video
("Trimming")" chapter for more details.

Keyboard shortcut: N

Settings...
A dialog with the settings for the corresponding transition will be
displayed. Depending on the transition, different settings are
available.

www.magix.com
296 Context menu (right click)

Audio objects
Create wave form
In most cases, the waveform display of an audio file will not be
required. However, if you require this, e.g. to navigate while cutting
video, a waveform display can be produced manually via this
function.

Normalize
The "Normalize audio" function increases the level of the audio object
to the maximum possible without overmodulating the material. To do
this, the largest signal peak in the audio material and the level of the
object are detected so that this point corresponds exactly to 0dB (full
modulation).

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N

Reduce volume
Please see "Reducing volume (view page 178)" in the audio effects
chapter.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + L

Set volume
This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu,
controls the sound volume for individual objects, just like the object
handles in the arranger.

Edit snap point

If the position of objects, object borders, markers, or the playback
marker is changed with the mouse, these will automatically spring to
certain "key positions" if you get close enough to them. This functions
as a "notch", i.e. even objects in a higher zoomed resolution can be
precisely positioned, without any gaps, which you wouldn’t normally
see in that resolution. Normally, all object borders and all markers
lock to one another.

• Per object, one additional snap point can now be placed within an
object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This is
helpful if you want to show a title at a certain spot in a video object,
for example.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 297
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker
at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
• Next, use "Set snap point" to set the point. Likewise, "Delete snap
point" removes a snap point. As soon as you select the option "Set
snap point" at another position it will be moved automatically.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + P

Audio cleaning
Please see "Audio cleaning (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Sound optimization" on page 162)" in the "Audio effects"
chapter

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + W

Echo/Hall
Please see "Reverb/Echo ("Reverb/Delay")" in the chapter "Audio
effects".

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + H

Timestretch/Resample
Read more about this in "Timestretch/Resample (see "Timestretch
and pitchshift")".

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Q

Load audio effects

This command lets you load a saved effects combination for the
currently selected object. If you have selected multiple objects, then
the effects combination for each objects will be applied.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + O

Save audio effects

This command lets you save the current effects combination for each
object separately.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + S

www.magix.com
298 Context menu (right click)
Reset audio effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely
if you want to undo the changes.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + K

Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected
object in Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C

Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

BPM Wizard
Please see "BPM wizard" in the chapter "Audio". (view page 188)

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + E

Volume curve
The most important object effects curve, allowing the volume to be
immediately accessible. Volume is also located in the Media Pool
under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General", and can also be
animated there.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + X

Audio effects curves

This feature provides direct access to diverse object effects, and
these can be automated using a curve. All of the audio effects listed

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 299
here are found in the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects ->
General".

Snap to other audio objects

Video objects grouped with audio objects can be used to synchronize
recordings from different camera perspectives.

For more information, please see the topic "Synchronize video

objects using the audio track".

Split stereo objects into mono objects

An audio object in stereo format can be split into two mono objects
very easily using this function. The original track will then feature the
audio object with the left channel, and an automatically added track
will feature the object with the right channel.

This is useful if the channels were switched by accident during

recording, i.e. due to incorrect cabling. In this case, simply open the
mixer and set the pan setting to the correct position for each channel.

Display track curves

The most recently selected track curve is displayed on the object for
editing. Use of a curve causes the parameters set in the mixer to be
disregarded.

Note: The track curves of audio objects can be animated in the same
way as video effects. Read more about this in the chapter "Animating
objects (view page 178)".

Reset track curves

All track curves can be reset with this function. The settings made in
the mixer will be applied to the track again.

Caution! Before applying this function, make sure none of the track
curves will be need in the future.

Export to MAGIX Online Album

Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and
music into the album to share them with your friends and
acquaintances in the Internet. The assistant will lead you step-by-step

www.magix.com
300 Context menu (right click)
through the uploading process. After the process is finished, you can
access your updated MAGIX Online Album.

Object properties
This function displays all of the information about the currently
selected objects such as file name, position on the hard drive, tempo,
etc. The object editor also defines the foreground and background
color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of
object, the elements displayed will vary.

General information

The name of the selected object and the fore/background color for
the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional
information is also displayed about which file the selected object
points to.

Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)

The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of

the video material.

Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

automatically makes suitable settings for this; however, if the video
material is faulty, you may have to make some adjustments yourself. If
playback of the exported movie is very jittery or if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the
source material frames.

Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace

processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed
separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No
interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.

For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace (view page

384)".

Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)

If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be

doubled or halved here. The tempo can be detected using Tempo
and beat recognition (view page 188).

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + E

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 301

Text objects
Title Editor
Opens the title editor (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Title editor" on page 149) for the selected photo,
video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T

Disable effects
All effects applied to the text will be deactivated.

Edit snap point

If the position of objects, object borders, markers, or the playback
marker is changed with the mouse, these will automatically spring to
certain "key positions" if you get close enough to them. This functions
as a "notch", i.e. even objects in a higher zoomed resolution can be
precisely positioned, without any gaps, which you wouldn’t normally
see in that resolution. Normally, all object borders and all markers
lock to one another.

• Per object, one additional snap point can now be placed within an
object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This is
helpful if you want to show a title at a certain spot in a video object,
for example.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker
at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
• Next, use "Set snap point" to set the point. Likewise, "Delete snap
point" removes a snap point. As soon as you select the option "Set
snap point" at another position it will be moved automatically.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + P

Load title template

A dialog for loading a title template will open.

Save as title template

This allows you to create your own templates using your title
creations. The function "Load title template" enables these templates
to be used again quickly.

www.magix.com
302 Context menu (right click)
Save as special effect
This function saves the title with all objects that have been grouped
(view page 266) with the title object. This enables you to create title
templates that contain all required overlay objects.

Convert to 3D title
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object, and
a limited version of MAGIX 3D Maker will open.

Attach to picture position in the video

This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text
object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about
this in the chapter "Magnetic objects (view page 108)".

Border cropping adjustment:

Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your
television. Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 158)"
("Effects" menu) will be applied.

Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected
object in Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C

Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

Object properties
This function displays all of the information about the currently
selected objects such as file name, position on the hard drive, tempo,

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 303
etc. The object editor also defines the foreground and background
color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of
object, the elements displayed will vary.

General information

The name of the selected object and the fore/background color for
the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional
information is also displayed about which file the selected object
points to.

Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)

The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of

the video material.

Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

automatically makes suitable settings for this; however, if the video
material is faulty, you may have to make some adjustments yourself. If
playback of the exported movie is very jittery or if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the
source material frames.

Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace

processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed
separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No
interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.

For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace (view page

384)".

Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)

If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be

doubled or halved here. The tempo can be detected using Tempo
and beat recognition (view page 188).

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + E

www.magix.com
304 Context menu (right click)

MAGIX 3D Maker objects

Edit settings...
A limited MAGIX 3D Maker version is opened to edit the selected
object.

Edit snap point

If the position of objects, object borders, markers, or the playback
marker is changed with the mouse, these will automatically spring to
certain "key positions" if you get close enough to them. This functions
as a "notch", i.e. even objects in a higher zoomed resolution can be
precisely positioned, without any gaps, which you wouldn’t normally
see in that resolution. Normally, all object borders and all markers
lock to one another.

• Per object, one additional snap point can now be placed within an
object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This is
helpful if you want to show a title at a certain spot in a video object,
for example.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker
at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
• Next, use "Set snap point" to set the point. Likewise, "Delete snap
point" removes a snap point. As soon as you select the option "Set
snap point" at another position it will be moved automatically.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + P

Create still frame

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 can create a still frame of an object at the
position of the start marker.

Audio cleaning
Please see "Audio cleaning (More Informationen can be found in the
section "Sound optimization" on page 162)" in the "Audio effects"
chapter

Keyboard shortcut: Shift + W

Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the
"Video effects" chapter.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 305
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read
the "Video effects" chapter for more details.

Attach to picture position in the video

This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text
object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about
this in the chapter "Magnetic objects (view page 108)".

Interpolation for interlace material

Choose this option to remove interlace artifacts from your video
image. If, for instance, you extract freeze frames from a video, ridge
structures appear in sequences which feature movement.

Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high
contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.

Border cropping adjustment:

Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your
television. Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 158)"
("Effects" menu) will be applied.

Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you
would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This
function is especially useful when photos have black bars around
them, or if they are reduced in size.

Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.

www.magix.com
306 Context menu (right click)
Load video effects
This command lets you load a saved effects combination for the
currently selected object. If you have selected multiple objects, then
the effects combination for each object will be applied.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + O

Save video effects

This command lets you save the current effects combination for each
object separately.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + S

Reset video effects

This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely
if you want to undo the changes.

Shortcut: Alt + Shift + C

Copy video effects

Effects settings for an object can be copied to the clipboard to add
(view page 273) them to other objects.

Insert video effects

Video effects can be added from other objects to the one selected.
The settings must be copied (view page 273) to the clipboard
beforehand to do so.

Apply video effects to all

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie.

Apply video effects to all of the following

The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in
your movie which lie behind the selected object.

www.magix.com
 Context menu (right click) 307
Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected
object in Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use
the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C

Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X

Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected
object in "Timeline" mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del

Fade in time code

MAGIX Video Pro X can add a time or date ("timecode") to the picture
material. To add a timecode, right click on the video object and
choose the "Fade in date as title" option from the context menu.

• If you're using a DV-AVI file (a digital recording from a camcorder, for

instance), then the recording date will be used from the selected
section.
• If you're using a different file, the creation date will be used as the
timecode.

The title editor is then opened in order to customize the entry.

Object properties
This function displays all of the information about the currently
selected objects such as file name, position on the hard drive, tempo,
etc. The object editor also defines the foreground and background
color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of
object, the elements displayed will vary.

www.magix.com
308 Context menu (right click)
General information

The name of the selected object and the fore/background color for
the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional
information is also displayed about which file the selected object
points to.

Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)

The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of

the video material.

Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16

automatically makes suitable settings for this; however, if the video
material is faulty, you may have to make some adjustments yourself. If
playback of the exported movie is very jittery or if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the
source material frames.

Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace

processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed
separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No
interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.

For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace (view page

384)".

Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)

If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be

doubled or halved here. The tempo can be detected using Tempo
and beat recognition (view page 188).

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + E

www.magix.com
 Program settings 309

Program settings
All basic settings for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 are made in
this window. This allows you to influence the settings in
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 in detail.

Keyboard shortcut: P

Play

Audio playback
Driver selection WAV/Direct Sound: Here you can specify whether
you wish to use the standard Windows driver for the sound card or
the DirectSound driver. DirectSound has the advantage that the
sound output (for all modern sound cards or onboard sound chips)
can also be used by other programs open simultaneously. WAV
drivers are recommended if the CPU load is higher, as the larger
buffers allow better handling of the load peaks (otherwise this would
cause crackling).

Output device: Use this option to specify which sound card plays the
wave audio objects. This is especially important if you have multiple

www.magix.com
310 Program settings
sound cards installed on your computer, e.g. "onboard sound" as
well as an additional sound card.

Audio buffer: In order to allow smooth playback of a complex

arrangement, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 creates a RAM data buffer
into which the current data is loaded. Therefore it is not the entire
arrangement that is pre-processed; far more, processing occurs
step-by-step.

Multi-track audio buffer/preview audio buffer: Here you can specify

the size of the buffer that should be used for playback of the entire
arrangement or for previewing waves in the file manager.

Number of buffers: Here you can specify how many buffers you want
to us. More buffers increase the safety for crackle-free playback of
the arrangement, but also increase the memory requirement. If played
via Direct Sound (see Settings in the "Playback parameter" dialog),
only one buffer is automatically used.

Note: If response and loading times are too slow, reduce the buffer
size; otherwise increase the buffer size if the audio playback is
choppy or if real-time errors occur. As error-free playback is usually
more important than fast reaction times, the buffer size should be
raised to 16384 or 32768 if dropouts occur. The possible number of
buffer updates is between 2 an 10.

Write realtime audio to wave file: If this option is activated, the entire
soundtrack can be mixed live and recorded simultaneously. During
playback, for example, you can therefore control mixer fades and
effects live. All realtime activities are recorded and saved in a
separate WAV file.

MIDI playback
With MIDI device you can specify which soundcard or which MIDI
interface should be used for MIDI playback.

Video playback parameters

Video cache size: The video cache ensures a smooth on-screen
playback of files and effects by preloading them. The ideal setting
depends on your system. It is best to experiment to see what results
in the best playback performance.

www.magix.com
 Program settings 311
Arranger
Autoscroll during playback: If autoscroll is activated, the screen view
automatically shifts when the playback cursor reaches the right edge
of the screen, which is particularly useful for longer arrangements.
You may select the size of the scrolling steps from either "Fast"
(whole pages) or "Slow" (half pages).

Warning: Scrolling requires constant recalculation of the screen view,

which may lead to interrupted playback if the amount of system RAM
is too low. If this does happen, then you should deactivate autoscroll.

Display: Displaying objects in timeline mode allows your to simplify

the performance enhancement. You can decide whether to display
preview frames for video objects across the entire object, or just for
the first and last frames. For audio objects you can hide the wave
form display. This is particularly recommended for MPEG data
streams.

Update in background: The update if the object display after move

and zoom operations in the arranger is performed in the background
in order to let you work smoothly.

Image playback: Resizing high-quality image material: You can use

this feature to improve the quality when resizing, particularly
downsizing to less than half of the original size as in picture-in-picture
effects. This also requires more CPU power.

www.magix.com
312 Program settings

Directory settings

Set the paths where

• the projects are saved

• imported and exported data and recordings are stored
• exported (Export) and imported (Import) files and recordings
(Recordings) and virtual VCR recordings (TV recordings) are stored
• temporary files are stored (which are needed for regular operation)
• the EXE files for external audio and the image editor are located,
which can be started via the context or effects menu (PLUS version
only)

www.magix.com
 Program settings 313

Video/Audio
In this tab you will find all settings concerning video and audio files.

Video standard
PAL is used in Europe, the US and Japan use NTSC.

Movie display
The resolutions that can be set here concern only the picture display
in the arranger. If playback becomes jerky, we recommend entering a
lower value. The quality of exported videos is not influenced by this.

Automatic interlace processing: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 normally

detects whether the loaded video files were recorded with the
interlace or progressive processes automatically, and half-image
format is detected for interlaced movies. In case automatic detection
fails, you can deactivate it here and set the object properties (view
page 289) of video objects to the correct process.

Video options
Extract sound from video: If a video file contains video and audio
data the audio track of the video will also be imported if this option is
activated. It will be displayed as an audio object in the arrangement
below the video object. Both are automatically grouped together. If
the audio track has to be edited or replaced later, you first have to
ungroup it ("Ungroup" button in the tool bar or via the "Edit" menu).

Allow user-defined names for sound extracted from VOBs: Specifies

whether a warning will be displayed for each imported file during VOB
import (VTS_01_1.vob) allowing you to enter a name for your movie
(check box "checked") or whether you would like an automatically
generated name to be assigned (check box "unchecked").

Automatically copy exported material to clipboard: This option is

particularly useful when used with other programs, such as Microsoft
Powerpoint. If activated, a multimedia file you have just created is
immediately copied to the clipboard and can be used in other
applications. For instance, you can insert it into an opened MS
Powerpoint template by pressing "Ctrl + V".

www.magix.com
314 Program settings
Adjust 4:3 aspect ratio to screen: This option automatically
customizes photos that have an approximate 4:3 aspect ratio to the
television's 4:3 picture. The pictures are therefore easily stretched or
compressed. This inevitably brings about distortions in the picture. If
this option is deactivated, black bars appear to the sides.

Automatically preview exported clips: This option starts the clip

immediately after exporting for verification.

Automatically load/save picture effects from JPX file: If you have

edited pictures using another MAGIX program (e.g. MAGIX Digital
Photo Maker), then a .jpx description file is saved along with the
image which contains information about effects editing and texts. This
option adds that information into your editing process.

Use picture effects when exporting to MAGIX Online Services: If this

option is selected, all the picture effects are included with the sent
file.

Hardware acceleration for 3D effects: Here you can (de)activate

hardware acceleration of your graphics card for 3D effects. You can
find more information about this topic in the 3D fades (view page 110)
chapter.

Automatically create frametable during importing: Sometimes,

rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files.
For example, such problems can be present if the navigation
(positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or doesn't
function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in
order to speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway,
MPEG files are normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.

Reduce bitmap resolution for preview: The resolution of image files is

reduced during playback to decrease required memory. This requires
less computing power than playback in full resolution; full resolution is
always calculated during export.

www.magix.com
 Program settings 315

System

Dialogs: In its newly installed state, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 displays
a number of security queries in various parts of the program. Each
one can be switched off by clicking the small box at the bottom that
says "Don't show this message again". To display these warning
messages select the Reactivate dialogs option.

Import formats: You can unselect file formats that you never use, and
these will no longer be imported. Please keep in mind that for some
file types (AVI, WMA) several import modules exist, and MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16 uses the fastest one in each case. If you experience
problems during the import of certain files, you can experiment with
deactivation of certain import modules, forcing the program to use
the slower, but more compatible import module.

Start file preview for...: Unselects automatic file preview start for
Media Pool files and certain file types.

Still frame duration: Specifies how long a still frame will be shown
normally during BMP or JPEG file import. For single frame sequence
import select the duration of 1 frame.

www.magix.com
316 Program settings
Save interval: The interval at which autosave projects will be
periodically saved.

Layout: Determines whether MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 should start

with the Import or the Edit interface.

Automatic preview during transition switch: Ifthis option is activated

a short preview of the transition effect will be quickly played between
two photos when you select a new transition.

Use Title Editor with high resolution as default: The Title Editor is
used in high resolution by default. The representation of titles is
improved, but this also results in a longer loading time for movies.

Display templates

These presets provide a collection of useful configurations for display

on the monitor. On systems with only a single connected monitor,
only the first two are practical. The presets are explained on the right
side of the dialog. All window properties of the arranger, program
monitor, etc. can still be changed manually after the application of a
preset.

www.magix.com
 Program settings 317

Display options

Video output to DV device

Video output on a DV device: This option displays your arranger view
on your TV via your DV camera. This is useful if your graphics card
doesn't have a TV output. However, since your PC must then
compress the video signal in real time in DV-AVI format and in
addition to processing all real-time effects, so you need to have a
powerful PC for jitter-free playback. Even if your computer is not
particularly powerful, you can still use this function to see how your
video looks on your TV screen, since the analog video output signal
of a good DV camera is better than the TV output of an average
graphics card.

Playback in the Arranger/Preview and playback in video recorder

You can set the playback mode separately for the arranger (including
all preview windows and effect dialogs), and the preview monitors
during recording and in the video recorder.

Video mode
Standard playback (video for windows): This is the standard mode
that functions on all systems.
Direct 3D (hardware mixer): This mode provides an extreme increase
in speed by letting the mixing, many effects, and various transitions
be calculated directly on the graphics card. Depending on the

www.magix.com
318 Program settings
graphics card, performance can increase by 300%. The graphics
card will not be used during export.

Note: To use this mode the graphics card must posses at least 128
MB own memory. You will need to install Direct 3D 9 or higher, and
the graphics card driver must support "High Level Pixel Shader
Language 2.0". MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 checks the corresponding
properties when this mode is selected, and switches it off if
necessary.

Standard mode (overlay mixer): In this mode you can use a

hardware-like de-interlacing for the output on your PC screen or
progressive scan-capable projector. Playback of recordings with
interlace turns out much better.
Alternative mode (video mixing renderer 9): This mode uses the
hardware de-interlacing function of modern graphics cards together
with DirectX 9. Make sure that you are using the most recent version
of your graphics card driver, which must be compatible with DirectX 9
to function properly. This mode works better than the standard mode
(overlay mixer) only for a few graphics card models.
Image formation in Vertical Blank Intervals (VBI)
The image formation takes place in the vertical blank intervals of the
monitor signal (or the connected TV signal). This helps avoid image
interruptions. Warning: Because of the necessary waiting time on the
next VBI, this process adds significant computation time!
You can deactivate this option for digital displays such as TFT
monitors. In "Overlay" mode, image formation occurs exclusively via
VBI.

Acceleration for high-resolution MPEG2 files

This option can be selected only in the "Hardware acceleration (Direct
3D)" video mode and indicates that videos in MPEG-2 format will be
processed directly from the graphics card GPU. Depending on the
graphics card performance, an improvement of up to 300% can be
achieved!

De-interlacing
In the DirectShow modes "Overlay mixer" and "Video mixing renderer
9", you can activate hardware de-interlacing with your graphics card.
For general information on de-interlacing and the options
"Top/Bottom field first", please read the corresponding article "De-
interlacing (view page 384)".

www.magix.com
 Problems and solutions 319

Problems and solutions

File will not load

If files cannot be loaded, this means that the format is either no
supported by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 and the corresponding codec
must first be activated. Read the section "Import formats (view page
19)" or "Activate additional functions (view page 343)".

In case of AVI files, it is possible that the necessary codec in not

installed. For more, please refer to "General tips for AVI videos (view
page 347)" in the appendix "Digital video and storage devices".

Tip: To find out which codecs are used in the movie file, different help
programs are available. An example for this is "GSpot" or "AVIcodec".

Choppy or uneven playback

Don't panic if the picture on your screen is choppy or uneven. The
finished product will look perfect and play smoothly. Don't forget that
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 calculates all effects in real time. This lets
you see for yourself what sort of influence each of the effects will have
on your video footage. Some effects make even today's high-
performance PCs work quite hard, and often, a steady, continuous
video stream is simply not possible on your PC. The final product,
free from previous choppiness, is only available after rendering it to
DVD or exporting it. For that reason, you should first edit the movie in
its raw version without effects. The preview generally delivers a
steady picture, allowing you to work quickly and quietly. Towards the
end, you can add effects to your movies to give them a special touch
of Hollywood!

www.magix.com
320 Problems and solutions

Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto

Remix Assistant
Problem: The playback stutters, the metronome is suspended, the
computer is overloaded... (on older computers.)

Remedy: We recommend changing to wave drivers ("P" key,

"Playback parameter" dialog) instead of DirectSound.

Problem: The metronome does not work and there are no lines on
the the wave-shaped display.

Probable cause: The material does not contain beats or the song
contains a passage without beats.

Remedy: The song should be limited in such a way that only rhythmic
passages are contained.

Possible 2nd reason: Inaccurate tapping or a false BPM value has

been entered.

Remedy: Try the tempo correction buttons or tap until the "locked"
condition is attained.

Problem: The metronome sounds inaccurately or is jerky, the lines in

the wave-shaped display are irregular and thinly drawn.

Activation problems
Problem: The entered code is incorrect (telephone activation)

Make sure your entry is correct; in most cases a typo is to blame.

If the code is entered correctly, dial the number of our Call Center.
Our coworkers will gladly help you.

The MAGIX website won't open

Check your Internet connection; you may have to use manual dial-up.

The form for ordering via post/fax won't open

• Check that an adequate text editing program is installed and

activated (for example, MS Word).

www.magix.com
 Problems and solutions 321
I still haven't received an email with the activation code

• Check that your inbox isn't full.

• Have a look in your spam folder.

You can always send questions via email to our support whenever
you like. Please have the following information at hand so that we can
assist you as quickly and as specifically as possible.

• Complete product name

• Exact version number (to be found in the about box in the "About"
menu item of the "Help" menu)
• Encoder/Decoder name
• Your user code (accessible via the "Activate via post/fax" dialog)

Problem: I installed my MAGIX program onto my new computer or

built a new hard disk (sound card, memory...) into my old computer.
Now my activation code is no longer accepted.

Activation is linked to a specific computer. Changes to the

computer's hardware, for example, integrating a larger hard disk can
lead to the computer no longer being recognized as the one for which
the activation code has been calculated. This will most likely happen if
you install MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 on a new computer. If this is the
case, simply request a new activation code. Since you're already
registered as a MAGIX customer, you won't have to pay for another
activation.
Online: When registering on the MAGIX website use your existing
MAGIX login details.
Post/fax: Print out the order form again and send it to the address or
fax number stated.

www.magix.com
322 Online functions

Online functions

Integrated browser
The integrated browser offers many useful functions that help you
collect material for using in your project. All kinds of media can be
collected – images, videos, sound or simply text can be all integrated
using the built-in browser with great results.

Tip: You must have an Internet connection to use the full range of
options offered by the integrated browser.

Open browser
The integrated browser is opened by
clicking on the "Internet media" button in
the Media Pool (see Media).

Navigation in the browser

One page back: Switches to the previous page.

One page forward: Switches back to the page before the

"One page back" button was pressed.

Stop: Stops loading the selected page.

Reload: The current page will be reloaded.

Home: Returns to the home page.

In the address header, next to the navigation buttons, you can simply
enter an Internet address like http://www.magix.com. Press the enter
button and the corresponding page will be loaded.

www.magix.com
 Online functions 323
Loading Internet media
The buttons described here are used to collect and load media
directly from the Internet into the current film. The corresponding
functions can be found in the context menu of the browser.

Save selected text: The selected text will be saved. It can

then be edited using the title editor (view page 149).

Start screen capture: Opens the capture dialog for starting

screen capture.

Download selected images: The selected images will be

saved to your computer.

Import screen capture of the opened Internet page: The

loaded Internet page will be saved as an image file.

Start audio recording: A dialog for audio recording opens.

Hint: For recording from the Internet, it is important that the

sound card is selected as the sound source.

Accept media after download

This option makes sure that the downloaded media are loaded into
the current movie right away.

Define the path for saving Internet media.

To define the path for saving Internet media, simply click on the folder
symbol and navigate to the desired folder. Confirm your selection with
OK.

www.magix.com
324 Online functions

MAGIX News Center

MAGIX can supply you with all of the latest information about
your software. In the MAGIX News Center, you will find all of
the links to current online tutorials as well as tips & tricks on
individual topics or software application examples.

You will also be informed of the availability of brand new updates and
patches for your program as well as special offers, contests, and
surveys.

The news is split into three color-coded sections:

• Green for practical tips & tricks for your software

• Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates for your
product
• Red for special offers, contests, and surveys
• And if there are no new messages, then the button will be grey

All available information is shown as soon as you click on MAGIX

News Center. If you click on one of the news items you will be
forwarded to the corresponding website.

Online
MAGIX Online World offers a wide range of online services for digital
photography, video, music, media backup/security, and connecting
desktop PCs with mobile handsets and the web.

For more information, please go to the menu Online > MAGIX Online
World overview or surf to the MAGIX Online World website.

Catooh – the Online Content Library

Catooh provides you with high-quality photos, videos, and music for
every theme, expanded by intelligent iContent with professional
Soundpools, DVD menu templates, and brilliant MAGIX ShowMaker
styles to help you make your photo, video, and music projects reality.
All of this is available directly from your MAGIX software.

Just choose "Online" from the menu "Catooh" to set up an Internet

connection.

www.magix.com
 Online functions 325
Browse through the thematically sorted categories or view the results
directly by entering a keyword. After downloading, you can drag the
objects from the Media Pool directly into your arrangement.

Tip: Read the introduction online

http://rdir.magix.net/?page=JRF6LASAR2Z3!

Import media backup

iContent (for example, 3D transitions) which you buy and download
from Catooh is stored directly in your central My files\MAGIX
Downloads\Backup directory. If you have downloaded these files
from other MAGIX programs, then you can use the command "Import
media backup" to make them accessible for use in MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro 16.

MAGIX Online Album

Impress your friends and family in minutes with your own photos and
videos as your own your personal photo & video website:
http://first_name.last_name.magix.net.

MAGIX Online Album lets you put your favorite photos online directly
from within MAGIX products like MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16, or mobile
phones with built-in cameras, and then send a link to them to your
friends via email. All photos are immediately available from anywhere
in the world on a professionally-designed photo website, in well-
organized photo galleries, as full-screen slideshows, or in the form of
a personal photo e-card.

• Personalized album website in many designs,

• unique Internet address (URL),
• upload your pictures directly from a camera phone, send the link,
and share the picture with other camera phone users,
• full-screen online slideshows with fade effects and music,
• send individual designer e-cards with your own photos,
• Share your photos with friends, including address management and
password protection for private albums.

MAGIX Online Album is available in three versions, of which the

smallest (the FREE album with 500 MB webspace for your photos) is
entirely free.

The larger versions (CLASSIC or PREMIUM) are available for a

monthly charge, but also come with many handy features, such as a

www.magix.com
326 Online functions
faster website, 2 GB or 5 GB storage space, more website designs or
access by mobile phone/PDA. More information about prices and
features is available at http://www.magix-photos.com
http://www.magix-photos.com.

Upload images from slideshow

1. Select still image and place the start marker at the position of the
image which you want to upload from your slideshow.
2. Then, select "Online -> MAGIX Online Album -> Load image from
slideshows" in the menu.

In order to upload photos to your MAGIX Online Album, simply log in

using your email address. Naturally, access is protected via your
personal password. If you still don't have a password, click on
"Register now".

Using your MAGIX Online Media Manager, you can quickly manage
your photo website, upload photos and music, create new albums,
add designs and text, and much more.

Using "Upload movie as video" you can present your slideshow with
fades, music, and all other effects as a playable video in the Internet.

1. Design your slideshow.

2. Save your movies, and then under "<Service_name_OFA>" select
"Online -> Upload slideshow as video".

Now you just have to follow the instructions on the screen to finish
the upload process.

Upload slideshow as audio: With this option, you can present only
the audio of your slideshow in your online album.

1. Design your slideshow.

2. Save your movies, and then under "<Service_name_OFA>" select
"Online -> Upload audio from slideshow".

Now you just have to follow the instructions on the screen to finish
the upload process.

The following options are also available:

www.magix.com
 Online functions 327
Send e-cards and photo emails

Send your photos as unique ecards with great designs or as a photo

email to your friends and family.

Order photo prints and gifts

Order paper prints or great photo gifts from MAGIX Online Album and
have them delivered directly to your home, or pick them up from a
photo lab in your area. Delivery time is usually just 2 - 3 days. More
about MAGIX Online Print Service (view page 327)

You can also read the FAQ (frequently asked questions) on the
Internet. http://rdir.magix.net/?page=SLGASOGBT63Z

MAGIX Online Print Service

MAGIX Online Print Service lets you order paper prints and photo gifts
(t-shirts, mugs, etc.) directly from within MAGIX programs such as
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 or via www.magix.com. Upload your
photos with a click and have the developed photos delivered to your
home within days.

Order photo prints and gifts

Order real paper prints or great photo gifts straight from your MAGIX
Online Album and have them delivered directly to your home or pick
them up (no shipping costs) from your nearest photo developer.

Delivery usually takes 2 - 3 days.

More about MAGIX Online Print Service

• Order your valuable digital photos in impressive quality on premium

photo paper from a digital photo printing specialist
• Brilliant prints on premium photo paper in all formats
• Impressive picture quality; true-to-color for up to 100 years
• Huge selection of great photo gifts (t-shirts, mugs, calendars, and
much more)

www.magix.com
328 Online functions
• Includes MAGIX Photo Manager for conveniently ordering your
photos
• Real prints and great photo gifts of your digital pictures – it's that
easy

1. Select photos
Take your time and select your favorite photos from the program and
optimize them for best results. Remove redeye, enhance colors and
contrast, and much more. All offline and on your PC!

Then simply select MAGIX Online Print Service from the "Online"
menu and "Send selected".

2. Select format and quantity

Now select the desired number and the image format (e.g. 10x15) or
photo gift (mug, t-shirt). Do you have a voucher? Then click on "Use
voucher" and enter your voucher code.

3. Specify zoom
One great option is the crop function for your prints. To use it click on
the button "Edit photo". Here you can set the format (small 2:3 or
digital 3:4) you would like for your photos.

You can see how your photo prints will look in the preview window.
Using the selection frame you can crop your photos individually.

4. Submit order
Once you have made all your settings click on the "Submit order"
button. Now all you have to do is enter your details and the type of
delivery. Your order will now be dispatched online.

You will now receive an order confirmation by email including a link

where you can find up-to-date information about your order anytime.

Delivery straight to your doorstep

Have your prints and photo gifts conveniently delivered straight to
your doorstep or pick them up from a photo retailer close to you to
save postage. Orders usually take 2-3 days.

www.magix.com
 Online functions 329
magix.info
Share your knowledge & get answers This MAGIX service offers you
and the MAGIX Community at large a central platform for exchanging
knowledge, photos, videos, and music, for discussing and evaluating,
for communicating with one another, for presenting yourself, and
networking with other members.

You will find the sections "Questions & Answers", "Show & Discuss",
"Online Training", and "Chat" where you can play an active or passive
role in the MAGIX Community. For this there's not only the
www.magix.info http://www.magix.info/uk portal, but magix.info
directly in your product.

Ask questions online

If you have questions or problems with your MAGIX program or you're

looking for tips & tricks concerning multimedia, then you're at the
right place.

Display all questions & answers...

Use the questions which other community members have asked and
the collective knowledge of the answers to improve your own working
methods, to solve problems, and to get to know the details of MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16.

Launch the online training center

Learn not only theoretically, but also practically what the program is
capable of: "learning by doing", quickly and uncomplicated.

Let your friends view the contents of your MAGIX.info screen over
the Internet on their PCs.

Ideal for viewing photos and videos together or for receiving support
for questions arising during your creative workflow while using the
program (a licensed client will be installed for this purpose).

www.magix.com
330 Online functions
More online services
MAGIX Website Maker
Not only is Internet surfing easy! Thanks to MAGIX Website Maker
creating websites also becomes child's play!

This service offers:

• Your desired domain (www.desiredname.com) and a subdomain

(http://your-name.magix.net/website).
• 250 MB memory space with 5 email accounts, 1 GB each.
• Website Maker with website templates, intros. Also animations, text
effects, form and design objects, picture and graphic templates, and
buttons. And everything without any ad banners!
• Photo (*.jpeg), video (*.wmv) & music (*.mp3) options.
• Additional software: MAGIX web mail for managing your email inbox.

MAGIX Website Maker offers 3 months of free, non-binding service.

This way, you have enough time to find out everything about MAGIX
Website Maker and all existing possibilities for editing and managing
your homepage.

MAGIX Website Maker offers everything for the perfect Flash®

website:

• Design templates: Numerous high-quality website templates in the

latest professional Flash® design with pre-finished, customizable
subpages, start pages, profile pages, photo pages, video pages, and
much more.
• Text & text effects: Freely positionable text fields with fantastic fonts
and animated text effects can be added and individually formatted
with ease.
• Multimedia content: Select your favorite photos, spectacular
slideshows, videos and an online video player with your own
background music, or integrate it all as an online music player with
playlists.
• Decorative elements: Attractive design objects, plenty of vector
shapes, background images, buttons, and much more offer more
possibilities for designing unique websites than ever.
• Animation objects: Large selection of dynamic, impressive
animation objects for breathtaking, moving websites.
• Links: Easily add links to your own or external websites.
• Top extras: Enhance your website with a visitor counter, guest book,
contact form, and many other useful extras.

www.magix.com
 Online functions 331
Export function: Conveniently add individual components of your
website (e.g. video player, slideshow, online music player) or even
the entire website to external sites as an embedded website.

Proceed as follows:

After registering your desired domain, you can start creating your
website right away.

1. First, select a design for your website in MAGIX Website Maker

2. If you would like to place an intro (start animation) at the start of
your domain, select your intro as a next step.
3. Now you can replace the mock text with your own text as you see
fit. All free-standing elements on all webpages can also be moved
as you please. To do so, click to select the element and move it
using your mouse.
4. Once everything is just how you want it, you can put your page
online, so that your domain can be accessed.

MAGIX Blog Service

With MAGIX Blog Service, YOU make the news! Share your thoughts,
experiences, and news with a worldwide audience in no time using
your own interactive online multimedia journal. Invite family, friends,
and acquaintances to join in and enter their comments! A free MAGIX
Online Album belongs to the MAGIX Blog Service so that you always
have full control over your contributions.

You can also read the FAQ (frequently asked questions) on the
Internet. http://rdir.magix.net/?page=GRF14Q24VIRN

MAGIX Podcast Service

Podcasts are quickly becoming the medium of choice, since everyone
who can record audio files (music, readings, radio plays, and news)
and put them online can now also offer them as podcasts.

Since podcasts are not webstreams (like webradio), but are rather
offered as downloads, radio stations, newspapers, and magazine
companies often use them to provide their broadcasts as repeats in
podcast form. New releases from record labels and, most of all, ones
from purely Internet-based labels can also be listened to as podcasts.

Check out the podcast directory that MAGIX has compiled: Audio
recordings for every area of interest in many languages are available
as a one-time trial or as a subscription.

www.magix.com
332 Online functions
More about this topic can be found under MAGIX Podcast Service.

Manage music online: The soundtrack of your life with you all of the
time! MAGIX makes all of your favorite songs available to you all of the
time – forget carrying your record boxes. Simply upload songs,
manage them online, and play them with an integrated MP3 player.
Wherever you go, your music is already there!

Buy music: A musical shopping experience, around the clock:

Download hits, oldies, and rarities comfortably from home and enjoy
them anywhere. The free MAGIX Music Manager gives you an
overview of all of your music and devices. Select songs with the
original cover art from an especially large offer of high-quality MP3
songs!

Download music samples: Complete your own multimedia projects

with high-quality sounds and styles from professionals! No matter
whether you want loops, sounds, and instrumental parts for your
arrangements, or a great voice for one of your own guitar recordings
– you're guaranteed to find the right sounds. New content every
month – excellent templates for individual ringtones with MAGIX
Ringtone Maker.

Listen to podcasts online: The MAGIX Podcast Service automatically

provides acoustic variation at home, on the go, or on mobile devices.
Whether pirate stations, the storytelling hour, or a cookery show.
Simply choose the station you want! You can use MAGIX music
programs like MAGIX MP3 Maker to comfortably subscribe to,
download, manage, and burn podcasts from all over the world.

Download sound templates for your own ringtones: Ringtones not

only let you show others who you are, but what you like: In the
MAGIX Online Content Library, you can download professional sound
templates for your own creations, individually edit them, then transfer
them directly to your mobile. You're guaranteed to be the only one
with these ringtones!

Create ringtones with your mobile: A music studio in your pocket –

MAGIX Mobile Music Maker turns your mobile into a DJ booth!
Compose and remix ringtones easier than ever before: Select the
style, add effects, mix down, and your unique ringtone is finished!
Groove together now in multi-player mode via Bluetooth!

www.magix.com
 Online functions 333
MAGIX Screenshare
This function makes it possible for you to offer assistance to other
users directly via the Internet, or to get help from others. To do this
you have to register MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 first.

Hint: To inform the screensharing guests of exactly what is being

shown, it is also a good idea to telephone or chat simultaneously.

Register as host for a screen transfer

1. If you want to start a screenshare instance yourself, then you have
to register as a host first. To do this open the menu "Online" and
then select "Screen transfer as host...".
2. In the dialog you can enter a name for the screen session. Your
user account name is used here by default.
3. Now click on "start session". A small window will now open in the
bottom right corner which displays the status of your screen
session. A number will also be displayed (session ID) which serves
as a password for your guests.
4. Start the screenshare instance.

Register as guest of a screen session

1. You have to register as a guest to view a screensharing instance.
To do this open the menu "Online" and then select "Screen
transfer as guest...".
2. Enter the password you received from your host (8-digit session
ID).
3. Now click on "start session". A window will open displaying a
smaller version of your host's screen.

Online login details

In this dialog, you can save your login information (login and
password) for MAGIX Online Album and all other MAGIX Online World
as well as for Catooh, making it unnecessary to login each time you
access MAGIX Online World.

The saved data are valid for all other MAGIX programs for the
corresponding computer user.

www.magix.com
334 Online functions

Embed Flash videos into your own web page

To do this, you will need a basic knowledge of HTML pages and all
technical requirements for uploading your files to your web page.

Tip: If you do not have HTML skills, we recommend using MAGIX

Online Album. Without any previous knowledge, you can present
videos, photos and music on your own web page – all completely for
free. Videos from MAGIX Online Album can also be embedded in
other websites as well.

Please note that a Flash video cannot be directly embedded into an

HTML page like a picture in JPEG format. For a Flash video, you will
need a Flash player embedded in the website to play back your
video.

MAGIX offers you a download package with some Flash player

goodies. It can be downloaded here
http://support.magix.net/dl/flvplayer.php.

The package contains the following files:

• standalone_omk.swf - the Flash player

• demo.html - a sample website, which demonstrated how the player
can be used
• demo.flv - a demo video, which will be played by the Flash player on
the demo website

To reach your target quickly, simply adjust the demo website to your
own requirements and replace the demo video with your own. At the
end, upload all three files to your website.

If you need more information about the website's HTML code, we

recommend that you read an explanation of HTML documentation to
better understand the structure and functions of HTML.

www.magix.com
 Online functions 335
If you understand HTML code, you will find another explanation of
various parameters using which you can influence the appearance
and function of the Flash player.

url The path to the video which is to be played back.

preview The path to an image in JPEG format. It is displayed

as a preview in stopped state before the video is
played back.

sound The sound contained in the video will be played back if

this parameter is "true".

loop The video will be automatically played back from the

start after reaching the end if this parameter is "true".

tooltip Changing the position of the position cursor will

display a tooltip with position information if this
parameter is "true".

swfborder A limiting line will be drawn around the player if this

parameter is true.

autoplay The video will be played back automatically when the

page or the player are loaded.

www.magix.com
336 Keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts

Playback functions
Start/Stop Space bar
Transport buttons J/K/L
In/Out points for punch recording I/O
Stop (playback marker is stopped at K
the current position)
Restart beginning at playback marker Backwards
Playback marker back to the Home
beginning
Playback marker to end End
1 frame back Left arrow
1 frame forward Right arrow
5 frames back Ctrl + left arrow
5 frames forward Ctrl + right arrow
Fast forward Shift + right arrow
Fast rewind Shift + left arrow
Set project marker Shift + 1/2/3

Arranger view
Zoom in Ctrl + up cursor key
Zoom out Ctrl + down cursor key
Full screen playback Alt + Enter
Movie overview Shift + A
Optimize view Shift + B
Zoom 1 frame / 5 frames Ctrl + 1/2
Zoom 1s / 5s / 1min/ 10min Ctrl + 3/4/5/6
Zoom between red area markers Ctrl + 7
Entire movie Ctrl + 8

Move view
To next object edge Ctrl + 0
To previous object edge Ctrl + 9
To movie start Home
To movie end End
To beginning of section Ctrl + Home

www.magix.com
 Keyboard shortcuts 337
To end of section Ctrl + End
Page to right/left PgDn/PgUp
Grid unit right/left Ctrl + PgUp/PgDn
To project markers 1-10 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/0
To next/ Ctrl + Shift + PgDn/PgUp
previous project marker
To next/ Shift + PgDn/PgUp
previous scene marker
To next/ Alt + PgDn/PgUp
previous chapter marker

To next/previous ad marker Ctrl + Shift + W

Ctrl + Alt + W
Scroll to left/right marker Alt + Home/Alt + End
To next/previous empty section Shift + 4/Shift + 5

Transport control in Media pool

Set InPoint I
Set OutPoint O
Go to InPoint Shift + I
Go to OutPoint Shift + O
Play from InPoint to OutPoint Ctrl + K
Save Take Shift + T
Apply range to movie Ctrl + P

Mouse modes
Intelligent mouse mode Alt + 1
Mouse mode for individual objects Alt + 2
Curve mouse mode Alt + 3
Object stretch mouse mode Alt + 4
Preview audio objects Alt + 5
Scrub mouse mode Alt + 6
Context help Alt + 7

File menu
New movie Ctrl + N
Open movie Shift + O
Save movie Ctrl + S

www.magix.com
338 Keyboard shortcuts
Save movie as Shift + S
Close movie Ctrl + F4

Load/Save project
Load project Ctrl+Shift+O
Save project Ctrl+•+S
Save project as... Ctrl + Shift + D
Clean-up wizard Ctrl + Alt + G

Export movie
Export as AVI Alt + A
Export as DV AVI Alt + B
Export movie as an MPEG Alt + C
Video as MAGIX video Alt + D
Video as QuickTime Movie Alt + E
Windows Media Export Alt + F11
Real Media export Show quantization grid
Alt + G
Video as MPEG 4 video... Alt + K
Audio as WAV Alt + H
Uncompressed movie Alt + U
Movie as sequence of individual Alt + V
pictures
Single frame as BMP file Alt + M
Single frame as JPEG Alt + N

Internet
Send movie as email Shift + U
Internet connection Ctrl + W

Burn CD/DVD Alt + Shift + R

Audio / Video recording G

Audio recording R
Twain scanner
Select Source Alt + Q
Scan Alt + Shift + Q

Read tracks from audio CD C

Play Audio/Video H
Slideshow Maker Ctrl + Shift + M
Soundtrack Maker W

www.magix.com
 Keyboard shortcuts 339
Backup copy
Copy movie and media into folder Shift + R
Copy project, movie, and media into Ctrl + Q
folder
Burn movie and media to CD/DVD Ctrl + Shift + R
Burn project, all movies, and media Ctrl + Shift + Q
Restore disc project from (S)VCD/video Ctrl + Shift + P
DVD

Load backup film Alt + O

Slideshow Maker Ctrl + Shift + M
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker W
Movie properties E
Program settings Y
Exit Alt + F4

Edit menu
Undo Ctrl + Z
Restore Ctrl + Y
Cut objects Ctrl + X
Copy objects Ctrl + C
Paste objects Ctrl + V
Duplicate objects Ctrl + D
Deleting objects Del
Select all objects Ctrl +A

Cut
Split scene T
Delete scene start D
Delete scene end U
Remove scene Ctrl + Delete
Split movie Alt + W

Adjust music to section Ctrl + Shift + U

Edit range
Cut section Ctrl + Alt + X
Copy section Ctrl + Alt + C
Delete range Ctrl + Delete
Insert section Ctrl + Alt + V
Extract section Ctrl + Alt + P

Group objects Ctrl + L

www.magix.com
340 Keyboard shortcuts
Ungroup objects Ctrl + M
Mix audio Shift + M
Set snap point Shift + Alt + P
Set project marker Shift +
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/0
Set chapter markers Shift + Enter
Set chapter markers automatically Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers Ctrl + Enter
Delete all chapter markers Alt + Ctrl + Enter

Move view see "Move view" (view

page 336)

Effects menu
Master effects Ctrl + B

Video object effects

Scene recognition Shift + Z
Image stabilization Shift + K
Find and remove ads Shift + C
Edit bitmap externally Alt + P
Movement
Pan left -> right Ctrl + Shift + A
Pan right -> left Ctrl + Shift + B
Pan up -> down Ctrl + Shift + Y
Pan down -> up Ctrl + Shift + Z
Zoom out Ctrl + Shift + X
Zoom in Ctrl + Shift + F
Restore movement Ctrl + Shift + G

Cropping
Zoom 2 Ctrl + Alt + 4
Zoom 3 Ctrl + Alt + 5
Free zoom selection Ctrl + Alt + 6
Fix picture proportions Ctrl + Alt + 7
Restore selection Ctrl + Alt + 8
Load movie effects Ctrl + Shift + O
Save movie effects Ctrl + Shift + S
Restore movie effects Shift + C

Audio object effects

Normalize Shift + N

www.magix.com
 Keyboard shortcuts 341
Automatic track damping Shift + L
Audio Cleaning Shift + W
Echo/Hall Shift + H
Timestretch/Resample Shift + Q
Surround Editor Ctrl + Shift + N
Load/Save settings Ctrl + Alt + Shift + J/K
Load audio effects Ctrl + Alt + O
Save audio effects Ctrl + Alt + S
Restore audio effects Shift + Alt + K
Tempo Recognition Wizard Shift + E
Externally edit Wave Alt + Z
Volume curve Alt + X
Object properties Ctrl + E

Window menu
Edit trimmer N
Object trimmer Q
Mixer M
Master audio effects rack B
Video monitor V
Media Pool F
Reset window arrangement F9
Display settings Alt + Shift + V
Switch to next window Tab
Film overview Shift + A
Optimize view Shift + B
Zoom horizontally/vertically see "Arranger view
(view page 336)"

Help
Help F1
Context help Alt + F1
Show tool tips Ctrl + Shift + F1
System information Ctrl + I

www.magix.com
342 Keyboard shortcuts

Edit keyboard shortcut

In this dialog you can specify keyboard shortcuts for all menu function
of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16. This allows you to adapt existing
shortcuts to your requirements or to add new ones.

The settings are automatically saved in a file upon closing the

program, i.e. they will be available the next time the program is used.

The display of the entire menu tree is the key function of MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro 16.

Add keyboard shortcut

To add a keyboard shortcut, proceed as follows:

• Look for the required menu point and select it with a simple mouse
click. Under "Current menu point" the currently selected menu point
will be displayed.
• Then, click on the "New keyboard shortcut" field.
• Type in the keyboard shortcut. You can also use combinations of any
key with "Shift", "Alt", and "Ctrl".
• Then click on "Assign shortcut". If the shortcut should already have
been assigned a corresponding warning will be displayed.

Note! Please do not use the space bar, "Esc", or "Insert" key ("0" in
the number block), since the functions of these keys are permanently
assigned in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 and can not be changed.

Keyboard shortcut list

Reset: Activates all preset shortcuts again.

Load: Previously saved shortcuts are loaded and activated again.

Tip: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 offers additional presets for those
switching over from other programs. This significantly simplifies
getting used to MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16!

Note! The current settings will be overwritten during loading! Save

your current keyboard shortcuts in advance if you would like to keep
them.

www.magix.com
 Keyboard shortcuts 343
Save: The current keyboard shortcuts can be saved after naming the
file appropriately.

List: This button opens a window where a complete list of current

keyboard shortcuts appears. The included "Copy" button can be
used to copy this list to the Windows clipboard and then edit and
print it using a text editor.

www.magix.com
344 Activate additional functions

Activate additional functions

You can activate encoders/decoders for various file formats as
required. The corresponding activation dialog will appear
automatically when the codec is used for the first time, e.g. when a
DVD is burned and the MPEG-2 codec is used.

Why does it have to be "activated"?

To import (decode) or export (encode) certain video and audio
formats you will require a specific codec. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16
will ask you if you want to activate the codec as soon as you need it.
The integration of decoders and encoders from third parties into
programs usually costs money. These codecs are integrated via
additional, voluntary activation in MAGIX programs which, according
to usage and degree of prevalence, can be free or fee-based for
special high-quality codecs. This way, MAGIX can continue to be able
to provide you with optimum value for money for your software.

Free activation (MPEG-2, MPEG-4, Dolby

Digital 2.0 & 5.1)
To be able to use MPEG-2, MPEG-4, the Dolby Digital stereo import
(view page 205), and Dolby Digital 5.1, you will have to activate the
codec for free.

Activation can be done online via telephone or via post/fax. The

quickest and easiest way to order an activation code is via the
Internet.

Order activation code online

Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 will
automatically contact the MAGIX server and load the corresponding
codec.

Note: Activation of the codec checks the registration data as

required. Activation of the codec only functions if your version of the
program has already been registered in your name. If you haven't
registered MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16, then you can do this at any
time.

www.magix.com
 Activate additional functions 345
If your computer has no Internet access, you have the following
options for activation:

Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center

Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which
has Internet access.

Order activation code via post/fax

After clicking on "Order via post/fax" (field 2), your user code will
appear. This automatically assigns your personal activation code to
your PC. Click on "Continue to order form" to transfer your user code
automatically to the post/fax form. Now send the completed form as
a print out to the address/fax no. mentioned. Your activation code
will be sent to you in just a few days via post or fax. It can also be
sent by mail if an email address is stated.

Enter activation code

After receiving your personal activation code use the export or burn
function to reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file
format. Type or copy the activation code into the input field in the
dialog and click on "Activate...".

www.magix.com
346 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage

Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage

Video Editing on the PC

Digital video processing with the PC is comparable to audio
processing. The analog medium that is video must first be digitized
before it can be processed by the computer.

Digital video processing functions quite similar to recording via a

sound card. The signal flow is measured in very short, regular
intervals, and the values resulting from it can then be processed by
the computer. The accuracy of each individual measurement results
in the resolution, and the frequency of the measurements results in
the frame rate. The more precise and frequent the signal is measured,
the higher the quality of the digitized video, but also the higher
demands on the capture performance and the required storage
space. The Windows standard format for video files is AVI (audio and
video Interleaved).

Digitizing video adopts either the camera or the graphics card, a TV

card (e.g. Miro PCTV), or a video card (e.g. Fast AV Master).
However, video handling makes much higher demands upon the
hardware if good image quality is required. In order to be able to
reasonably process video files on today’s PCs, they must be
compressed. Digital audio, on the other hand only uses compression
for saving storage space.

MPEG Compression
MPEG means "Moving Picture Experts Group" and defines a
workgroup which cooperates with the International Standards
Organization (ISO) as well as the international Electro Technical
Commission (ETC) to develop standards for video and audio coding.

Generally, the graphic data rate of the digital video standard is 167
megabits per second, which, when not compressed, requires a far
higher storage capacity than a DVD can offer. A one-sided DVD 5
with 4.7 GB storage capacity is enough for 4 Minutes. For this
reason, the available pictorial material must be effectively compressed
– a function which is achieved with the MPEG procedure.

www.magix.com
 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 347
This procedure is based on the simple fact that up to 96% of digital
video data consists of repetition and can be compressed without
visible degradation of the pictorial quality.

Each MPEG compression is, however, a data reduction and as such

connected with information loss. If the video consists of very
extensive details, or if the content changes very fast, then the picture
may blur (dependent on the strength of the compression and the
quality of the encoder).

Errors can also result from so-called compression artifacts such as

small color defects or images that are too dark.

At average compression rates under 3 megabits per second it is

probable that you will notice reduced quality. At rates around 6
megabit per second the degradation in quality becomes almost
invisible.

General notes on AVI videos

The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video
format! Rather, it is a so-called "container", where the conventions for
transferring audio and video files to the program are only loosely
defined. The codec (coder/decoder) actually defines what storage
format is used. A codec compresses audio/video data into its own
unique format which can only be read by the codec itself and is
decoded when the film is played.

In concrete terms, a computer-generated AVI file can only be loaded

by and played on a different computer if the same codec is installed
on it.

Many codecs (e.g. Intel Indeo® video) have now become standard
components of the Windows™ installation. Others like the popular
DivX codec are not standard. If you are generating an AVI file for
future play on another computer using one of these codecs, you
should first install this codec on the other PC. The best method
available is to copy the codec installer to your export directory and
burn it every time you create a video disc (slideshow disc) for play on
computers.

You may encounter some problems when using older video editing
cards with codecs which only function with the card’s hardware.

www.magix.com
348 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Such AVIs can only be used on the computer which was used to
create them. Try to avoid using this kind of codec.

Overview of the different disc types

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 contains many disc types depending on
whether you want to burn a movie or slideshow and which disc type
you are using (CD or DVD), or the type of playback device or quality
required.

The table below will explain which disc types can be best employed in
different cases, the differences in quality, and how much storage
space each format requires.

For further information please read the chapters on the individual disc
types.

Disc Medi Menu Qualit ca. length Suitabl Playbac

type a y e for k on

VCD CD Yes * approx. Movie DVD

(See 70 player
"Video minutes on TV
CD
(VCD)")
S-VCD CD Yes ** ca. 30-70 Movie DVD
(See minutes photos player
"Super on TV
Video
CD
(SVCD)
")
DVD DVD Yes, *** approx. 2 Movie DVD
("Digital advanc hours photos player
Versatil ed on TV
e Disc
(DVD)")
miniDV CD Yes *** ca. 20 Movie DVD
D (view minutes photos player
page on TV
354)
JPEG CD No **** Depends Photos DVD
DISC DVD on original player
images on TV
and DVD without

www.magix.com
 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 349
player* sound,
effects
or
transitio
ns
Slidesh CD No **** Dependin 17 Every
ow DVD g on photos PC
original with
images some
and DVD effects,
player or as a
backup
WMV CD Yes **** 3 hours / Movie PC from
HD DVD DVD photos Window
30 min s Media
/CD Player 9
format
Multi CD Yes **** 45 min/ Movie PC from
Disc DVD DVD photos Window
7min/CD s Media
9 format
+ DVD
player

* The display duration for some DVD players may be set in this menu.
The number of photos that can be burned onto a CD or DVD
depends on the sizes of the picture files.

You can also use the menu templates from the category "TV
Showtime DVD" for the disc types mini DVD and DVD. Each picture of
a slideshow is then displayed in fullscreen on its own menu page
without having to playback the slideshow.

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)

Quality
The exceptional color quality, image definition, and contrast of the
DVD format are all well known.

A resolution of 720 x 576 (PAL) and coded using MPEG-2, 25

pictures per second produces very good results. The quantity of data
is approx. 5 times as much as a VCD.

DVD size

www.magix.com
350 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
DVDs look similar to CDs. The only visible difference is that double-
sided DVDs have no label. Otherwise, both formats have the same
dimensions.

• Diameter: 12 cm, like a normal CD (there are also DVDs with a

diameter of only 8 cm)
• Thickness: 1.2 mm, just like a normal CD

DVD media (overview)

The DVD does not differ outwardly from a conventional CD-ROM.
Higher memory density (up to 17 GB as opposed to 650-780
megabytes) results from the fact that information is stored more
densely (double-capacity) and that up to four layers can be used. In
order to be able to read the information, a special laser with modified
wavelength is required. Therefore, DVDs cannot be read using
conventional CD-ROM drives.

Writable disc formats

The recordable DVD market is split for the time being into three types:
DVD-RAM, DVD+RW and DVD-RW.

DVD-R: Once-only writable medium. The DVD-R can be specified

with the file structures of DVD Video, DVD Audio, or DVD-ROM.

DVD+RW: Re-recordable DVDs can be created using +RW drives and

can be read by almost any commercial DVD-ROM or DVD player. The
companies involved are mainly Philips, Sony, HEWLETT PACKARD
(as well as Ricoh, Yamaha, and Mitsubishi).

DVD-RW: Writable and erasable DVD technology is promoted by

Pioneer and Sharp. This format was developed by the Pioneer
company and should be compatible with existing DVD players.

DVD-RAM: This standard is not recommended due to small storage

capacity and incompatibility with DVD players.

Note: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 supports DVD -R, DVD+R, DVD
+RW, DVD -RW, but not DVD-RAM!

Blank discs: Single-sided recordable blanks with a capacity of 4.7

GB and a playback time of approx. 2 hours serve as storage media
for all DVD burning formats at present.

www.magix.com
 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 351
Copy Protection
Macrovision (APS): The movie industry claims that even DVD-ROM
drives and decoders or diagram cards with composite outputs or s-
video outputs must support the Macrovision analog copy protection
(APS). Only some older DVD players do not possess APS.

APS adds additional signals to a DVD’s stored graphical data. The

data is almost unchanged. These supplementary signals disturb the
synchronization and the automatic recording regulation of most video
recorders to prevent recording of the video. They are not noticeable
on the television or the monitor, however.

Content Scrambling System (CSS): CSS prevents saving and

duplication of DVD video tracks to hard disk. The VOB streams of
DVDs without CSS can otherwise (like other video files) be loaded via
the Import Video button

There are further types of copy protection besides APS and CSS
which ensure that retail DVDs cannot be copied without distortion

Blu-ray Disc
Alongside HD-DVD, the Blu-ray Disc is viewed as the successor to
DVDs and offers especially high storage capacity of up to 27 GB as a
single-layer disc (double-layer up to 54 GB) with very few write errors.

The term Blu-ray Disc comes from the blue color of the laser.
Because a color cannot be registered as a trademark, the letter "e"
was removed from the word "blue".

The high storage capacity of the Blu-ray Disc suits high definition
videos and slideshows in high quality perfectly, since these are
characterized by large file sizes (depending on material approximately
40 MB/sec) and very high memory use.

Hint: A corresponding device is required for viewing Blu-ray Discs. To

fully enjoy the benefits of high definition video, you should also use an
HD-enabled TV.

Companies that were involved in developing Blu-ray technology have

united themselves into the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA).

www.magix.com
352 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Blu-ray Discs come in three varieties:

• Only readable BD ROM (comparable to DVD video),

• rewritable BD-RE (comparable to DVD±RW or DVD RAM),
• and as a disc that can be written to only once BD-R (comparable to
DVD±R).

AVCHD disc
Use this command you to create a high-resolution video. You can
even burn Blu-ray (BD-R/RE) blanks as well as conventional
DVD±R/RWs. In contrast to Blu-ray Discs (view page 351), MPEG-
4/AVC codec is applied as the video format, which requires less
memory at a comparable image quality. There is no disc menu on
AVCHD discs.

Tip: To fully enjoy the benefits of high definition video, you should also
use an HD-enabled TV.

Compatibility

AVCHD disc on Blu-ray: Since this is a BD-conformant format, the

disc created can be played back in any conventional Blu-ray player.
Playback problems can almost always be traced to incompatibilities
between Blu-ray blanks and Blu-ray players. In this case, consult the
instructions for your Blu-ray player or ask the manufacturer which
blanks are compatible with the device.

AVCHD disc on DVD: The DVDs created with AVCHD video are not
supported by all Blu-ray players. The behavior of the devices is quite
different. Normal DVD players cannot replay AVCHD discs, since the
AVC format is not supported.

Note: To import and export AVC and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4
codec must first be activated (view page 343). A dialog will open if the
codec is required. Files with a horizontal resolution of more than 768
pixels can only be loaded in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 Plus.

Super Video CD (SVCD)

The Super Video CD (SVCD) is a technological advancement of the
video CD. SVCDs are also like VCD-specified CD-ROMs which can
be played using either a Super Video CD player (connected to the
television), or directly with the CD-ROM drive of a computer. Many
DVD players can also play SVCDs. MPEG-2 and the increase of the

www.magix.com
 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 353
data transfer rate makes it hard to tell videos from videos in DVD
quality apart.

Resolution: SVCDs use the better MPEG-2 encoder in a standardized

resolution of 480 x 576 (PAL). The MPEG-2 format offers a maximum
resolution of up to 720 x 576 points and improved compression
methods characterized by excellent image definition and homogenity.

Hard disk capacity: An average 90-minute movie must be spread

across 3 CDs. On one SVCD you can get about 30 minutes of good-
quality movie.

Encoder setting: Compared to the VCD with 1.3, the data transfer
rate is doubled to 2.6 Mbit/s.

MPEG-2 format introduces the so-called variable bit rate (VBR). In

contrast to the constant bit rate (CBR) of the MPEG-1 encoders, this
encoder has the option of using more bits for movement-intensive
sections, as well as saving bits if picture content remains the same.

Video CD (VCD)
Video CDs are specific CD-ROMs for storing videos in certain forms.
Compression takes place using the MPEG-1 codec. VCDs can be
played on either a video CD player attached to a television or directly
via the computer's CD-ROM drive. Most DVD players can play VCDs.

Resolution: VCDs can play movies with a maximum resolution of 352

x 288 pixels (PAL) or 352 x 240 (NTSC) at 25 pictures per second.
The resolution of a VHS cassette offers for instance 300 x 360 pixels.
More important than the resolution is the use of a good MPEG-1
encoder. Since video images constantly change, errors cannot always
be perceived by the viewer.

Hard disk capacity: A VCD can store about 70 minutes of video. A

typical motion picture must therefore be stored on two VCDs. In order
to get as much video data on a normal CD as possible, one must
forego correction information on VCD/SVCD formats within the
individual sectors (sub-ranges) of a CD. You can therefore fit 720 MB
of video data on a 650 MB blank CD. Due to improved burning and
scanning technology it is now possible to burn up to 985 MB video
data on a 99min blank CD.

Encoder settings: Normally the video CD data is played at a data rate

of 1150 kBits video and 224 kBits audio. By increasing the video bit
rate to 3000kBits you can get the same resolution and an better-

www.magix.com
354 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
quality audio bit rate. Movement artifacts disappear almost
completely at approx. 2000 kBits with the picture appearing a little
less sharp. This pre-supposes, however, that the player can also play
back such a bit rate. The fact that many DVD players can handle an
increased data rate is due to well written player software.

Experiment with higher data rates: If you do not need the full running
time of the VCD, then you can experiment with space to improve the
quality of the video!

miniDVD
The miniDVD is nothing more than the DVD data format burned onto
a CD-ROM. Thus the MPEG-2 encoder and all other specifications of
the DVD data format are used, and only the data carriers are different.
Because the CD-ROM can only save about a sixth of the quantity of
data a DVD can hold, the capacity of a miniDVD is accordingly limited
to approx. 20 minutes of movie.

MiniDVDs are particularly suitable for playing on the computer. For

stand-alone devices they must be tested on an individual basis as to
whether the device can handle the DVD format on a CD-ROM.

JPEG disc
The "JPEG disc" is a special case for slideshows. No video file is
created to be burned, but rather every photo in the disc project is
exported individually with effects and burned to CD or DVD. Many
modern DVD players can play JPEG files directly.

If a project contains several slideshows, a subfolder will be created

for each one, and the corresponding images will be placed into each
one. This means that there are no menus, no sound, no animated
effects or transitions – although it does offer the best possible quality
available for playback on TV.This means that there are no menus,
sounds, animated effects or transitions, it does, however, offer the
best possible quality available for TV playback.

Slideshow disc
All slideshow image and audio files will be burned
onto CD or DVD, together with any effect settings and
the MAGIX Media Manager CDR player program.
A MAGIX Media Manager CD is designed especially
for photo projects (slideshows). The original photos
are burned onto CD;

www.magix.com
 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 355
Ideal for backing up valuable recordings. During playback on your PC,
the highest possible picture quality is made possible. The following
photo effects can be played by Media Manager.

• Brightness, contrast, gamma

• Cropping and rotation
• Title text (without text effects)

If your project uses more effects, they won’t be visible on the Media
Manager CD. A VCD or DVD is more suitable for such projects.

The MAGIX Media Manager CDR ensures that the CD-ROM can be
played back on any Windows PC regardless of the software installed.
The disc will automatically begin playing the slideshow after the CD-
ROM has been inserted into the drive, provided the auto-play feature
is enabled on your PC. To enable the auto-play feature on your PC,
select the "Auto Insert Notification" option for your CD-ROM drive
from the Windows Control Panel.

If deactivated, you can also start your CD-ROM slideshow manually:

1. Place your home-burned CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

2. Open Explorer and click on the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive
(usually D:\).
3. Double-click "MediaManager.exe" to start the MAGIX Media
Manager CDR.
4. In the Explorer window of MAGIX Media Manager CDR, open the
slideshow playlist file ending with *.PLR and start the slideshow.

Additional information can be found in the help feature of MAGIX

Media Manager CDR (F1 key).

WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc)

WMV WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc) is a type of disc
optimized for playback of slideshows on PC. The movies are
converted into high-resolution Windows Media 9 format and a menu
is added, like with DVDs. You must have Windows Media Player 9 or
higher installed on your PC.

Video encoding will be preset for HDTV resolution (1280 x 720, also
known as "720p"). To select different resolutions, click on the button
“Encoder settings” and in “Presets” choose the following:

www.magix.com
356 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
• Standard PAL (720x576) or NTSC (720 x 480)
• Standard PC resolutions (1024 x 768 or 1280 x 1024)
• HDTV 720p (1280x720) or 1080i (1920x1080)

Multi Disc
A multidisc is a combination of different disc formats on one DVD. It
consists of 3 parts and offers the following advantages:

• Maximum quality when played on a PC with WMV HD (Windows

Media High Definition Disc)
• Fully compatible with DVD players due to a DVD part (Digital Versatile
Disc) (view page 349)
• Greatest possible safety as a data backup of the project is added
(burn option (view page 250)).

Backup disc
Use this option to compile all movies in the current disc project,
including all connected media and burn them to disc.

Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if

necessary, will be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs.
A restore program which is burned to the first disc of such a backup,
guarantees easy re-recording of the backup.

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 357

MPEG-4 encoder settings

Behind MPEG-4, you'll find a highly complex "academic" standard
that operates and is supported variably according to make.

Tip: First, check if there is a suitable preset in the export dialog for
your purposes. Before changes are made in "Advanced settings", the
effects and interplay of the different parameters should be familiar.

The "Advanced settings" are divided into "Video", "Audio", and

"Multiplexer".

Under "Video", there is a choice between "MPEG-4 (view page 357)"

(H.263) and "AVC/H.264 (view page 363)". Depending on the purpose
of application of the material to be exported, both of these encoder
settings can be selected for compressing the video material. It is
important in this case to know how the material will be played back.

Under "Audio", there is a choice between "AMR (view page 371)" and
"AC (view page 371)". The AMR format is more suitable for mobile
devices that don't necessarily require high playback quality. ACC is
more flexible, on the other hand, but it is supported by fewer mobiel
devices.

For material that is not exactly specific, encoder qualities recommend

AVC image and AAC sound, since these encoders are equally
suitable for all source material.

The option "Export as website" also creates an HTML page in an

integrated Flash player that can play back the video created. Read
the topic "Embed Flash videos into your own web site (view page
334)".

MPEG-4
The MPEG-4 (H.263) codec is especially useful for video material
with little or only slower movements.

Generic
MPEG-4 preset
Different presets located within the encoder.

www.magix.com
358 MPEG-4 encoder settings
(A)SP@L0-L5: (Advanced) Simple Profile in Level 0-5

(Q)CIF (Common Intermediate Format): CIF is a video format

produced as soon as 1990 with the video compression format H.261.
At that time, the format was used for video telephone conferences.
The "Q" in QCIF stands for "Quarter", and since resolution is halved in
terms of height and width compared to CIF, the entire size is only a
quarter of CIF.
QCIF was popular with mobile telephone manufacturers, since the
resolution of 176 x 144 pixels was sensible for the first affordable
SmartPhones (144 x 176).

(Half)D1: D1 corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD. HalfD1 has exactly half

of the entire number of pixels, meaning that the pixel number of the
height and weight is 2/3 of D1.

720p: Video stream with a resolution of 1280 x 720p (progressive).

Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.

Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatibler stream.

Profile/Level
So that profile and level are conformant with the other settings, pay
attention to the minimum and maximum values in the following tables.

Note! In case the settings are not included in this information,

problems playing back the encoded videos can lead to problems.

Table 1: The level of the MPEG-4 simple profile (SP)

Lev Typica Max. Maximum Max. Max. VMV
el l numb number unique buffer size
visual er of objects per quant. (MB)
sessio object type tables
n size s
L0 QCIF 1 1 x simple 1 198
L1 QCIF 4 4 x simple 1 198
L2 CIF 4 4 x simple 1 792
L3 CIF 4 4 x simple 1 792

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 359

Continuation of table 1
Lev Max. VCV Max. Max. Max. Max.
el VCV decod total VBV VOL VBV video bitrate
buffer er rate buffer buffer packet (kbit/s
size (MB/s) size size length )
(MB) (units of (units of (bits)
16384 16384
bits) bits)
L0 99 1485 10 10 2048 64
L1 99 1485 10 10 2048 64
L2 396 5940 40 40 4096 128
L3 396 11880 40 40 8192 384

Tabelle 2: The levels of the MPEG-4 advanced simple profile

(ASP)
Lev Typical Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. VCV
el visual numb number uniqu VMV VCV deco
session er of per type e buffer buffe der
size object quan size r size rate
s t. (MB) (MB) (MB/
table s)
s
L0 176x144 1 1x AS 1 297 99 2970
or
simple
L1 176x144 4 4x AS 1 297 99 2970
or
simple
L2 352x288 4 4x AS 1 1188 396 5940
or
simple
L3 352x288 4 4x AS 1 1188 396 1188
or 0
simple
L4 352x576 4 4x AS 1 2376 792 2376
or 0
simple
L5 720x576 4 4x AS 1 4860 1620 4860
or 0
simple

www.magix.com
360 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Continuation of table 2
Level Max. Max total Max. Max. Max.
percentag VBV VOL VBV video bitrate
e of intra buffer buffer packet (kbit/s)
MBs with size size length
AC (units of (units of (bits)
prediction 16384 bit 16384 bit
in VCV s) s)
buffer
L0 100 10 10 2048 128
L1 100 10 10 2048 128
L2 100 40 40 4096 384
L3 100 40 40 4096 768
L4 50 80 80 8192 3000
L5 25 112 112 16384 8000

Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the
basis for the encoding:

• Frame: A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called

a full image.
• Field: A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read
more about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 384)".

Field order

Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected

for "Picture type".

In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read

more about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 384)".

Pulldown

Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Frame" or

"MBAFF" (only for AVC/H.264)" is selected for "Picture type".

In normal cases, an image playback rate of 24 (or 23.976) frames per

second is use; the NTSC system however requires 30 (or 29.97)

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 361
frames/s, and there is a special algorithm for converting the video's
frame rate. For compilations or test purposes, switch this option to
"No". In normal cases, the setting can be set to "Auto".

Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the
maximum number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the
number will be determined automatically.

Bit rate control

The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the
video (playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding
parameter for the video to be encoded.

Mode
• Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the
device used to play the video supports constant bit rates.
• Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the
video, the bit rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a
lower bit rate is sufficient for creating the video in constant quality.
• Constant quality: Similar to the "Variable bit rate" mode, the bit rate
varies according to the video material. The quality depends on the
selected profile and can be changed.
• Constant quantizer: In this mode, a fixed colour quantization is used
for the macro blocks. Under Advanced settings, a value between 1
and 32 can be set independent of the respective frame (I-Frame
(view page 384), P-Frame, or B-Frame (view page 386)). The higher
the value, the stronger the quantization: small values produce
qualitatively high-quality images and the data rate increases, and
larger values produce a reduction in data, but the quality suffers.

Bit rate (Bits/s)

• In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are
applied to be able to calculate the size of the video precisely.
• In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to
the video as an average as a guideline. The size of the video to be
exported can only be approximated.

www.magix.com
362 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Max. rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video
stream, i.e. maximum number of bits that may be transferred to the
decoder.

Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.

VBV buf. size

VBV is the abbreviation for "Video rate buffer verifier definition" and
the size of the buffer (storage area) that is applied to the encoding.

The larger the buffer is, the better the results will be, but the
processing will also take much longer. The smaller the buffer is, the
more parallel processing can take place at the same time in RAM.

Pixel aspect ratio

Specifies the page ratio of the individual image points (pixels).

Meaning: Different television norms and the standard pixel ratio.

Select a setting and the results are displayed as "X" and "Y".

X/Y: The actual pixel ratio. If under "Meaning" the setting "Custom" is
selected, then a custom ratio can be set.

GOP structure
Max key interval
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 383) length. High values
mean improved compression. Lower values create stronger security
protection and enable improved access to individual frames for
processing the video.

B-frames count
The number of B-Frames (view page 386). Several applications, e.g.
video conferences, require a setting of "0" for this, i.e. no B-Frames,
in order to enable the shortest possible reaction times for transfer.

Scene change detection

If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding,
thus allowing you to insert an I frame (view page 384) after a scene
change.

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 363
Input info
Information about the incoming video stream is displayed here during
live recordings.

Statistics
Information about the encoder activity is displayed here during live
recordings.

AVC / H.264
The H.264/AVC codec is suitable for all types of material; however, it
requires relatively higher CPU power for later decoding.

In the advanced encoder settings of the AVC encoder the "Generic"

options in "Main Settings" are mainly interesting.

The AVC preset and video format can be adjusted here. For instance,
if DVD quality is desired you should select "DVD". The video format
should be selected specific to the country so that the material can be
played on the devices most commonly available in these countries.
For instance, you should select PAL for Germany, SECAM for France
and NTSC for the US.

Generic
AVC preset
This is where the actual video stream that will be exported is
selected.

• Baseline: According to ISO/ICE 11172-1/2 standard

• CIF: Corresponds with MPEG-1 VideoCD
• Main: Corresponds with ISO/ICE 13818-1/2 standard
• SVCD: Corresponds with MPEG-2 Super VideoCD
• D1: Corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD
• High: HIGH profile 1920x1080i
• DVD: DVD video
• HD DVD: HD DVD video
• Blu-ray: Blu-ray Disc
• Blu-ray HD: Blu-ray Disc in high definition
• Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatible format
• HD 1280 x 720p: High profile with a resolution 1280x720p
(progressive)

www.magix.com
364 MPEG-4 encoder settings
• HD 1440 x 1080i: High profile with a resolution of 1440 x 1080i
(interlaced)
• Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.

Video format
Specifies where the video to be exported should be. The encoder
optimizes video material for the selected mode of playback.

• Auto: The format from the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 project.
PAL: Phase Alternating Line, or PAL, is a process for color
transmission for analog TV that is primarily used in Europe, but also in
Australia, South America, and many African and Asian countries.

• The image repetition rate for PAL is 25 Hz.

NTSC: NTSC stands for "National Television Systems Committee".
This is a US institution that defined the first color carrier system for TV
which is now used in most of America and some East Asian
countries.

• The image repetition rate for NTSC is 29.97 Hz.

• SECAM: SECAM is a TV norm in France and eastern Europe for
transferring analog color video signal.
• MAC: The MAC process (Multiplexed Analogue Components)
involves TV norms developed for satellite TV. They have also been
developed for an HDTV standard (HD-MAC).
• Unspecified: This setting does not make any special optimization.

Tip: The best results are achieved with the setting "Auto", since this
automatically uses the project settings as a basis by MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro 16.

Profiles
Defines which profile is applied in the AVC/H.264 stream.

• Baseline profile: The basis of applications with limited computing

performance, especially for video conferences or videos on mobile
telephones.
• Main profile: This profile was originally intended for the broadcast
industry and for backup purposes. The process has however
retreated somewhat from use, since "High Profile" has been
developed for these purposes.
• High profile: This profile is used for broadcast and backup
applications, and it is also used sometimes in the HDTV industry

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 365
(High Definition Television). For example, this profile for HD-DVD and
Blu-ray Discs.

Level
H.264 defines different levels. The higher the level, the larger the
video's bit rate. In this table, you can see the maximum permitted
values for the respective level in relation to the selected profile.

Max. Max. Max. video Max. Examples

macro image bit rate video bit (Resolution /
blocks size in (VCL) for rate image rate in
per macro baseline (VCL) for Hz)
seconds blocks and main high
profile profile
1 1485 99 64 80 128 x 96/30.9

1.1 3000 396 192 240 176 x 144/30.3

1.2 6000 396 384 480 320 x 240/10

1.3 11880 396 768 960 320 x 240/36

2 11880 396 2 Mbit/s 2.5 Mbit/s 320 x 240/36

www.magix.com
366 MPEG-4 encoder settings
2.1 19800 792 4 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 352 x 480/30

2.2 20250 1620 4 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 352 x 576/25.6

3 40500 1620 10 Mbit/s 12.5 720 x 480/30

Mbit/s

3.1 108000 3600 14 Mbit/s 17.5 1280 x 720/30

Mbit/s

3.2 216000 5120 20 Mbit/s 25 Mbit/s 1280 x

1024/42.2

4 245760 8192 20 Mbit/s 25 Mbit/s 1920 x

1080/30.1
2048 x 1024/30

4.1 245760 8192 50 Mbit/s 62.5 1920 x

Mbit/s 1080/30.1
2048 x 1024/30

4.2 522240 8704 50 Mbit/s 62.5 1920 x 1080/64

Mbit/s 2048 x 1024/60

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 367
5 589824 22080 135 Mbit/s 168.75 1920*1080/72.3
Mbit/s 2048 x
1080/67.8
2560 x
1920/30.7

5.1 983040 36864 240 Mbit/s 300 1920 x

Mbit/s 1080/120.5
4096 x 2048/30

The setting "Level auto" specifies the encoder levels automatically,

among other things for the resolution of the video format specified
under "AVC preset" and the set profile bit rate. If a level is manually
set in this case, then other parameter values may not exceed the
permitted maximum values.

Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the
basis for the encoding:

• Frame: A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called

a full image.
• Field: A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read
more about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 384)".
• MBAFF (macro block adaptive frame field): A macro block consists
of 16 x 16 pixels. The encoder creates a "frame field" on this basis
for encoding.

Field order

Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected

for "Picture type".

In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read

more about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 384)".

Pulldown

Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Frame" or

"MBAFF" (only for AVC/H.264)" is selected for "Picture type".

www.magix.com
368 MPEG-4 encoder settings
In normal cases, an image playback rate of 24 (or 23.976) frames per
second is use; the NTSC system however requires 30 (or 29.97)
frames/s, and there is a special algorithm for converting the video's
frame rate. For compilations or test purposes, switch this option to
"No". In normal cases, the setting can be set to "Auto".

Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the
maximum number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the
number will be determined automatically.

Bit rate control

The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the
video (playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding
parameter for the video to be encoded.

Mode
• Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the
device used to play the video supports constant bit rates.
• Constant quantizer:
• Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the
video, the bit rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a
lower bit rate is sufficient for creating the video in constant quality.
Pass
• Single pass: The encoder process takes place without prior analysis.
This requires the least amount of time, however quality suffers.
• Multi-pass analysis: The first encoding is carried out at the same
time as the analysis for the second encoding is calculated.
• Multi-pass encode: The first encoding is carried out at the same
time as the analysis for the second encoding is calculated and
updated. This produces the best results, but the process requires
the most time.
Bit rate (Bits/s)
• In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are
applied to be able to calculate the size of the video precisely.
• In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to
the video as an average as a guideline. The size of the video to be
exported can only be approximated.

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 369
HSS rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video
stream, i.e. maximum number of bits that may be transferred to the
decoder.

Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.

CPB size
This sets the size of the "coded picture buffer“ in bits. This is the
buffer where the encoding is carried out. The larger the buffer is, the
better the results will be, but the processing will also take much
longer.

Init delay (90 kHz)

Image and sound offset is compensated as per the source material.

Tip: Detects asynchronicity that should be compensated directly in

MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

Dest delay (90 kHz)

Certain mobile playback devices create an offset of image and sound
during playback, even if material is exactly synchronous. This option
ensures that the device offsets the image for the value entered to
counteract asynchronicity.

Example of calculation

Suppose a device creates an offset of 13 ms, then the following

calculation must be made:

Note: Only positive offsets are compensated, i.e. image comes after
the matching sound.

www.magix.com
370 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Aspect ratio
In the film industry, this is an indictation of the ratio between width
and height of a rectangle, monitor, or screen.

There are 3 different sizes available:

• Picture Aspect Ratio (also Display Aspect Ratio, DAR): This

indicates the desired aspect ratio of the video to be exported. Here
are some examples of typical aspect ratios: at home 4:3, 16:9
(typical for TV sets) or 16:10 (widescreen-flatscreens, widescreen
notebooks), 3:2 for 35mm films and photos. In cinemas you mostly
find 1.85:1.
• Pixel Aspect Ratio (PAR, pixel aspect ratio: Indicates the aspect
ratio of individual pixels. The majority of computer monitors have
quadratic pixels (PAR=1:1), for analog television monitors (PAL at
4:3) 128:117.
• Sample Aspect Ratio (SAR, also Storage Aspect Ratio): Aspect
ratio of the saved resolution (number of pixels), e.g. 720:576 at PAL.
It also calculates picture aspect ratio and pixel aspect ratio: SAR =
DAR / PAR.

Note: In the standard case, the "Aspect ratio" remains set the way it
is. You should only change the settings if the resulting video is
exported distorted or stretched or if you need to correct the video
because it is in the wrong aspect ratio.

GOP structure
Max GOP length
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 383) length. High values
mean improved compression. Lower values create stronger security
protection and enable improved access to individual frames for
processing the video.

Max b-frames count

The maximum number of b-frames (view page 386). Several cases of
application, e.g. video conferences require "no b-frames" in order to
achieve the shortest possible reaction times during transfer.

Scene change detection

If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding,
thus allowing you to insert an I frame (view page 384) after a scene
change.

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 371
Input info
Information about the incoming video stream is displayed here during
live recordings.

Statistics
Information about the encoder activity is displayed here during live
recordings.

AMR
AMR involves a parametric codec with different data rates between
4.75 and 12.2 kbit/s. The 12.2-kbit/s settings throughly corresponds
with the GSM-EFR codec in terms of algorithm and audio quality.

This audio format is used by mobile telephones for transferring the

conversation and is optimized for encoding conversation (voices).
Low bit rates provide compensation for mobile phones in case of
transfer errors, i.e. bad reception. Depending on the signal strength,
the compression increases or decreases to enable the best possible
quality for a conversation. The AMR sound, on the other hand,
encodes a fixed sample rate of 8,000 Hz compared to AAC sound.

The advanced AMR audio menu includes the following settings

options:

The bit rate can be set between 4.75 and 12.2kbit/s. The higher the
bit rate, the greater the file size and the higher level of audio quality.
The standard settings provide a bit rate of 7.4 kbit/s. The highest bit
rate for this format is more suited for transferring conversations.

AAC
The AAC audio was developed by MPEG, the Moving Picture Experts
Group (Dolby, Fraunhofer Institut für Integrierte Schaltungen in
Erlangen, AT&T, Nokia, Sony) as an audio data compression process,
that was specified as a further development of MPEG-2 Multichannel
in the MPEG-2 standard.

It's also a further development of MPEG-2 audio. This format is

equally suitable for encoding general audio information and not

www.magix.com
372 MPEG-4 encoder settings
especially optimized for certain types of audio material. As with video
material, the audio format should be considered for playback later.

AAC audio can be encoded with a sample rate of 8,000, 16,000,

24,000, 32,000 or 48,000 Hz and in mono and stereo sound,
respectively. By default, the sound is set to 48,000 Hz stereo. The
higher the sample rate is, the larger the resulting file and higher the
audio quality.

The advanced AAC audio menu includes the following settings

options:

• The bit rate can be set between 6 and 512 kbit/s. 160 kbits/s is
active by default. The higher the value is, the larger the resulting file
and higher the audio quality. After a certain limit, additional
improvements to audio quality will not be perceived. Bit rates under
64 kb/s are not recommended.
• As an MPEG version, set MPEG-4 or the older, proven MPEG-2
format.
• For the File Header Type, choose either RAW or ADTS. The
"Header" indicates an explanatory head for the beginning of the file
segment, which in fact takes up extra space, but is required for
decoding under circumstances.
- RAW indicates material which does not include a file header
in audio format. The audio material is therefore transferred
directly without any special additional information (raw).
This requires that decoding routines are able to process the
material without the explanatory file header. Especially in case
"exotic" sample rates are set, this can lead to problems
during RAW encoding.
- ADTS indicates a file header type which contains information
for encoded audio material. In case of doubt, select this file
header type, since fewer problems can be expected in this
case.
Object type: This provides selection between "Main" and "Low
complexity".

• Low complexity: Data is present in a form that hinders different

decoding algorithms (noise replacement), but enables others
(temporal adjustment noise formation).
• Main: This sets other focuses in the encoding, and other decoder
algorithms can be used.

www.magix.com
 MPEG-4 encoder settings 373

Note: For example, Apple iPod requires "low complexity encoding".

However, you don't need to worry if you select the right preset for
Apple iPod in the export dialog.

Multiplexer
The multiplexer is a component of the encoder which combines audio
and video streams.

Output format
MPEG-4 file: This is an MPEG standard (ISO/IEC-14496) with the
original goal of supporting devices with less computing performance.
Currently, MPEG-4 has reached a wide bandwidth of application,
from HD video to support for mobile telephones.

JPEG2000 file: DCI (Digital Cinema Initiative) has been replaced by

the JPEG2000 format for encoding movies. The current distribution
and presentation of films has been taken over by digital projectors
that play back high-resolution Mj2 streams in outstanding image and
sound quality.

3GPP file: A standard supported by plenty GSM and UMTS mobile

telephones. 3GPP is very similar to the MPEG-4 standard, but also
supports formats that are not permitted by MPEG-4.

ISMA compatible
The "Internet Streaming Media Alliance" combines video codec
standards (e.g. MPEG) and continuous transfer within computer
networks (e.g. RTP Real-time Transport Protocol) to ensure that
videos available online can be correctly transferred and played back.

Note: This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry
"MPEG-4 file" has been selected.

www.magix.com
374 MPEG-4 encoder settings
For Sony PSP
Switch on this option if the video should be played back with the
Sony PSP.

Note: This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry
"MPEG-4 file" has been selected.

For iPod
Switch on this option, if the video should be played back with the
Apple iPod.

Note: This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry
"MPEG-4 file" has been selected.

Live mode (get times from samples)

This option is only important for live transfers and is therefore not
required in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

www.magix.com
 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 375

Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings

General settings
MPEG type: Set the output type of the created MPEG file. You can
adjust the encoder settings freely (to export your video in the
corresponding format, for instance) for further use in other programs
or on your own website.

If you open the encoder from a burn dialog, or intend to use the
exported material for VCDs, SVCDs or DVDs, then select the
corresponding option. This will adjust the settings of the encoder
according to the standards required for the corresponding discs to be
played in a compatible player.

Video format: Automatically specifies the video format, aspect ratio,

and frame rate (see video settings (view page 376)). You can choose
between PAL or NTSC.

Interlace mode: The movie is encoded interlaced (i.e. in two half-

screens, so-called fields). This is essential for later playback on TV
screens. If you want to view the exported movie on your PC only and
like a "cinemascope" view, you can also encode by frame
(progressively). Some video projectors also support playback of
progressively encoded image material. See Interlace (view page 384).

Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement by the
completed video. The amount of data available can be used
differently for different display modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of
DVD video, or 5 minutes of Internet streaming at the thumbnail size.
The quality of an MPEG video is measured by the width of the
created data stream, i.e. the bit rate. This is the amount of
transmitted data per time unit and is indicated in kBit/s or bit per
second.

Quality: Determines the quality of the encoding process, or the quality

of the movement (view page 381) to be more precise. The higher the
quality, the better the finished video will look, but encoding will take
considerably longer. The preset value "10" is a good compromise
between speed and quality.

Smart Rendering: Smart Rendering can considerably reduce the

encoding/processing strain of MPEG files. The production of MPEG

www.magix.com
376 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
files re-encodes only those parts of the movie that were changed in
the program (e.g. by video cleaning or effects). Please note: The
MPEG files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e.
the bit rates (variable or constant), audio formats, image resolutions,
and video formats must match.

Quick, GOP-precise copying: This special Smart Rendering mode

enables MPEG material to be transferred without having to encode it
for the target medium, thereby greatly increasing the encoding speed.
The video material cannot appear to have been altered in any way;
only hard cuts (without fades) are permitted. These won't be
executed precisely to the frame, but will rather take place at the next
GOP borders. For this reason, cuts should be set somewhat more
generously.

To burn DVDs in original 5.1 Surround Sound (Dolby Digital Audio)

without having to re-encode, this option has to be activated.

Allows you to rip the necessary settings from an existing MPEG file.
This can be useful if you want to merge MPEG files together without
re-rendering via Smart Rendering.

Video settings
Frame rate: PAL requires 25 frames/sec, NTSC 29.97 frames/sec.
Please note: encoding NTSC material as PAL or vice versa may be
possible; however, it will result in jittery images.

Aspect ratio: Lets you set the image side or pixel ratio. With MPEG 2
the image format is displayed as image ratio; correspondingly there is
1:1 (square screen, not recommended), 4:3 (regular video) an 2.21:1
(cinemascope). This applies irrespectively of the selected video
format.

With MPEG 1 the pixel format is specified instead. There is 1:1,

CIR601 (corresponds to regular video) for 625 lines = PAL and 525
lines = NTSC and the same in 16:9. When selecting the output format
Video CD the pixel format is automatically adjusted to the selected
video format. Use with caution, even if you only want to export MPEG
1.

The option Auto is set as default. Here you can adjust the Movie
settings (view page 267) accordingly.

www.magix.com
 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 377
Resolution: Width and height of the video corresponds with the
settings in the export dialog.

GOP structure: Here you can change the settings of the GOP (view
page 383) sequence, i.e. the number of P frames per I frame within a
GOP. Please note that the total length of the GOP must not exceed
15 frames, which corresponds to the default setting (1 I frame + 4 P
frames + 5*2 B frames = 15 frames).

However, you can reduce the length of the GOP sequence (while
compromising the image quality at the same bit rate). This speeds up
the encoding process considerably as the motion estimation while
encoding P and B frames requires high CPU performance. The speed
of decoding, i.e. playback, is also increased.

If I frame is set to 1, each frame is an I frame. If the value is set larger,

the setting describes the total length of the GOP.

Auto GOP: Closed GOPs do not contain relations to frames from

subsequent GOPs. MPEGs where all GOPs are closed, make MPEG
editing easier as the I frames only can be edited alone if the GOP is
closed. Auto GOP closes GOPs at scene changes, whereby two
different and complex procedures ("fast" and "VSCD") are used.

Bit rate mode

In "constant bit rate" mode a bit rate that constantly remains the
same is used. This option should be used for Video CDs, as it is only
requried here. With a constant bit rate the full power of MPEG
compression can not be used properly as bandwidth for non-moving
scenes is lost.

"Variable bit rate" mode attempts to adjust the available storage

space to the requirements of the video you want to encode. The
actual bit rate fluctuates around a mean value. During calm sections
of the video it may drop to a minimum value, if there are movements
in the scene it may rise to the maximum value. There are two different
regulation processes (mode 1 and mode 128).

Advanced video settings

MPEG profile and level: The MPEG-2 standard defines so-called
"profiles" and "levels". For creating SVCDs and DVDs you can use
"Main profile and Main level". The high profile adds additional

www.magix.com
378 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
properties to the data stream like the option to display an image at a
reduced resolution for restricted transmission quality (SNR-scalable
profile), or locally scaled, for instance an HDTV data stream on a
standard TV set. The 4:2:2 profile is used if the image data is to be
encoded for alternative chroma scanning. However, these profiles are
supported by very few encoders, and mainly only for professional use.

These levels define the restrictions to the image resolution and the
maximum data rate. Low level can only reach a reduced resolution
(352x2888 = CIF); high level, or High 1440, enables encoding in
HDTV format.

Estimate movement: These parameters are controlled via the quality

controller (see General Settings).

Other

Noise sensitivity: This factor defines how sensitive the encoder will
react to noise in the source material. If the source material only
contains a little noise (digital recordings, computer animations, or
material already de-noised by video cleaning), then you don't have to
change the default value 4, or you can even reduce to increase the
quality further. However, if you want to encode noisy material, then
too low of a factor will considerably increase the encoding time at the
cost of quality. For an unedited analog video you can increase the
factor to 8-14.

Noise reduction (click on noise sensitivity): A noise filter is used with

adjustable settings from 1-31.

Advanced parameters

Additional expert settings are available in the tree to the right of the
window. These should only be changed by experienced users. They
have been optimized for general applications to such an extent that
changes are only necessary in exceptional cases.

Audio settings
Audio Type: You can use MPEG -1/-2, PCM (WAV), or Dolby® Digital.
You can also select "No audio" in the export dialog.

Sample rate: You can set a sample rate of 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz for the
audio track. VCDs and SVCDs require 44.1 kHz, DVDs require 48

www.magix.com
 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 379
kHz. To reduce the size of audio data it is recommended to lower the
bit rate instead of the sample rate.

Mode: You can use mono, stereo, joint stereo, or dual channel. If
audio type "Dolby® Digital" is used, then "5.1 Surround" mode may
also be selected.

• Dual channel enables encoding of two mono tracks (e.g. different

language sound tracks) that can be switched during playback.
• Joint stereo is an optimized stereo encoder which takes advantage
of the fact that the signal of both stereo channels is largely identical.
Use joint stereo if you can only use small audio bit rates, but still
require a stereo signal.
• 5.1 Surround is available only for surround projects for burning
DVDs. During this process, all 6 surround channels in the audio
stream are encoded.

Note! For Surround projects "Dolby® Digital" should be selected

under "Audio type", and "5.1 Surround" under "Mode".

Bit rate: Here you can set the audio signal bit rate. The higher the bit
rate, the better the playback quality. VCD requires 224 kBit/s, and for
SVCDs and DVDs select a value between 384 kBit/s and 448 kBit/s.

www.magix.com
380 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
Dolby® Digital Details

Hint: These functions are available only in the "5.1 Surround" mode.

Dialog normalization: Set the dB level of spoken dialog. This value

will be used to adjust the total volume of DVD movies and different
programs that can be received by the DVB. To do this, you must first
measure the volume of spoken dialogs in your movies. The values 1-
31 correspond to volume levels of -1 to -31 dB.

Hint: Use the mixer's peakmeter to set the volume level. This process
produces only approximate results, because the exact measurement
requires a mean value and this cannot be easily measured with
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16.

The displayed value serves also as a reference value for "Dynamic

Range Control". Some areas are softer so that speech can be made
louder, and louder areas will be made softer to avoid
overmodulations.

Background: Action-filled movies have larger volume differences

between spoken dialogs and loud scenes (during explosions, for
example). Because of this dialogs are softer than in quieter films
which can be modulated higher.

Surround mix level / Center mix level: These settings lead to an

additional damping of the surround channels and the central channel.
Usually both settings are set to -3 dB.

LFE channel: Switch off the LFE channel (Low Frequency Effect), e.g.
if you want to eliminate undesirable rumbling sounds in the low
frequency range. Normally, you should leave this option activated.

LFE filter: The LFE filter is a low pass filter, which lets through only
the lowest frequencies. If you are dubbing a project in
Samplitude/Sequoia, and have applied the LFE filter, you can switch
off this function here, since this filtering has already been
accomplished.

www.magix.com
 MPEG glossary 381

MPEG glossary

Motion estimation
Motion estimation is a further element for reducing data used in
MPEG encoding.

Motion estimation also occurs in the B and P frames. The image

difference that still exist after prediction (view page 386) are
examined. Complex algorithms are used to search for an original
occurrence of the macro block in the reference frame of each macro
block of the P or B frame (these are units of 2x2 blocks specially
combined for this purpose), which have been moved either by
movement or by camera pan. They can then be left out in the P and B
frame. Only the information by how far and to where the macro block
has been moved is saved instead. This vector is called the motion
detector.

In the General encoder settings (view page 375), you can specify the
quality of the final MPEG video. This factor also influences the time
required for encoding. The longer it takes, the better the quality.

Bit rate
MPEG is a format used for storage and transferring. With older
formats (e.g. AVI) you could predict that 20 seconds of movie would
result in 20 MB of data. The file size is this a direct measurement of
quality.

This is different for MPEG: The amount of data available can be used
differently for different display modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of
DVD Video or 5 minutes Internet streaming in thumbnail format. The
quality of an MPEG video is measured by the width of the created
data stream, the bit rate. This is the amount of the transmitted data
per time unit; it is stated in kBit/s or bit per second.

Bits, not bytes are used, since the data word width has to address
the transmission restrictions.

www.magix.com
382 MPEG glossary
The file size can be calculated from the average bit rate, if its length is
known:

F = (BRV + BRA) * t

F=File size BRV= BRA= t=Length in s

Video bit rate Audio bit rate

Block
For almost all image file editing techniques the image is subdivided
into 8 x 8 pixel blocks (image points). This should be noted if you
would like to used user-defined image resolutions (width/height), and
they should always be a multiple of 8.

Chroma format
The color value of each image point consists of the color values for
the primary colors red, green, and blue (RGB), and for traditional and
technical reasons it is transformed into one brightness value (Y =
0.299*R = 0.587*G + 0.114*B) and two color difference values (U = R
- Y, V = G -Y).

The Y value alone produces the black and white picture. These signal
components allow brightness and color information to be handled
separately. The first data reduction occurs when single rows
comprising a picture are read. Because the human eye has a lower
color resolution than a brightness resolution, the color components
are recorded only for every other point of a row (4:2:2) for each four
pixels grouped (4:1:0), i.e. color signal under-reading.

4:2:2 This corresponds to the established TV standard. One piece of

color information is transmitted per row for two pixels which
corresponds to a 2/3 compression of the output data.

4:1:0 This is the color coding used for DVDs and most other
consumer video applications. For each 4 pixels grouped together on
two rows, one unit of color information is saved. This corresponds to
a output data compression of 1/2.

www.magix.com
 MPEG glossary 383

Field
A half-image, i.e. two halves which combine to produce a frame (see
de-interlacing (view page 384)).

Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a
full image. PAL video, for example, contains 25 frames per second,
NTSC 29.97 frames.

Video recordings, with the exception of computer animations and still

frames, don't contain full images. Instead, they have double numbers
of half-images (fields) which are transmitted in an interlaced state.
However, we still refer to frames, since many predecessors of MPEG
compression are based on such frames. Video editing literature
usually refers to frames.

GOP
Group of Pictures: The sequence of I frames and the P and B frames
that belong to them.

e.g. I B B P B B P B B I ...

(This GOP has a length of 9, with 2 P frames and 2 B frames)

I frames contain the entire image information of a frame, while P and

B have part of the information. So-called prediction (view page 386)
and movement approximation are methods used for reduction.

The combination P B B is called a subgroup.

I frames must appear in regular intervals in the data stream for image
and sound to be synchronized. Between the I frames only a limited
count of P and B frames is allowed. This explains a few things: Since
P and B frames contain only differential information, these differences
will be larger with time, since more and more changes takes place
from frame to frame. A large count does not make much sense, since

www.magix.com
384 MPEG glossary
GOP has a maximum length of 15 (4P, 2B) in PAL and 18 (5P, 2B) in
NTSC. (More than 2 B frames between P frames is not allowed).

In a closed GOP, B frames of the last subgroup may contain only

backward predictions or references to the preceding P frame, but no
references to the following I frame, since it belongs to the next GOP.

I frames
Intra-frames: In these pictures, the entire image information of a frame
is saved and only information from this frame is used ("intra-frame
encoded"). In contrast to the I frame, P and B frames save only the
differences between the current frame, and preceding and/or
following frame are also found in MPEG video (P frame = "predicted
frame", B frame = "bidirectional frame", see Prediction (view page
386)).

Interlace
For historical reasons, pictures in a movie are always recorded and
transmitted in the form of two fields; first the lines with even numbers
and then those with odd numbers. These fields are alternatively
displayed with double the frame rate. The (lazy) eye of the viewer or
the processing of the TV tube puts the two frames together to form
one.

The output image First field Second field

You normally don’t have to worry about field processing. The video
material goes through the entire processing chain as fields and is
exported again as fields or burned onto DVD or shown on TV when
played back on a DVD as a full picture. Only in certain rare conditions
is it necessary to go deeper into this process. Two problems can
occur:

www.magix.com
 MPEG glossary 385
1. Interlace artifacts
To be displayed on a computer monitor (during recording, in your
TV/VCR, and in the arranger during editing), the two fields must be
combined to form a full screen.

These two fields are not the same, since two fields are created during
the recording between which a 1/50 of a second gap is evident.
Moving objects can therefore produce artifacts on vertical edges.

Typical interlacing errors

You can use so-called de-interlacing to avoid this type of artifact. De-
interlacing places a picture in between the two fields (interpolated). If
you want to create stationary pictures from movies, then you should
definitely use a de-interlace filter.

In the system settings ("File" menu -> Program settings (More

Informationen can be found in the section "Directory settings" on
page 312)) you can set the preview monitor display to use hardware
de-interlacing during video recordings for the video recorder and for
display in the arranger.

2. Incorrect field rate

If you move around the series of fields in a movie data stream, then
you will see strong jitter and flicker effects. Picture objects move in a
backward movement – two steps forwards, one back – since a
delayed field is shown before the previous one. This can happen in
the processing chain if you export video material improperly with the
wrong field order and then import it into different material. We use
MXV or MPEG "Top field first" format for all analog recordings ("odd"
in other programs).

DV-AVI on the other hand is saved with “Bottom Field First”.

You can correct the field series for each video object in its object
settings. See: "Menu -> Effects -> Object properties"

www.magix.com
386 MPEG glossary

P frames and B frames

P frames save only the difference between the current picture and the
preceding I frame. The "P" comes from the term "prediction" which
describes this process.

B frames save the differences between the current picture and the I
or P frame preceding and following. This includes the information that
was the same before and remained the same after the current frame.
Both directions are analyzed (indicates the "B" in the name, i.e.
"bidirectional-predicted"). You can read more under prediction (view
page 386).

Prediction
Prediction is a method of data reduction used by the MPEG format.
The image elements already known from the previous or following
frames are removed from the data stream.

How does it work?

The encoder has a precisely defined GOP, for example IBBPBBPBB.
This sequence is transmitted together with the encoder, which always
knows exactly which kind of frame comes next. I, P, and B frames are
differentiated.

Hint: When we talk about pictures, we mean frames of the video

output, and I, P an dB frames are the frames of the encoded video.
Just as in movement approximation, blocks (8x8 pixels) are united
into macroblocks (16x16 pixels) during prediction.

The first frame is always the I frame. It is completely encoded from

the first picture. Afterwards, the 4th picture is analyzed for the
creation of the first P frame. (As already said, the encoder, and later
the decoder, will know that two B frames belong between them.) This
image will also be completely encoded, and afterwards all
macroblocks that haven't changed in comparison to the I frame will
be deleted. They will be replaced by corresponding references for the
decoder that tell it "you already know what should be shown here,
and you can get it from the last I frame".

www.magix.com
 MPEG glossary 387
Now, the 2nd will be completely encoded, and all macroblocks
identical to the first I frame and the following P frame will be removed.
References to previous frames are called backward predictions, and
references to following frames are called forward predictions. The
third picture will be edited in exactly the same fashion.

The fourth picture we have already explained, and now we need the
next P frame, or picture number 7. Pictures 5 and 6 are B frames
again, which are compared to P frames to both sides of them (picture
4 and 7); these are followed by the last two B frames. These have a
special place, since in closed GOPs, they may contain only backward
predictions, and no references to the next I frame, because it belongs
to the next GOP.

Something else: Since the decoder is no prophet, the P frames are

always transmitted before the B frames! The GOP explained above
will be encoded and transmitted in the order it is written.

Original I0 B01 B02 P01 B11 B12 P02 B21 B22 I1

GOP

Data I0 P01 B01 B02 P02 B11 B12 B21 B22 I1 ... for closed GOPs
stream

I0 P01 B01 B02 P02 B11 B12 I1 B21 B22 For open GOPs
P11...

Due to this nested structure, it is easy to see that during direct editing
of MPEG material, complicated computations have to take place!
These are made easier using a frame table. A frame table contains a
list, where the information of every frame in the data stream is found,
identifying the type of frame it is.

Using Movement prediction (view page 381) P and B frames are

likewise reduced.

www.magix.com
388 MPEG glossary

Quantization scaling
The single pictures in MPEG are saved using a compression method
comparable to JPEG with bitmaps and associated with quality loss.
For this single images are divided into 8 x 8 blocks (view page 382).

Each one of these blocks is then transformed into an 8 x 8 matrix (a

table with rows and columns) using a DCT (discreet cosinus
transformation) mathematical method. Each of these values is
produced using all 64 individual pixels of the block, but the values in
the matrix are ordered in such a way that the image information is
ordered according to its importance.

This matrix will then be multiplied by another matrix, i.e. the

quantization matrix. Exactly how and why this matrix must be
created is the biggest secret of encoder programmers, since this
determines the quality of the whole encoding process. What is known
is that the result should contain as many zeros as possible! These
zeros correspond to the "unimportant" image elements mentioned
and will not be transmitted in the data stream.

Depending on the encoder parameters regarding the target bit rate,

fewer or more values of the matrix will be declared unimportant by
dividing the quantization matrix by the quantization scaling factor.
Since only whole numbers are used, a division can produce a zero is
the remainder is discarded.

This factor is also a direct measure of the sought image quality of the
MPEG data stream, since the "Q" in "Q" factor stands for quantization
and quality.

www.magix.com
 If you still have questions... 389

If you still have questions...

Task assistant
The task assistant is your information center. It helps you complete
your tasks and provides support at every step. Not only will you find
clear videos with step-by-step instructions, but you'll also find quick
access to a lot of functions.

The task assistant chapters can be found in the "Tasks" menu (view
page 279).

Online lexicon
In the D:Magazine from MAGIX we explain everything you ever
needed to know about digital media. From Active-X to Zooming, it's
all there.

You'll be able to find the lexicon at the following Internet address:

http://site.magix.net/index.php?id=16113/
http://site.magix.net/index.php?id=16113/

Program help
The program's help file contains hints on how to use the program and
additional information. Many important terms are indicated in the text
in italics and an explanation of them can be reached by clicking on
them.

Homepage: The main help page can be accessed via the "Help ->
Contents" menu point.

Context help: Press the "F1" key at any point in the opened program
and help will open with the matching help topic (context help).

Search function: To find out information on specific words, use the

search function. Enter either the individual word or use logical
operators (OR, AND, NEAR) to refine your search if you have several
search words.

www.magix.com
390 If you still have questions...
• "OR" (between two words): All topics which contain both words or
one of the words will be listed.
• "AND" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which
contain both words.
• "NEAR" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which
contain both words. A maximum of six other words may be added
between the search terms.
• "NOT“" (before a word): Topics which contain this word will not be
listed.

Print: Use the help program's print function to make a printout of

individual topics or entire sections. For help cases which may take a
long time, this can be more practical than switching between the help
window and the program. The print button is located at the top of the
help window in the toolbar.

www.magix.com
 Index 391

Index

3D distortion 143
3D series 113
3D transitions 110
3D-Text (Plus-Version) 129, 153

5.1 Surround 204

5.1 Surround Editor 208

AAC 371
Abbreviations 336
About MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16 281
Acceleration for high-resolution MPEG2 files 318
Accept media after download 323
Actions at the end of the movie (only in the film menu) 244
Activate additional functions 344
Activation problems 320
Ad markers 121
Adapt length to music 154, 265
Add keyboard shortcut 342
Add music 23, 76
Add sound 182
Adding a sound track using MIDI songs 193
Additional buttons in Timeline mode 45
Additional disc formats 24
Additional effects 143
Additional information about the selected program 93
Additional innovations in the PLUS and Premium versions 18
Additional innovations in the Premium version 19
Adjust brightness 157, 200
Adjusting the signal level 77
Adjusting the workspace 49
Administration 254
Advanced 215
Advanced configurations in the video capturing dialog 69
Advanced options 79

www.magix.com
392 Index
Advanced title editor settings 152
Advanced video settings 377
Advanced... 145
AMR 371
Animate 340
Animate objects 178
Animated GIF 222
Animation 137, 143, 151
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 346
Anti-flicker filter 286, 291, 305
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 375
Apply automatically 43
Apply effects to objects 130
Apply fades 130
Apply video effects to all 273, 288, 293, 306
Apply video effects to all of the following 273, 288, 293, 306
Area marker (in and out points) 117
Arranger 48
Arranger view 336
Arranging the synth object 195
Artistic filter 135
Ask questions online in the Knowledge Community 280
Aspect ratio 370
Atmos 196
Attach movie 257
Attach to picture position in the video 286, 291, 302, 305
Audio 76
Audio and video mixdown 268
Audio as MP3 220
Audio as WAV 221
Audio cleaning 274, 286, 297, 304
Audio effect dialogs 166
Audio effects 36, 203
Audio Effects 160
Audio effects animation in the Media Pool 18
Audio effects curves 298
Audio effects in the mixer 171
Audio effects presets 160
Audio object effects 274, 340
Audio objects 296
Audio settings 378
Audio track export 206, 220, 221
Automate 203
Automatic chapter markers 269
Automatic scene detection 101
Automatic scene recognition 21

www.magix.com
 Index 393
Automatic Tempo Recognition 189
Automatic track damping 178
Automatic volume damping 79
Automatically cut 101, 115, 154
Automatically select preview image 54
Automation 203, 208
AVC / H.264 363
AVC preset 363
AVCHD 19
AVCHD disc 352
AVCHD Lite 21
AVCHD recording (Plus version) 79
AVCHD standard support 20

Background design 272, 286, 292, 305

Background music 156, 178
Backup copy 212, 261, 339
Backup disc 356
Basic view 113
Batch Capturing 66
Batch conversion 253
Batch recording 66
B-frames count 362
Bit rate 381
Bit rate (Bits/s) 361, 368
Bit rate control 361, 368
Block 382
Blu-ray 351
Blu-ray Disc 351
Border cropping adjustment: 286, 292, 302, 305
Borders 149
BPM Wizard 275, 298
Brightness & Contrast 131
Brightness/Contrast 157
Burn an already created (S)VCD/Video DVD 260
Burn CD 259
Burn CD/DVD 259
Burn dialog for DVD player 248
Burn discs 233
Burn DVD 259
Burn project/film and media onto CD/DVD 212
Burnable disc formats 21
Burning assistant 246

www.magix.com
394 Index
Buttons overview 82

Calculating the panorama image 149

Camera movement 139
Capture options 94
Capturing DV recorders or cameras 60
Catooh – the Online Content Library 15, 324
CD image 26
CD Manager 184
Center title 152
Center track position 152
Change photo length 290
Channel list for analog programs 88
Channel list for DVB cards 91
Chapter markers 118
Choppy or uneven playback 319
Chroma format 382
Chroma key 134
Clean-up wizard 214, 262
Close all movies 279
Codec 347
Color 131, 158
Compressor 165, 172
Computer 34
Configure channels for analog reception 87
Connect a DV or HDV camera 57
Connect analogue video source 57
Connect AVCHD camera (Plus version) 56
Connect camera 56
Connecting the source for recording 76
Content 280
Context help 39, 280
Context menu (right click) 284
Continue 245, 250
Continue burning 245, 250
Control Effect devices 162
Convert to 3D title 302
Copy 266
Copy CD/DVD direct 259
Copy keyframe 179
Copy movie/project and media to folder 212
Copy Protection 351
Copy video effects 273, 287, 293, 306
Copying objects 263, 288, 293, 298, 302, 307

www.magix.com
 Index 395
Copyright 2
CPB size 369
Create a disc project as an ISO image 26
Create frame table (new) 284, 290
Create movie 157
Create new video project 51
Create panorama pictures 148
Create panorama... 272, 291
Create PC show 252
Create playable disc 215
Create sounds 194
Create still frame 285, 304
Create wave form 296
Create webDVD 252
Create your own menu background 241
Creating an ISO image 250
Creating backgrounds 17
Creating synth objects 194
Creating titles from a template 150
Creating titles without a template 151
Cropping 340
Curve mouse mode 46
Curves 178, 203
Custom fades via alpha keying (Plus version) 110
Custom multi-channel Surround 5.1 sound 26
Customize keyboard shortcuts 26
Cut 264
Cut automatically to fit screen 291
Cut button 41
Cut objects 263, 288, 294, 298, 302, 307
Cut out 265
Cut trimmer 124
Cut Trimmer 277, 285, 295
Cutaway 139

DeClipper 163
Decorate 149, 150
Define the path for saving Internet media. 323
Dehisser 165
De-interlacing 318
Delay 169
Delete 264, 266
Delete (all) chapter markers 270

www.magix.com
396 Index
Delete keyframe 180
Delete movie 257
Delete objects 41, 264, 288, 294, 298, 302, 307
Delete project marker 269
Delete scene end 264
Delete scene start 264
Delete specific files 214
DeNoiser 163
DeNoiser – Advanced settings 164
Design 154
Design button 241
Design elements 36, 276
Design page 241
Dest delay (90 kHz) 369
Determining the start of a measure 190
Digital Audio Meter 177
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) 349
Direction and time 140
Directory settings 312
DirectX Plug Ins 200
Disable effects 301
Disc limitations 246
Disc options 239
Display keyframes of individual parameters 179
Display options 317
Display settings 278
Display templates 316
Display tool tips 283
Display track curves 299
Distortion 136
Dolby Surround 204
Dolby® Digital Details 380
Download media directly from the Internet 25
Download presets for new device 282
Download video effects plug-ins 282
Drive list dialog 184
Drum & Bass machine 2.0 196
Dub 23, 76
Ducking 79, 178, 274
Duplicate objects 105, 264
DV 57
DV as MPEG 64
DV cameras 60
DV devices 60
DV export settings 226
DV logging 25

www.magix.com
 Index 397
DVD files (VOB) with multiple audio tracks 100
DVD with surround sound 204

Echo/Hall 274, 297

Edit 263
Edit after recording 74
Edit disc menu 238
Edit in MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer 291
Edit keyboard shortcut 342
Edit Keyboard shortcut 262
Edit menu 104, 263, 339
Edit menu elements 238
Edit settings... 304
Edit snap point 268, 285, 290, 296, 301, 304
Edit title 151
Edit your own menu entries 244
Editing an effects curve in the object 181
Effects 22, 36, 151, 155, 160, 204, 271
Effects (FX) 271
Effects and mix down of synth objects 195
Effects curves - Additional functions 181
Effects library 276
Effects menu 340
Embed Flash videos into your own web page 334
Encoder settings 251
Enhanced single-frame recording dialog settings 72
Equalizer 165, 171
Exit 263
Export 206
Export as transition... 221
Export audio/video 223
Export Dolby Digital Surround via Smart Encoding 206
Export DV/HDV 224
Export formats 215
Export movie 215, 258, 338
Export movie file 257
Export to MAGIX Online Album 292, 299
Export to MAGIX Online Print Service 292
Export to magix.info 260
Export to mobile devices 226
Exporting as Flash 219
Extra in the Plus version 24
Extract 266

www.magix.com
398 Index
Extract sound from videos 106

Fade in time code 153, 288, 307

Fades 35
Fades from the Media Pool 109
Farbbereiche einzeln bearbeiten (Plus-Version) 132
Features 19
Field 383
Field order 360, 367
File 256
File formats 19, 347
File menu 256, 337
File will not load 319
Film length 155
Film menu & chapter menu 240
Find knowledge & workshops 280
Finished panorama (2 images) 149
Font 151
For iPod 374
For Sony PSP 374
Form group 45, 266
Format settings for the selected conversion process 254
Frame 383
Free activation (MPEG-2, MPEG-4, Dolby Digital 2.0 & 5.1) 344
Full screen view 30, 99
Functionality 50
Further edit DVD 245
FX tracks (effect tracks) 201

Games consoles 232

General 160
General advice for operating both trim editors 122
General notes on AVI videos 347
General settings 375
Generate background music 187
Generic 357, 363
Get in contact with other users 281
GOP 383
GOP structure 362, 370
Grid and snap 114
Group associated recordings together 156

www.magix.com
 Index 399

H.264 56, 79
Hard drive camera 56, 79
HDV 57
HDV camera 65
Help 279, 341
Help menu 279
Hook up TVs, monitors or projectors 81
HSS rate 369
Hue 132

I frames 384
If you still have questions... 389
Image formation in Vertical Blank Intervals (VBI) 318
Image objects 290
Image stabilization 146
Image stabilization dialog 147
Import 205
Import a non-copy-protected DVD 80
Import audio CD 183
Import Audio CD track(s) 258
Import media backup 325
Import movie file 257
Import/Export formats 19
Importformate 19
Importing 33
Importing and exporting surround audio files 205
Improved file import 16
Improved video upload 18
In MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer bearbeiten 271
Including video objects 155
Init delay (90 kHz) 369
Input info 363, 371
Insert 266
Insert cut 128
Insert object into the project 99
Insert video effects 273, 287, 293, 306
Integrated browser 322
Intelligent mouse mode 46
Intelligent ripple 43
Intensity 154

www.magix.com
400 Index
Interlace 384
Internet 14, 260, 338
Interpolation for interlace material 286, 305
Introduction 16
Invert image sequence for panorama image 148
ISMA compatible 373
ISO image 26

JPEG disc 354

Jump to linked page 242

Keyboard shortcut list 342

Keyboard shortcuts 26, 336

Level 365
Limiter 177
Live mode (get times from samples) 374
Load 33, 205
Load and edit audio files 182
Load audio effects 275, 297
Load audio effects from the Media Pool 160
Load backup project 262
Load backup project... 214
Load CD titles 183, 258
Load files 100
Load on-disc editing project from disc 238
Load parts of film files. 100
Load project 39, 55, 256
Load Title Effects 276
Load title template 301
Load video effects 273, 287, 292, 306
Load/Save project 338
Loading Internet media 323
Logging 67
Lower toolbar 40

MAGIX 3D Maker objects 304

MAGIX Blog Service 15, 331

www.magix.com
 Index 401
MAGIX Community 261
MAGIX Mastering Suite 172
MAGIX MovieShow Maker 23
MAGIX Music Editor 26
MAGIX News Center 40, 324
MAGIX Online Album 14, 325
MAGIX Online Album/MAGIX Online Print Service/Catooh 260
MAGIX Online Print Service 15, 327
MAGIX Online World 14
MAGIX Podcast Service 331
MAGIX Screenshare 333
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker 23, 186
MAGIX tools 34
MAGIX video export 216
MAGIX Videorecorder 24, 81
MAGIX Website Maker 15, 330
MAGIX Xtreme Photo Designer 26
MAGIX Xtreme Print Center 26
magix.info 329
Magnetic objects 108
Manage movies 256
Managing video projects 212
Manual timer programming 96
Manually compile files 259
Marker 268
Marker > Automatic chapter markers 119
Marker > Delete (all) chapter markers 119
Marker -> Jump to range start/end 270
Marker -> Reset selected range 270
Marker > Set chapter marker 118
Marker -> Set range start/end 270
Markers 116
Master audio effect rack 277
Master audio track 129
Master effects 157, 271
Master track (Plus version) 202
Mastering 202
Mastering Suite 277
Max b-frames count 370
Max GOP length 370
Max key interval 362
Max. rate 362
Media Pool 33, 278
Memory 246
Menu 236

www.magix.com
402 Index
Menu entry/menu page properties 242
Menu image 243
Menu intro 240
Menu text 242
Menus 256
miniDVD 354
Mirror 142
Mix down of audio objects 211
Mixdown Audio 267
Mixer 41, 200, 277
Mixer tracks 200
Mobile phones 230
Mode 361, 368
More extras 27
More online services 330
Motion 286, 291, 304
Motion estimation 381
Motion stabilizer 271, 284
Mouse mode for individual objects 46
Mouse modes 46, 337
Move 103
Move screen view 270
Move view 336
Movement 340
Movement & zoom 141
Movement effect templates 272
Movement effects 36, 272
Movement effects in the Media Pool 137
Movement in direction 140
Movie as sequence of individual pictures 217
Movie information 53
Movie settings 51, 262
Moving objects 103
MPEG Compression 346
MPEG glossary 381
MPEG-4 357
MPEG-4 encoder settings 357
MPEG-4 import 101
MPEG-4 preset 357
Multi Disc 356
Multicam 270
Multicam edit functions 128
Multi-cam editing (Plus version) 126
MultiMax 175
Multimedia editable DVD menus 23
Multiplexer 373

www.magix.com
 Index 403
Multitrack ripple 44
Musical editing 265
Mute button 41
My device is not in the list, what should I do? 229
My media 34
My music 34
My pictures 34
My videos 34

Navigation 239
Navigation buttons 33
Navigation in the browser 322
New functions 16
New movie 256
New project 38, 256
New project disc settings or new movie 55
New title editor 18
Normalize 274, 296
Note on SVCD compatibility 240

Object grid 45
Object handles 105
Object properties 289, 294, 300, 302, 307
Object trimmer 277, 285
Object zoom 17
OnDisc Editing 245
Online 14, 324
Online functions 322
Online lexicon 389
Online login details 260, 333
Online menu 279
Online tutorials 280
Online update 282
Open 205, 256, 258
Open batch conversion 253
Open browser 322
Open files 19, 182, 183, 258, 262
Opening and closing credits 156
Optimize movie view 278
Optimize Video/Audio 22
Options 250

www.magix.com
404 Index
Options for using the final movie 215
Organizers and PDAs 231
Output audio/video 259
Output format 373
Overview 113, 278
Overview mode 113
Overview of the device classes 230
Overview of the different disc types 348
Overwrite 44
Overwrite range 129

P frames and B frames 386

Panorama automation 203
Parametric Equalizer 173
Pass 368
Paste modes 42
Paste objects 263
Performance test for your PC during AVCHD import 17
Picture type 360, 367
Pixel aspect ratio 362
Place keyframe 179
Play 309
Playback functions 336
Playback in the Arranger/Preview and playback in video recorder 317
Playback marker 116
Playing videos on digital devices 224
Position 137
Prediction 386
Preface 3
Preparation 126
Preparation - Setting the start marker and object end 189
Preparing animations 178
Prerequisites for using the beat recognition assistant 189
Presets 142
Preview and editing 234
Preview audio mouse mode 47
Preview function 38
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant 320
Problems and solutions 319
Profile/Level 358
Profiles 364
Program 93
Program help 389
Program monitor 277

www.magix.com
 Index 405
Program settings 39, 262, 309
Programming the synth object 195
Programming TV recording 94
Project 278
Project settings 54
Projects 34
Properties & title 155
Pulldown 360, 367

Quantization scaling 388

Queued entries for batch conversion 254
Quickstart/Recording/Editing/Burning and exporting tutorial video 280

Range 265
Ranges in the video monitor 117
Real time 160
Real-time multicam editing 128
Record audio / images / video 258
Record dialog analog video recording 68
Record screen contents (Plus version) 73
Record sound 76
Recording 19
Recordings 34
Red/Green/Blue 132
Red-eye-removal 132
Reduce volume 79, 274, 296
Register as guest of a screen session 333
Register as host for a screen transfer 333
Register online 282
Remote control 235
Remote Control 85, 86
Remove a channel logo with the 146
Remove end 42
Remove object end 104
Remove scene 42, 104, 265
Remove start 42, 104
Rename movie 257
Replace 44
Replacing an object's source 128
Requirements 204
Reset audio effects 275, 298

www.magix.com
406 Index
Reset background 272
Reset program settings to default... 283
Reset track curves 299
Reset video effects 273, 287, 293, 306
Reset window arrangement 278
Restore 41, 263
Restore disc project from (S)VCD/video DVD 213
Restore normal view 316
Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes 180
Reverb 166
Reverb/Delay 166
Revised DVD menu design 18
Revised MAGIX MovieShow Maker 17
Rewrite 245, 250
Rotate 142
Rotation & Mirror 141
Run of the panorama and volume curve 203
RW 250

Saturation 132
Save as special effect 302
Save as title template 301
Save audio effects 275, 297
Save objects separately 107
Save only Tempo & Beat information 191
Save photos with effects 271, 291
Save project 39, 56, 256
Save project as... 56, 256
Save recorded programs 98
Save Title Effects 276
Save video effects 273, 287, 293, 306
Save/delete style template 154
Scan image 258
Scanning CD tracks with the recording dialog 186
Scene change detection 362, 370
Scene markers 120
Scene recognition 271, 284, 290
Screen capturing 73
Screenshare 333
Scrubbing 210
Activate 210
Apply 211
Modes 210
Search and delete superfluous files 214

www.magix.com
 Index 407
Searching for and removing ads (only in Plus version) 271, 284
Searching for and removing ads (Plus version) 115
Secondary color correction 17, 132
Section 272, 286, 291, 305
Select a movie to edit 40
Select all objects 264
Select music style 186
Select objects 103
Select pictures for panorama 148
Select scanner 258
Select the recording method 59
Separate project onto multiple discs 247
Serial number 13
Set as background 273
Set chapter marker 45, 269
Set mood change 187
Set project marker 117, 268
Set volume 274, 296
Setting the manual and and Onbeat/Offbeat 190
Settings 52, 94, 262, 309
Settings... 295
Setup 197
Setup for DVB cards 85
Sharpness 136, 158
Shortcuts 26, 336
Show movie overview 31, 99, 278
Shrink or interlace videos 106
Shut down PC automatically after successful export 255
Simple crossfade 109
Single frame 70
Single frame as BMP 221
Single frame as JPG 222
Single-frame recording 63, 70
Single-track ripple 43
Size 138
Size & Position 137
Slice count 361, 368
Slideshow disc 354
Slideshow Maker 154, 267
Snap to other audio objects 299
Soft movement 180
Sound optimization 162
Sound restoration 162
Soundtrack Maker 267
Source tracks and preview images 127

www.magix.com
408 Index
Speed 136
Split 41, 104
Split movie 42, 105, 265
Split scene 264
Split stereo objects into mono objects 299
Splitting objects 103
Start batch conversion 255
Start the scanning process 259
Statistics 363, 371
Steps for burning DVDs, etc. 249
Stereo FX 166, 176
StoryMaker 33, 35, 36
Straighten horizon 142
Stretch mouse mode 47
Style template 154
Super Video CD (SVCD) 352
Support 11
Support for AVCHD camcorders 25
Surround 204
Synthesizer 25, 161, 194, 276
System 315
System requirements 14

Task assistant 389

Task assistant + Video tooltips 24
Tasks 279
Tasks menu 279
Television 223, 316
Templates 236
Tempo adjustment 191
Tempo and beat recognition (Plus version) 188
Test series with variable encoder settings 247
Text objects 301
The 50
The bass section (bottom half) 199
The CD-ROM configuration dialog 185
The mixer in Surround mode 207
The rhythm section (top half) 197
The tracklist dialog 185
Time control 72
Timeline mode / Storyboard mode / Overview mode 21
Timer programming 94
Time-saving VHS copying technique 23
Timeshift mode 97

www.magix.com
 Index 409
Time-shifted TV 97
Timestretch and pitchshift 169
Timestretch/Resample 274, 297
Title 36
Title editor 41, 150
Title Editor 275, 301
Title Effects 275
Title object 152
Titles and effects 129
Toolbars 38
Track effects automation 203, 208
Tracks 48
Transfer via infrared 228
Transfer with Bluetooth 227
Transition 155
Transitions 295
Transitions (fades) 109
Transport control 31
Transport control buttons 31
Transport control in Media pool 337
Travel route animation 267
Trim Objects 122
Trimmer for individual objects 123
TV picture 158, 159
TV program 93
Twain scanner 338

Uncompressed movie 217

undo 263
Undo 40
Ungroup objects 45, 266
Update devices online 229
Upload all selected media in Media Pool 261
Upload current movie as video 261
Upper button bar 38
Use image file 54
Use plug-ins 143, 200
Use preview image from movie 54
User directory 34
User-defined: 229
Using audio effects 161
Using BPM and beat detection 191
Using video effect plug-ins 144

www.magix.com
410 Index

Various file list view modes 37

VBV buf. size 362
VCR settings 83
Verbesserte Audio-Vorhörmöglichkeit (Scrubbing) 17
Video as AVI 216
Video as DV-AVI 216
Video as MotionJPEG AVI 217
Video as MPEG video 216
Video as MPEG-4 video 220
Video as Quicktime Movie 216
Video as RealMedia video 218
Video CD (VCD) 353
Video Editing on the PC 346
Video effect templates 272
Video effects 36, 272, 287, 292, 305
Video effects in the Media Pool 130
Video format 364
Video mix 107
Video mode 317
Video monitor 30, 99
Video object effects 271, 340
Video objects 284
Video output to DV device 317
Video playback via TV output 223
Video players 232
Video plug-ins manager 144
Video recording 56
Video settings 376
Video/Audio 313
View 278, 316
Vimeo 261
Virtual Dub-Plug-ins 143
Volume and panorama automation 203
Volume automation 203
Volume curve 275, 298
VST plug-ins 200

What is MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16? 16

What’s new in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 16? 16
White balance 131
Window 277

www.magix.com
 Index 411
Window menu 341
Windows Media Export 217
Windows menu 277
Wizards 267
WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc) 355
Work areas 28
Working with objects 103

YouTube 261

Zoom horizontal 279

Zoom vertical 279
Zooming 48

www.magix.com